Instruction Book

M‑4272 Motor Bus

Transfer System
Firmware V02.01.07 and Later
ISScom S-4200
TRADEMARKS
All brand or product names referenced in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

The content of this Instruction Book is provided for informational use only and is subject to change
without notice. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. has approved only the English version of this document.
 SYNCHRONIZING

Digital Motor Bus

Transfer System M‑4272
Integrated Synchronizing System®

• Provides Automatic and Manual transfers of motor bus

systems in power plants and industrial processing plants to
ensure process continuity
• Automatically selects Fast, In-Phase, Residual Voltage, and
Fixed Time motor bus transfers, based on varying system
conditions
• Applicable for one way and bi-directional Manual and
Automatic transfers
• Can be expanded to accommodate multiple breaker
configurations
• Multiple setpoint profiles for various application requirements
• Integrated control, supervisory functions, sequence of events,
and oscillograph recording in one device
• Extensive commissioning tools, including ringdown analysis
• Optional M-3919A Graphic Display Unit (GDU) and Touch
Screen Human Machine Interface (HMI) for communicating
with one or two M-4272 units
• Optional M-5072 Retrofit Kit for M-4272 Replacement of
M-0272/M-0236B Analog Transfer Logic Controller

Industry Leader Since 1969

Made in the USA
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Standard Features
Automatic Transfer: The digital Motor Bus Transfer Manual Transfer: When a Manual Transfer is initiated
System (MBTS) provides the following Automatic the digital MBTS provides the following:
Transfer logic and features:
Sync check functions with adjustable parameters
• Transfer initiated by protective relay external to
the MBTS • Hot Parallel Transfer if enabled (make-before-
break)
• Automatic Transfer after a loss of the motor bus
supply voltage based on the programmable • Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, and Residual
undervoltage element. This provides a selectable Voltage Transfer (if the Hot Parallel Transfer is
backup feature if a manual or protective relay disabled)
transfer is not initiated. • Programmable Load Shedding with no time
• Fast Transfer with adjustable phase angle limit delay for Fast Transfer

• In-Phase Transfer at the first phase coincidence • Programmable load shedding prior to initiating
if Fast Transfer is not possible In-phase Transfer and Residual Voltage Transfer

• Residual Voltage Transfer at an adjustable low • Verify the new source (the source to which the
residual voltage limit if Fast Transfer and In- bus is being transferred) is healthy and within
Phase Transfer are not possible acceptable upper and lower voltage limits

• Fixed Time Transfer after an adjustable time

delay Circuit Breaker Control: The digital Motor Bus
Transfer System includes the following Circuit Breaker
• Programmable Load Shedding with no time Control features:
delay for Fast Transfer
• Control of two circuit breakers with two individual
• Programmable load shedding prior to initiating programmable breaker closing times
In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer,
and Fixed Time Transfer • Three-breaker configuration can be provided by
two M-4272 devices
• Adjustable setpoints for delta voltage limit and
delta frequency limit • Breaker status supervision

• Verify the new source (the source to which the • Breaker failure monitoring
bus is being transferred) is healthy and within • Four trip and close circuit monitoring inputs
acceptable upper and lower voltage limits

–2–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Additional Standard Features Optional Features

• Sequential or Simultaneous Transfer Mode • 5 A or 1 A models available
• Bus Phase Undervoltage (27B) • 60 Hz or 50 Hz models available
• Frequency (81) and Rate of Change of • M-3919A Graphic Display Unit/Human Machine
Frequency (81R) for load shedding Interface
• Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection • Available in vertical panel mount
Source 1 and 2 (50S1) (50S2)
• M-5072 Retrofit Kit for M-4272 Replacement
• Breaker Failure (50BF), Source 1 and Source 2 of M-0272/M-0236B Analog Transfer Logic
Controller
• Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection (60FL)
• Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (MODBUS
• Auto Trip over TCP/IP)
• Auto Close • Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (DNP over
• Four dry output contacts (two trip and two close) TCP/IP)
for Source 1 and Source 2, one lockout/blocking • Serial Port TIA‑232 with RJ‑45 Connector (DNP)
output contact, and 11 programmable output
contacts (10 Form 'a' and one Form 'c') • Serial Port TIA‑485 with RJ‑45 Connector (DNP)
• Six Breaker Status inputs (a, b, and service • Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (IEC 61850
position) for the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers, Protocol)
twelve programmable digital inputs
• All functions can be enabled or disabled
• Remote/Local control selection
• Device ON/OFF Control Selection
• M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module
• M-3972 Status Module
• IRIG-B time synchronization
• Oscillographic recording
• Two RS-232 ports (front and rear) and one
RS‑485 port (rear)
• S-4200 ISScom Communications and
Oscillographic Analysis Software (firmware
versions V.02.01.07 or later)

–3–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

The M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System provides Automatic and Manual Transfers. The Fast Transfer,
In-Phase Transfer, and Residual Voltage Transfer methods are activated at the same time, if enabled. If the
conditions for the Fast Transfer are not met, then the In-Phase Transfer or the Residual Voltage Transfer will be
attempted. The Fixed Time Transfer is also provided if during a transfer operation, it is not possible to monitor
the motor bus voltage (due to Bus VT fuse loss, for example). The In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer,
and Fixed Time Transfer methods can be selectively disabled. The Automatic or Manual Transfer operation can
be blocked by control/status input or remote serial communications. See Figure 2 for Typical Application of Motor
Bus Transfer Systems and Figure 3 for Open Transition Transfer methods.

Automatic Transfer
Automatic Transfer can be initiated by an external protection trip signal (86P) or an external undervoltage function
(27) using control/status input to the Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) device or triggered by a sudden loss
of motor bus supply voltage using the internal bus undervoltage relay (27B Function). Automatic Transfer allows
transfer operation in both directions: from Source 1 to Source 2, and vice-versa. The Automatic Transfer provides
Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer and Fixed Time Transfer. The Automatic Transfer is
blocked when any lockout/blocking condition occurs. The MBTS will not respond to any transfer command and
will not send the trip command while in the lockout/blocking condition.

Manual Transfer
Manual transfer can be initiated by using the local Human-Machine Interface (HMI), from a control/status input
or through remote serial communications. The Manual Transfer allows transfer operation in either direction: from
Source 1 to Source 2, and vice versa. Manual Transfer provides Hot Parallel Transfer or a combination of Fast
Transfer, In-Phase Transfer and Residual Voltage Transfer. The Manual Transfer is blocked when any lockout/
blocking condition occurs. The MBTS will not respond to any transfer command and will not send the trip command
while in the lockout/blocking condition.

Transfer Modes
There are two transfer modes, Sequential and Simultaneous, in the open transition transfer operation.

Sequential Transfer Mode

Once a transfer is initiated, and if the Sequential Mode is selected, the old source breaker is tripped within 10
ms and closure of the new source* breaker is attempted only upon confirmation by the breaker status contact
that the old source breaker has opened. Within 4 ms of receipt of this confirmation, all three methods, Fast, In-
Phase and Residual Voltage Transfer are enabled to supervise closure of the new source* breaker, and the Fixed
Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles later. The new source* breaker is then closed by the Fast Transfer Method if
the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is within the delta phase angle limit immediately
after the old source breaker opens.
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is not within the delta phase angle limit, the old
source breaker is still tripped. When the four methods of transfer are enabled, the new source* breaker then
closes either as a result of a subsequent movement into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time
Window, a movement through a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window, or
by a drop in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed time delay of the
Fixed Time Transfer. Transfer is completed and the new source* breaker is closed by any of the above methods
whose criteria is first satisfied.
Refer to Figure 4 for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.

* NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–4–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Simultaneous Transfer Mode

Alternatively, once a transfer is initiated, and if the Simultaneous Mode is selected, within 10 ms of transfer
initiate, all three methods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and Residual Voltage Transfer are immediately enabled to
supervise closure of the new source* breaker without waiting for the breaker status contact confirmation that
the old source breaker has opened. At the same instant, the commands for the old source breaker to trip and
the new source* breaker to close are sent simultaneously if and only if the phase angle between the motor bus
and the new source* is within the delta phase angle limit for the Fast Transfer Method immediately upon transfer
initiation. However only the Fixed Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old source breaker has opened.
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is not within the delta phase angle limit, the old
source breaker is still tripped. When the four methods of transfer are enabled, the new source* breaker then
closes either as a result of a subsequent movement into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time
Window, a movement through a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window, or
by a drop in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed time delay of the
Fixed Time Transfer. Transfer is completed and the new source* breaker is closed by any of the above methods
whose criteria is first satisfied.
Refer to Figure 5 for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.

Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection (60FL)

A Bus VT Fuse-Loss condition is detected by comparing either the three-phase voltage of the motor bus to the
three-phase voltage of the connected source (VT's in three-phase connection) or single phase voltage of the
motor bus to a single phase voltages of the connected source (VT's in single phase connection): phase a to
phase a, phase b to phase b, and phase c to phase c.

Auto Trip
If an external operation closes the second breaker while leaving the first one closed, and if the Auto Trip feature
is enabled, there is a breaker trip option: the MBTS will trip the breaker that was originally closed or the breaker
that has just been closed within an adjustable time delay (0 to 50 Cycles in increments of 0.5 Cycle) after the
second breaker is closed. This Auto Trip operates to transfer in either direction. The purpose is to allow external
parallel transfer but prohibits inadvertent parallel operation. It must be noted that the external operation that
closed the second breaker must be supervised by means external to the motor bust transfer system.

Auto Close
If an external operation opens the second breaker while leaving the first one open, and if the Auto Close feature
is selected, the MBTS will close the breaker that was originally opened. The originally opened breaker will be
closed using the Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer or Fixed Time Transfer method
depending upon the bus voltage decayed condition. This Auto Close operates to transfer in either direction. The
purpose is to permit a transfer when the normally-closed breaker is accidentally/inadvertently tripped resulting
in two open breakers. This operation is very similar to the regular transfer process except it does not send out
the trip command, since the second breaker is already opened.

* NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–5–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Lockout/Blocking
A transfer is blocked when any lockout/blocking condition described below is active:
• Voltage Blocking – If prior to a transfer, the new source* voltage exceeds the Upper or Lower voltage
limits, all transfers are blocked as long as the voltage remains outside these limits.
• External Blocking – When this control input contact is closed, all transfers are blocked.
• Incomplete Transfer Lockout – Blocks any transfer initiated by a protective relay initiate or an automatic
initiated transfer or manual transfer if the last transfer has not been completed within the time delay. A
time delay can be set from 50 to 3000 Cycles. The MBTS remains in the lockout condition until manually
reset.
• Bus VT Fuse Loss Blocking – Transfer is blocked if the Bus VT fuse loss is detected and the customer
has selected to block transfers when this occurs.
• "Both Breakers Same State" Blocking – If both breaker status contacts are in the open state, due to
an external operation that opens the second breaker while leaving the first one open, and if the Auto
Close feature is not selected, no transfer sequence is initiated. Furthermore, any subsequent initiation
of a transfer sequence while the breakers are in this state is inhibited. Also, if both breaker status
contacts are closed due to an external operation that closes the second breaker while leaving the first
one closed, and if the auto trip feature is disabled, no transfer sequence is initiated.
• Transfer in Process Blocking – Once a transfer is in process, any other transfer initiate inputs will be
ignored until the original transfer is complete.
• Blocking After Transfer – After a transfer has been completed, any additional transfers are blocked for
0 to 8160 cycles, as selected by the user.
• Trip/Close Circuit Open Blocking – Transfer is blocked if the Trip or Close Circuit Open is detected.
• 52a and 52b Position Disagreement Blocking – Transfer is blocked when the 52a and 52b status input
positions disagree (applicable when both 52a and 52b status inputs are used).

The Output 8 Lockout/Blocking Output is energized when any Lockout/Blocking condition as mentioned above
is active except Transfer In Process Blocking and Blocking After Transfer.

* NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–6–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

TRANSFER SETTINGS
Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Automatic Transfer

Fast Transfer
Delta Phase Angle Limit* 0.0 to 90.0 Degrees 0.1 Degree ±0.5 Degree
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or 5%
Time Window** 1 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Closing Command
Time Delay*** 0 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
* Accuracy defined at a constant frequency with a delta frequency of zero (0).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.
*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous. The trip and close commands are normally issued
at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-
make mode of operation (open transition).

In-Phase Transfer

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%

Delta Frequency Limit* 0.10 to 10.00 Hz 0.05 Hz ±0.02 Hz (±0.1Hz)***
Time Window** 10 to 600 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of
47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is ±0.1 Hz (3-phase); ±0.4 Hz(single phase).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.
*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.
For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 10.0 Hz slip
frequency.

Residual Voltage Transfer

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 50 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Load Shedding Time Delay* 0 to 100 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.
* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command
for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

Fixed Time Transfer

Fixed Time Delay 30 to 1000 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
Load Shedding Time Delay* 0 to 100 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
This method is based on time delay only, and does not use the voltage, phase angle, frequency or current to
supervise the closing of the new source breaker. The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being
transferred.
Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.
* The load shedding command is issued when the Fixed Time delay has timed out. The Close command for the
Fixed Time Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–7–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Manual Transfer

Fast Transfer
Delta Phase Angle Limit* 0.0 to 90.0 Degrees 0.1 Degree ±0.5 Degree
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or ±5%
Time Window** 1 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Closing Command
Time Delay*** 0 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
* Accuracy defined at a constant frequency with a delta frequency of zero (0).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.
*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous mode. The trip and close commands are normally
issued at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-
before-make mode of operation (open transition).

In-Phase Transfer

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%

Delta Frequency Limit* 0.10 to 10.00 Hz 0.05 Hz ±0.02 Hz (±0.1Hz)***
Time Window** 10 to 600 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of
47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is ±0.1 Hz (3-phase); ±0.4 Hz (single phase).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.
*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.
For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 10.0 Hz slip
frequency.

Residual Voltage Transfer

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 50 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Load Shedding Time Delay* 0 to 100 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command
for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.
Enabling load shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–8–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Manual Transfer (cont.)

Hot Parallel Transfer

Delta Phase Angle Limit* 0.0 to 90.0 Degrees 0.1 Degree ±0.5 Degree
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 0.50 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or ±5%
Time Window 1.0 to 50.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Tripping Command
Time Delay** 0.0 to 30.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
* Accuracy defined at a constant frequency with a delta frequency of zero (0).
** This time delay is only used in the Manual Transfer to implement a Hot Parallel Transfer (make-before-break).

Auto Trip

Trip Originally Closed Enable/Disable ____ ____

Breaker
Trip Breaker Enable/Disable ____ ____
Just Closed
Tripping Command
Time Delay 0.0 to 50.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–9–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Common Function Settings

Upper Voltage Limit 5 to 180 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%

New Source
Lower Voltage Limit 5 to 180 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
New Source
Breaker Closing Time #1
(Source 1 Breaker)(1) 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Breaker Closing Time #2
(Source 2 Breaker)(1) 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Breaker Closing Time
Deviation #1 (2) 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Breaker Closing Time
Deviation #2 (2) 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
This is the time it takes the breaker to close from the issue of a close command to when the breaker status
(1)

contact closes. The selectable adaptive breaker closing time is also provided.
(2)
An alarm is activated if the actual Breaker Closing Time exceeds the programmed closing time by ±this value.

52a and 52b Position Disagreement

Pickup Time Delay(3) 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
(Source 1 Breaker)
Dropout Time Delay(3) 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
(Source 1 Breaker)
Pickup Time Delay(3) 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
(Source 2 Breaker)
Dropout Time Delay(3) 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
(Source 2 Breaker)
The Time Delays are only applicable when both 52a and 52b Status Inputs of the S1 and S2 breakers are used.
(3)

The Pickup Time Delay is used to block transfer when the 52a and 52b Status Input positions disagree.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–10–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Common Function Settings

Incomplete Transfer
Lockout Time(4) 50 to 3000 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
Local Manual Transfer
Initiate Time Delay(5) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Remote Manual Transfer
Initiate Time Delay(6) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Blocking After
Transfer Time(7) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Trip Command
Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Close Command
Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Trip/Close Circuit
(TCM/CCM)
Open Condition
Block Transfer Disable/Enable
This timer is used for situations where the transfer was not completed. Response to a breaker failure is
(4)

considered a complete transfer, and resets this timer.

This time delay is only applicable when the manual transfer is initiated from the local front panel via the HMI or
(5)

Com1 port.
This time delay is only applicable when manual transfer is initiated from the Control/Status input, Com2 Port,
(6)

Com3 Port or Ethernet Port.

(7)
This timer is used to block any additional transfer after a transfer has been completed.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–11–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

FUNCTIONS
Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

27B Bus Phase Undervoltage

27B Pickup #1, #2, #3, #4 5 to 120 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%

Inhibit Setting** 5 to 120 V 1V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle -1 to +3 Cycles or ±0.5%*
* The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at
a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency
down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is ≤ 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.
** The Voltage Inhibit setting can be enabled or disabled.
27B #1 is the Bus Phase Undervoltage initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S1 to S2 direction.
27B #2 is the Bus Phase Undervoltage initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S2 to S1 direction.
27B #3 can be used for load shedding.
27B #4 can be used for alarm or trip function.
The 27B functions are applicable only when the bus phase voltage input is applied.

50S1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection (Source 1)

50 Pickup #1, #2 1.0 to 100.0 A 0.1 A ±0.1 A or ±3%

S1
(0.2 to 20.0 A)* (±0.02 A or ±3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±2 Cycles or ±1%
* Values in parentheses apply to 1A secondary rating. Since this is only a single phase element, the 50S1 Function
can only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection.

50S2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection (Source 2)

50 Pickup #1, #2 1.0 to 100.0 A 0.1 A ±0.1 A or ±3%

S2
(0.2 to 20.0 A)* (±0.02 A or ±3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±2 Cycles or ±1%
* Values in parentheses apply to 1A secondary rating. Since this is only a single phase element, the 50S2 Function
can only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection.

50BF-1 Breaker Failure (Source 1)

50 Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A ±0.1 A or ±2%

BF1
(0.02 to 2.00 A)* (±0.02 A or ±2%)
Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
50BF-1 can be initiated from designated M‑4272 output contacts or programmable inputs.
* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating

50BF-2 Breaker Failure (Source 2)

50
Pickup Current
BF2 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A ±0.1 A or ±2%
(0.02 to 2.00 A)* (±0.02 A or ±2%)
Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
50BF-2 can be initiated from designated M‑4272 output contacts or programmable inputs.
* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating
†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.
Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–12–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)

Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only.
The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable
time delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function
(50BF) when current is present.

Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)

Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only.
The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable
time delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function
(50BF) when current is present.

81 Frequency (bus voltage)

81 Pickup #1, #2 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.02 Hz (±1.0 Hz)**

40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Time Delay #1, #2 5 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle ±3 Cycles or ±1%
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53
Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is ±0.1 Hz (3-phase); ±0.4 Hz(single phase).
The 81 #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. The 81 Function is automatically disabled when the bus
phase voltage input is less than 5 to 15 V (Positive Sequence) based on the frequency, or less than 5 V (Single
Phase).
* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency model.
** Value in parentheses applies to single phase bus voltage frequency.

81R Rate of Change of Frequency (bus voltage)

81R Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec. ±0.05 Hz/Sec. or ±5%
Time Delay #1, #2 3 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +20 Cycles
Negative Sequence
Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% ±0.5%
Increasing Frequency Enable/Disable
The 81R #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. 81R function can only be used when the bus voltage
input is three-phase, and for load shedding.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–13–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection

60FL Delta Pickup* 5 to 25 V 1V ±.05 V or ±2%

Time Delay** 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 3 Cycles or 1%****
Blocking Drop Out
Time Delay*** 1 to 300 Cycles 1 Cycle 3 Cycles or 1%****
* Mismatched voltage of the motor bus in respect to the connected source.
** This time delay is for the programmable alarm output.
*** This is the time it takes to drop out (reset) the block transfer after no Bus VT fuse-loss is detected.
**** The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at
a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency
down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is ≤ 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.
If the bus VT fuse-loss is detected, the user must either select block transfer or initiate the Fixed Time Transfer.
Bus VT fuse-loss output is initiated from internally generated logic.

Trip and Close Circuit Monitor

Trip Circuit Monitor
TCM TCM-1 Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
TCM-1 Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
TCM-2 Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
TCM-2 Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%

Close Circuit Monitor

CCM CCM-1 Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%

CCM-1 Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
CCM-2 Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
CCM-2 Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
The CCM/TCM inputs are provided for monitoring the continuity of the Source 1 and Source 2 trip and close circuits.
The inputs can be used for nominal trip/close coil voltages of 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 125 Vdc and 250 Vdc. Trip and closing
circuit monitoring are performed in the active breaker status only (trip circuit supervision when breaker is closed and
close circuit supervision when breaker is open.) Both the DC supply and continuity for each of the circuits are monitored.

ISSLogic®

ISSLogic uses control/status input status, system status, function status, output contact close signals
ISSL to develop 6 programmable logic schemes.
Time Delay #1-#6 0 to 65500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Dropout/Reset Time Delay
#1-#6 0 to 65500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.

–14–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups)

The system supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows multiple setpoint profiles to be defined for the type
of transfer initiated (Automatic , Manual or Hot Parallel) and the direction of the next transfer.

Metering
The Digital Motor Bus Transfer System provides metering of voltage and current of the Source 1 and Source 2,
and Voltage and Frequency of the Motor Bus.
Metering accuracies are:
Voltage: ±0.5 V or ±0.5%, whichever is greater (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for
50 Hz models)
±1.0 V or ±0.75%, whichever is greater (below 57 Hz or beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; below
47 Hz or beyond 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
Current: 5 A rating, ±0.1 A or ±3%, whichever is greater
1 A rating, ±0.02 A or ±3%, whichever is greater
Frequency: ±0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
±0.1 Hz (below 57 Hz or beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; below 47 Hz or beyond 53 Hz for 50
Hz models)
Phase Angle: ±0.5 degree or ±0.5%, whichever is greater

Oscillographic Recorder
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, and status
inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The
number of samples per cycle used to store the data is user selectable. The number of samples per cycle that
can be selected is 16 or 32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples selected effects the length of the data that can
be saved and its resolution. The lower the number of samples, the longer the record length that can be stored
(but at a lower resolution).
The oscillographic recorder is triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a protective relay initiate
input), an automatically initiated signal, a trip output, a manual transfer signal or from serial communications.
When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data in
memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a
user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be analyzed using Beckwith Electric ISScom®
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software, and are also available in COMTRADE file format.

Transfer Event Log

A transfer event log is considered complete when one of following occurs:
1. When the breaker from the old source opens and the breaker to the new source* closes.
2. When a breaker failure occurs.
3. When the incomplete transfer timer times out.

Depending on transfer type, up to four transfers will be stored. When 16 events are stored, any subsequent
event will cause the oldest event to be lost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is time stamped with the date
and time in 1 ms increments.
The trigger and complete events are used to define the time frame during which the transfer event log is storing
information. A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. The Transfer Event
Log is available for viewing utilizing the S‑4200 ISScom Communications Software.

*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–15–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Sequence of Events Recording

In addition to the Transfer Event Log the Digital Motor Bus Transfer System provides Sequence of Events
Recording. The Sequence of Events Recording stores every change in the input status, trip commands, close
commands, any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change in any breaker status, and status reset. Each
of these Running Events are time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments. The Running Event Log
stores the last 512 events, when a new event occurs the oldest event is removed. A reset feature is provided to
clear this log through the serial communications. The events and the associated data are available for viewing
utilizing the ISScom Communications Software.

Calculations
Current and Voltage Values: The Digital Motor Bus Transfer System uses discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and
RMS calculation algorithm on sampled voltage and current signals to extract fundamental amplitude, phase and
frequency for the M-4272.

Power Input Options

Nominal 110/120/230/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 Vdc. UL/CSA rating 85 Vac to 265 Vac
and from 80 Vdc to 288 Vdc. Burden 20 VA at 120 Vac/125 Vdc. Withstands 315 Vdc or 300 Vac for 1 second.
Nominal 24/48 Vdc, operating range from 18 Vdc to 56 Vdc. Burden 20 VA at 24 Vdc and 20 VA at 48 Vdc.
Withstands 65 Vdc for 1 second.
This unit includes two power supplies which are not redundant.

Sensing Inputs
Nine Voltage Inputs – Rated for a nominal voltage of 60 Vac to 140 Vac (user configurable) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz.
Will withstand 240 V continuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Voltage transformer burden is less than 0.2
VA at 120 V. Source voltage may be phase-to ground or phase-to-phase connected. For proper operation of
M‑4272 MBTS, the connections for the Source 1, Source 2 and Bus voltages must match each other. The unit
may have up to three voltage inputs for each of the Source 1, Source 2, and Bus Voltages. Typical connection
diagrams are illustrated in Figures 10 through 15.
One Source 1 Current Input – Rated for a current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A (optional) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand
4 IR continuous current and 100 IR for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A (5 A
option), or 0.3 VA at 1 A (1 A option).
One Source 2 Current Input – Rated for a current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A (optional) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand
4 IR continuous current and 100 IR for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A (5 A
option), or 0.3 VA at 1 A (1 A option).

Control/Status Inputs
To provide proper operation and breaker status LED indication on the front panel, the INPUT1 through
INPUT 6 status inputs must be connected to the 52a, 52b, 52a/b and 52SP (service position) breaker status
contacts. The control/status inputs, INPUT7 through INPUT18, can be programmed to initiate the transfer
or block the transfer operation, trigger the oscillographic recorder, or to operate one or more outputs. The
control/status inputs are designed to be connected to dry contacts and are internally wetted with a 24 Vdc power
supply. The four Aux Inputs must be connected to the trip and close circuit monitoring. The minimum current
value to initiate/pickup an input is > 25 mA.

*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–16–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Output Contacts
Output contacts OUTPUT1 through OUTPUT4 are available to Trip and Close the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers
and are closed for a defined pulse length (pulse length can be programmed from 15 to 30 Cycles). The power
supply alarm output contact (form 'b') and the self-test alarm output contact (form 'c'), and one output contact
for lockout or blocking status (form 'c'). These outputs are predefined.
The eleven programmable output contacts (ten form ‘a’ and one form ‘c’), the Lockout/Block alarm output contact
(form 'c'), the power supply alarm output contact (form 'b') and the self-test alarm output contact (form ‘c’), are
all rated as per IEEE C37.90 (See Tests and Standards section for details).
Any of the MBTS functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the programmable
output contacts (Outputs 5 to 16). Any output contact can also be selected as pulsed or latched. ISSLogic can
also be used to activate an output contact.

Breaker Closing Time and Breaker Failure Monitoring

The Breaker Closing Time Monitoring feature measures the breaker closing time each time a transfer occurs. If
this time varies by more than a selectable breaker closing time deviation of the programmed time, an alarm is
activated. The breaker closing time is measured from the time the close command is sent until the breaker status
indicates that the breaker is closed.
The selectable Adaptive Breaker Closing Time is provided. If it is enabled, a new setpoint of the breaker closing
time will be automatically updated to an average value of 8 breaker closing time's measurements; however the
setpoints of the breaker closing time are not permitted to write and change unless this feature is disabled.
The breaker status inputs are also monitored for breaker failure. The breaker is considered failed when the breaker
status has not changed state within a programmable time after a trip command is issued. When Simultaneous
Transfer mode is selected and a breaker failure occurs on the breaker that should have tripped, the breaker that
was just closed will be tripped. This prevents the new source* from being continuously connected with the failed
breaker, which could have a fault.
In addition to using the breaker status in determining when a breaker has failed, the current through the breaker
can also be used to determine if the breaker has operated. The loss of current after a trip can be selected to
provide a more positive indication of breaker operation. An instantaneous overcurrent breaker failure element
with a time delay (50BF) is provided to minimize breaker failure coordination margins.

Power up Self-Test and Continuous On-Line Testing

The system performs self test verifications when power is first applied to the unit. These include verifying the
operation of the multiplexer, programmable gain amplifier, analog to digital converter, DSP chip, Host processor
and all RAM chips. After the initial self test is complete and the system is operating normally, continuous self
check verification continues to check for correct operation of the system. The continuous self check verification
tests are performed in the background and do not effect the response time of the unit to emergency conditions.
In addition to the background tests, there are tests that can be performed in the diagnostic mode during periodic
off line system testing. These additional tests can exercise the relay outputs, check front panel LED operation,
verify input status operation, check pushbutton operation and communication operation.

*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–17–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Target/Status Indicators and Controls

The SYS OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer; it can be programmed to flash or to be illuminated
continuously. The SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED and SOURCE 2 BRKR CLOSED red LEDs illuminate when the
breaker is closed (when the 52a contact is closed). The SOURCE 1 BRKR OPEN and SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN
green LEDs illuminate when the breaker is open (when the 52a contact is open). The 52 contact input can be
configured for either "a", "b" or "a/b" inputs. The corresponding BRKR status LED will illuminate when any of
the conditions, events or unit functions activate.
Pressing and releasing the STATUS RESET pushbutton resets the STATUS LEDs if the conditions causing
the operation have been removed. Pressing and holding the STATUS RESET pushbutton will allow conditions,
events or functions that are picked up to be displayed. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain illuminated as long
as power is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating properly. TIME SYNC LED illuminates when
a valid IRIG-B signal is applied and time synchronization has been established. The TRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE
SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 and CLOSE SOURCE 2 status indicators are latched due to the pulsed nature
of these commands. To provide information about which outputs were operated during the last transfer the
appropriate TRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 or CLOSE SOURCE 2 LEDs in the Status
module are latched until reset or the next transfer.

Communication
Communication ports include rear RS-232 and RS-485 ports, a front RS-232 port, a rear IRIG-B port, and
an Ethernet port (optional). The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, asynchronous
communication, providing the following functions when used with the Windows® compatible S‑4200 ISScom
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software. MODBUS protocol is supported, providing:
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints and configuration
• Time-stamped status information for the 4 most recent Transfer Event logs
• Time-stamped status information for the 512 most recent events in the Sequence of Events log
• Real-time metering of all measured quantities, control status inputs, and outputs
• Downloading of recorded oscillographic data and Sequence of Events recorder data
• Initiate manual transfer and Sequence of Events recorder

Optional Ethernet Port

The RJ-45 Ethernet port supports 10/100 Base-T fast Ethernet standard with auto negotiable speed. Additionally,
MDI‑X capability is provided to eliminate the need of a crossover cable when two similar devices are connected.
The optional RJ-45 Ethernet port may be purchased with the following communication protocols:
• MODBUS/BECO2200 over TCP/IP
• DNP over TCP/IP
• IEC 61850: up to 4 concurrent sessions, to monitor all metering values, change settings and generate
unsolicited reports. Refer to M‑4272 Instruction Book, Section 4.1 Unit Setup for detailed information.

The ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software enables the plotting and printing of M-4272
waveform data downloaded from the unit to any Windows® compatible computer. The ISScom Communications
and Oscillograph Analysis Software can also be used to analyze the operation of the system, determine timing
of the trip and close commands, breaker times and to evaluate "bus ringdown" test data. The evaluation of "bus
ringdown" data eliminates the requirement for separate recording equipment during commissioning.

*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–18–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

IRIG-B
The M-4272 accepts either modulated (B-122) using the BNC port or demodulated (B-002) using the the RS-232
port IRIG-B time clock synchronization signals. The IRIG-B time synchronization information is used to correct the
local calendar/clock and provide greater system wide synchronization for status and oscillograph time tagging.

HMI Module
Local access to the M-4272 is provided through the M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, allowing
for easy-to-use, menu-driven access to all functions using a 6-pushbutton keyboard and a 2-line by 24 character
alphanumeric display. The M-3931 module includes the following features:
• User-definable access codes providing three levels of security
• Real-time metering of all measured quantities, control status inputs, and outputs
• Initiate Manual Transfer
• Remote/Local control
• Device On/Off control

Status Module
An M-3972 Status Module provides 24 status and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate status LEDs illuminate when
the corresponding M-4272 conditions, event or function activates. The status indicators can be reset with the
STATUS RESET pushbutton if the activated conditions have been removed. The OUTPUT LEDs indicate the
status of the programmable output contacts. There are an additional 4 status LEDs, 8 output LEDs and 12 input
LEDs located on the front panel.

ISSLogic®
This feature can be programmed utilizing the S‑4200 ISScom Communications Software. ISScom takes the
control/status input status, system status and function status, and by employing (OR, AND, NOR and NAND)
boolean logic and timers, can activate an output, change active setting profiles, initiate transfer, or block transfer.
There are six ISSLogic Functions per setting profile, depending on the number of different MBTS settings defined,
the scheme may provide up to 24 different logic schemes. The ISSLogic Function Diagram is illustrated in Figure 1.

*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–19–
 R
ISSLogic Functions
Initiating Outputs This section of ISSLogic
used to activate the desired Output
This section of ISSLogic initiates
the Function Operation
Outputs
Block
Transfer

Selectable And/Or

Initiating Function Initiate

Transfer
Programmable
function(s)
(Incl. ISSLogic Selectable And/Or
and System
Status) Programmed Programmed
Time Delay Profile
Selectable And/Or/Nor/Nand Settings
Groups 1-4
Selectable And/Or 0-65,500 cycles
(1091sec at
60Hz)
Programmed
Outputs 5-16
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

–20–
Initiating Inputs Log in
Sequence of
Events

Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input

ISSLogic # N

Figure 1 ISSLogic® Function Diagram

Selectable And/Or Activated

Initiate Via
Communication
Point

Log Pickup in
Sequence of
Events
Blocking Inputs
This section of ISSLogic is used
to Block the Function Operation
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input

Selectable And/Or
Block Via
Communication
Point
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Tests and Standards

M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System complies with the following type tests and standards:

Voltage Withstand
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5 2,000 Vac / 3,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
2,000 Vac / 3,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit

Impulse Voltage
IEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit
1.2 by 50 µs, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds

Insulation Resistance
IEC 60255-5 > 100 Megaohms

Voltage Interruptions Immunity

IEC 60255-11 (AC) 5 cycles, (DC) 30 ms - max

Electrical Environment
Emissions
EN 55022 Class A Limits
Conducted Emissions 150 kHz-30 MHz
Radiated Emissions 30 MHz-1000 MHz

Electrostatic Discharge Test

EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (8 kV)– point contact discharge
EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (15kV)– air discharge

Fast Transient Disturbance Test

EN 60255-22-4 Class A (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)

Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1-1989 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth

C37.90.1-2002 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to earth
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied between each independent circuit
 NOTE: The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS‑485, IRIG-B, Ethernet communication
port coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp.

–21–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Radiated Immunity
IEEE C37.90.2 80-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m
EN 60255-22-3

Conducted Immunity
EN 60255-22-6 10Vemf 150 kHz-80 MHz

Output Contacts
IEEE C37.90 30 A make for 0.2 seconds at 250 Vdc Resistive

UL 508 8 A carry at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

CSA C22.2 No.14 6 A break at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
0.5 A break at 48 Vdc, 24 VA
0.3 A break at 125 Vdc, 37.5 VA
0.2 A break at 250 Vdc, 50 VA

Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold, -20° C (-4°F) Operating
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C (+158°F) Operating
IEC 60068-2-78 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 95%RH Operating
IEC 60068-2-30 Damp High Heat Condensation Cycles +25°C, +55°C (131°F) @ 95%RH Operating

Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g
IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1, 5.0 g
Shock Withstand Class 1, 15.0 g
Bump Response Class 1, 10.0 g

Compliance
cULus-Listed per 508 – Industrial Control Equipment
– Industrial Control Equipment Certified for Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
cULus-Listed Component per 508A Table SA1.1 Industrial Control Panels
European Safety - EN 61010-1:2001, CAT II, Pollution Degree 2

–22–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Physical
Size: 19.00" wide x 6.96" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 17.7 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, 4-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to
ANSI/EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Optional mounting is available.
Environmental: For flat surface mounting on a Type 1 enclosure, UL rated to 70°C surrounding air ambient.
Approximate Weight: 20 lbs (9.1 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 30 lbs (13.6 kg)

Recommended Storage Parameters

Temperature: 5° C to 40° C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 50%
relative humidity at 40° C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew, percolating water,
rain and solar radiation.
See M-4272 Instruction Book, Appendix G, Layup and Storage for additional information.

Disposal and Recycling

Disposal of E-Waste for Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. Products
The customer shall be responsible for and bear the cost of ensuring all governmental regulations within their
jurisdiction are followed when disposing or recycling electronic equipment removed from a fixed installation.
Equipment may also be shipped back to Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. for recycling or disposal. The customer is
responsible for the shipping cost, and Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. shall cover the recycling cost. Contact Beckwith
Electric Co. Inc. for an RMA # to return equipment for recycling.

Patent & Warranty

The M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System is covered by U.S. Patent 7,468,593.
The M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System is covered by a ten year warranty from date of shipment.

External Connections
M-4272 external connection points are illustrated in Figure 6, External Connections.

–23–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

MAIN SOURCE STARTUP SOURCE

UNIT AUXILIARY STATION SERVICE

TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER

VT-M VT-SU

VS1 VS2

M-4272
CT-M IS1 VBus IS2 CT-SU

52 N.O. 52
M N.C. SU
VT-B

STATION BUS SYSTEM

M M
TWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION
TWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)

VS1 VS1

VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4272 M-4272 I S1

IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2

52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2

VT-B1 VT-B2

BUS-TIE
STATION BUS SYSTEM BUS 1 BUS 2
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2

M M M M

THREE-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

 NOTE: Current Transformers are used for the M-4272's 50BF Function, metering and oscillography, they are
not required for transfer operation.

Figure 2 Typical Applications of Motor Bus Transfer Systems

–24–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Fast
0 1 pu

Phase (Degrees)

Voltage
Residual Voltage
180
and Fixed Time

In-Phase
0 pu
360
Time
Figure 3 Open Transition Transfer Methods

–25–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Figure 4 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode

–26–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Figure 5 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode

–27–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS

must be connected to inputs
(terminals 45 through 50 with 51
common and terminals 5 through 16
with 1 through 4 common) because
these contact inputs are internally
wetted with 24 Vdc. Application of
external voltage on these inputs may
result in damage to the units.

2. 8 WA R N I N G : T h e p ro t e c t i v e
g ro u n d i n g t e r m i n a l mu s t b e
connected to an earthed ground any
time external connections have been
made to the unit.

3. 3 CAUTION: Before making connections

to the Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring
input, see M‑4272 Instruction Book
Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique

Jumpers, for the information regarding

setting Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring
input voltage. Connecting a voltage
other than the voltage that the unit is
configured to may result in mis-operation
or permanent damage to the unit.

4. 3 CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272

Close Coil Monitor (CCM) in parallel
with other relay CCMs in the Close Coil
Circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is
not bypassed may not provide reliable
breaker closing operation.

 NOTE: Control/Status Inputs IN-17 and

IN‑18 may be used to select
setpoint profiles.

 NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-

energized state, and without power
applied to the relay.

 NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) is

energized when the power supply
is functioning properly.

 NOTE: The self-test relay is energized

when the relay has performed all
self-tests successfully.

 NOTE: The Output 8 Lockout Blocking

is energized when any Lockout/
Blocking condition occurs. See
Lockout/Blocking section for
Figure 6 External Connections details.
(Horizontal Mount)

–28–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

U.S. PATENT 7,468,593 1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS

IR IG - B
must be connected to inputs (terminals
75
45 through 50 with 51 common and

B E C K W IT H
1

76 COM 2
ETHERNET IN
2 terminals 5 through 16 with 1 through
2 COM 2 RT N
3
4 common) because these contact
UL

727- 5 4 4 - 23 26
77 RS232
C US
inputs are internally wetted with 24 Vdc.

E L E C T R IC
LISTED
Application of external voltage on these
IND.CONT.EQ. 4
78
83F4
VA

79
VAB S I N 18 5
inputs may result in damage to the units.
O
U I N 17 6
R

8 WARNING: The protective grounding

80

C O .
VB C 41
VBC E
1
I N 16 7
2.
terminal must be connected to an earthed
81

IN C .
42
I N 15 8

82 - 43 IN-
I N 14 9 ground any time external connections
VC RS 4 8 5 PUTS
VCA COM 3
have been made to the unit.
+

44

6 19 0
L A RG O , F L
83 I N 13 10

52SP/ I N 6 45
6 S2 I N 12 11

3 CAUTION: Before making connections

118 t h
R 0 84
A 52b/ I N 5
3.
-

T S2 46
1 I N 11 12
E 4
to the Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring input,

AV E
1

3 3 773
D 0 52a/ I N 4
S2 47
V VA I N 10 13
V see M‑4272 Instruction Book Section 5.5,

NO .
VAB 52SP/
O S S1 I N 3 48
L
T
5
0
O
U 52b/ I N 2
IN 9 14
Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, for
A
G
/
6 85
R
C
S1 49
IN 8 15 the information regarding setting Trip/
E 0
H
E
2
52a/ I N 1
S1 50
IN 7 16 Close Circuit Monitoring input voltage.
z 86
VB - 17
WARNING! CONTACT WITH TERMINALS MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK Connecting a voltage other than the voltage
! CCM-
that the unit is configured to may result in
(

N VBC IN P U T S
87 2
O
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique

18
mis-operation or permanent damage to the
+

M
FOR CONTACT RATINGS SEE INSTRUCTIONAL MANUAL

I
N
A
88
VC
IN
RTN 51
TCM-
- 19 unit.
L VCA 2
89 52 20
4
(

3 CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272 Close

P/S

90
VA
53
CCM-
1
- 21
4.
VAB
54 22 Coil Monitor (CCM) in parallel with other
+

91
BUS SELF
55
TCM-
- 23 relay CCMs in the Close Coil Circuit where
92
VB
TEST
1
24
the anti-pump "Y" relay is not bypassed
56
may not provide reliable breaker closing
+

VBC
93
B 24
L
O
L
O
57 48
125
operation.
3
94 C C 250
K 8 58
K
VC O I
VCA U N
95
 NOTE: Control/Status Inputs IN-17 and IN-18
T G 59
25
16
may be used to select setpoint profiles.
S
1A 96 O 60
U 26
C IS1 R
C
R U E
7 61
(

A RN 97 1
27
T RO 15
E
D
EM
N 98
S
O
62
28  NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-
(

MODEL: M-4272

U
T IS2 R
C
6
63
29 energized state, and without power
50Hz

E
5A 99 2
OUT- 64
14
30
applied to the relay.
PUTS
100
+

18- 5 6 65
PS 2 31
85-265 5
60Hz

 NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) is

101
- 13
66
32
OUT-
102 67
PUTS energized when the power supply is
FIRMWARE: D-0135
+

4 33
18- 5 6
85-265
PS 1 CLOSE 12 functioning properly.
- S2 68
103 34

69
3 35
TRIP
S2 70
11  NOTE: The self-test relay is energized when
F3 F1
36
the relay has performed all self-tests
SERIAL NO.

PS 2
2
CLOSE
71

10
37 successfully.
S1 72
38
3 AMP,
250V, 73
 NOTE: The Output 8 Lockout Blocking is
F4 F2 1 39
(3 AB)
TRIP 9

PS 1
S1 74
40 energized when any Lockout/Blocking
condition occurs. See Lockout/Blocking
section for details.

Figure 7 External Connections (Vertical Mount)

–29–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

ƒ
ƒŒŽ ƒŒŒ
‘ƒ’ƒŒ ƒŒŒ“

‹ƒ‹
‘ ƒ “

ƒ ƒ€
€
‹ƒŒŒ
‘ƒ “

 „  „ 

 
‹ Œ      Œ   

 „  „
   ‹   


‡ ­ ­

„ 
­ €‰   

ƒ‹ ƒŒŒ
‰Š ˆ ­ ­ 
 „ €‰ 

‘ ƒ“ ‘ Œƒ “
‡ 


„ 
„ †


   
   

 ­  ‚
 ƒ  ƒ
 €      
„  ƒƒƒ      
ƒ    

‘ƒ“

ƒ ƒ
‘ƒ‹“ ‘ƒ “

Figure 8 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions

–30–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

10.2
[25.91]

18 17

STATUS
16 15

14 13

INPUTS

12 11

10 9

OUTPUTS
8 7
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

CCM-2 TCM-2
OPEN OPEN

CCM-1 TCM-1
OPEN OPEN

17.50 19.00 18.31

[44.5] [48.26] [46.51]

EXIT ENTER
16

15

STATUS
14 R ES ET

PS 2 PS 1

13
BRKR BRKR
OUTPUTS OPEN OPEN
SOURCE SOURCE
12 1 2
BRK R B RK R
C LO S E D C LO S E D

SYS D IA G /
11 T IM E
OK
SY NC

10 M-4272
MOTOR BUS TRANSFER
COM 1 Integrated Synchronizing SystemsTM
9 B EC
EC KW IIT
TH
CO.
O . I NC .
EL
E L ECT R
RII C
Ma d e in U.S .A .

9.97
4.00 1.48
[25.32] 0.35
[10.16] [3.76]
[0.89]
6.96
[17.68]

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 9 Vertical Mounting Dimensions

–31–
 


 

Figure 10







M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

–32–



     
  
    
   ­

Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)

 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

M-3919A Graphic Display Unit/Touch Screen Human Machine Interface

• Provides a MIMIC Single-Line Diagram of the Motor Bus Transfer System in Two-breaker or Three-
breaker Bus Transfer Configuration
• 16.2 Million Color 1024 x 768 Pixel TFT Display
• 12.1 Inch Touch Screen Human Machine Interface (HMI)
• Includes a separate power supply, nominal 120 Vac (50/60 Hz) or 125 Vdc (250 Vdc optional)
• Remote Target Reset Capability
• Remote Manual Transfer Capability

Figure 11 Graphic Display Unit/Touch Screen Human Machine Interface

–33–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Features
The M-3919A includes the following features and functions:
• Display & Touch Screen
12.1" TFT 16.2 Million colors
Size – 9.75" x 7.25" [248 mm x 184 mm], 12.1" diagonal
Brightness – 500 cd/m2
Contrast Ratio – 700:1
Resolution – 1024 x 768 pixels
­Backlight – LED up to 50,000 hour life span
Touch Screen Type – 4-wire Analog Resistive

• Microprocessor – 800 MHz 32-bit CISC (Fanless CPU)

• Flash Memory – 256 MB
• DRAM – 256 MB
• Material – Aluminum Enclosure

• Serial Ports
The M-3919A includes two serial ports, which provide the connections to one or two M-4272 Digital
Motor Bus Transfer Systems using RS-232 (standard) or RS-485 (optional) communications. The
RS-485 serial port also provides the ability to connect multiple M-4272's in series to a single HMI.
The M-3919A serial communication ports include the following capabilities:
One RS-485 serial port (DE9S) used for RS-485 M-4272 communications
One RS-232 serial port (DE9P) used for RS-232 M-4272 communications
Baud rates from 9,600 to 115,200
Point-to-point serial communications for all protocols

• One 10 foot RS-232 Y Cable, BECO Part Number B-1527

• Compact SD Card Slot
• USB Ports – 1 Host 2.0 Port, 1 Client 2.0 Port
• Ethernet Port – 10/100 Base-T (RJ45) used for Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) (PC) configuration,
downloading program to HMI and Point-to-Point connection and communications using MODBUS
TCP/IP.
• PWR (yellow) illuminated icon indicates if power is applied to the unit
• CPU (green) illuminated icon indicates if the unit is operating correctly
• COM (red) illuminated icon indicates communications activity on PLC port
• RESET Switch to reinitialize the unit if an operational failure occurs

–34–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Single–Line Diagram (SLD) Screens

When the MBT SYSTEM PRI Metering menu item is selected from the Selection Menu screen the unit displays
either the pre-programmed Two-Breaker or Three-Breaker configuration of the MBTS Single-Line Diagram
(Figure 12 and Figure 13 respectively). The Single-Line Diagrams include a graphical representation of either
a Two or Three‑Breaker configuration with the appropriate number of M-4272 connected units. Also, remote
manual transfers and target reset can be performed from the Single-Line Diagram. Included in the graphical
representation are the following real-time parameters:
• Voltage (Three-Phase or Single-Phase)
• Current (Source 1 and Source 2)
• Frequency (Delta Angle, Delta Frequency and Delta Voltage)
• 52-S1 Breaker status (Open/Closed)
• 52-S2 Breaker status (Open/Closed)
• Manual Transfer Ready status
• Lockout/Block status
• Remote/Local status
• Device ON/OFF status
• 52-S1 Circuit Breaker In-Service status
• 52-S2 Circuit Breaker In-Service status
• Transfer Complete
• Transfer Incomplete

Figure 12 MBTS Single-Line Diagram Screen (Two-Breaker Configuration)

–35–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Figure 13 MBTS Single-Line Diagram Screen (Three-Breaker Configuration)

Initiating Manual Transfers
The GDU/HMI includes the capability to initiate Manual Transfers from the Single-Line diagram.
See M-3919A Specification for additional details.

Optional Features
• 250 Vdc Power Supply, BECO Part Number 430-00444
• Two-Breaker or Three-Breaker configuration
• RS-485 Communication with one 10 foot RS-485 Y-Cable, BECO Part Number B-1301
• 19" Mounting Panel, 7u height, BECO Part Number 441-41959

Physical
Size: 12.49" wide x 9.61" high x 1.82" deep (31.7 cm x 24.4 cm x 4.6 cm)
Approximate Weight: 4.6 lbs (2.1 kg)

Warranty
The M‑3919A is covered by a two-year warranty from date of shipment.

Specification subject to change without notice.

–36–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

M-5072 Retrofit Kit For M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System
• Adapts M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System as a replacement for existing analog motor bus
transfer equipment
• Provides direct mechanical and electrical replacement of existing analog transfer logic controller
M-0272/M-0236B
• Connects easily to the M-4272's terminals without any wiring change
• The physical change is simple and cost effective
• Enhances the security, reliability and performance of your facility with additional features in the digital
motor bus transfer equipment
• Optional M-3919A Graphic Display Unit (GDU) and Touch Screen Human Machine Interface (HMI) for
communicating with one or two M-4272 units.

M-5072 Retrofit Kit Features

The M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System and a M-5072 retrofit kit provide the direct replacement of the
M-0272/M-0236B Analog Transfer Logic Controller. The physical change is very simple and cost effective.
The M-5072 retrofit kit consists of a bracket and wiring harness (Figure 14) that replicates the existing M-0272
terminal block locations. The M-5072 terminal blocks are located in the same positions (Figure 15) as the M‑0272
and it is attached to the M-4272. The wire harness connects the appropriate terminals between the M-4272 and
the M‑0272. This will allow a very simple replacement of the existing M-0272 equipment.
Since the existing analog M-0272/M-0236B takes 7u height while the M-4272 takes only 4u height. One rack
mount black blank panel with 1u height and one rack mount black blank panel with 2u height are provided to fill
up the empty spaces after the replacement.

Figure 14 M-5072 Retrofit Kit for Analog Motor Bus Transfer System Replacement

–37–
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique

Figure 15 M-5072 Retrofit Kit Bracket and Wiring Harness

–38–
 M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification

Physical
M-5072
Size: 8.37" high x 17.25" wide x 3.89" deep (21.26 x 43.82 x 9.88)
Approximate Weight: 3 lbs (1.4 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 5 lbs (2.3 kg)

M-5072 with M-4272

Size: 8.37" high x 19" wide x 12.86" deep (21.26 x 48.26 x 32.66)
Approximate Weight: 23 lbs (10.5 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 35 lbs (15.9 kg)

Warranty
The M‑5072 is covered by a five-year warranty from date of shipment. The M-3919A is covered by a two-year
warranty from date of shipment.

TRADEMARKS
All brand or product names referenced in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.

Specification subject to change without notice. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. has approved only the English version
of this document.

–39–
 BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121
marketing@beckwithelectric.com
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2015

© 2004 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800-4272-SP-12 01/19

Printed in U.S.A. (2.07.03)
 WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or serious
injury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-
ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-
dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internal
voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-
nal terminals.

DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE

– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you
must never touch it.

PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application,
test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended
use of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith
Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.

Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicing
equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securely
by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.

Do NOT operate in an explosive environment

Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so would
risk a possible fire or explosion.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap-
plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt-
ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power and
discharge circuits before working on the unit.

Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures

The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death.
Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per-
sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone.

Do not modify equipment

Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith
Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow
replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONS
Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar
with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a
component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety
features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the
Parts List of the Instruction Book.

Avoid static charge

This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care
should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.

Use caution when measuring resistances

Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise noted
in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
 Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System
Instruction Book

Chapter 1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 1–1

1.1 Instruction Book Contents.................................................................................. 1–1
1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System................................................................... 1–3
Table 1-1 M‑4272 Transfer Functions........................................................... 1–3
Table 1-2 M‑4272 Device Functions............................................................ 1–4
Communication Ports......................................................................................... 1–4
ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software.......................... 1–5
M-3972 Status Module....................................................................................... 1–5
Figure 1-1 M-3972 Status Module............................................................... 1–5
M‑3933/M‑0423 Serial Communication Cables.................................................. 1–5
M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module.............................................. 1–6
Figure 1-2 M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module...................... 1–6
1.3 Application.......................................................................................................... 1–7
Figure 1-3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration............................................. 1–8
Figure 1-4 Unit-Connected Generator Motor Bus Transfer One-line............ 1–8
Figure 1-5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus Transfer One-line..................... 1–9
Figure 1-6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On a Large Induction Motor.....1–10
Figure 1-7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On a Small Induction Motor......1–11
Figure 1-8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM................................................... 1–11
Hot Parallel, Fast, In-Phase, Residual Voltage and Fixed Time Transfer
Methods............................................................................................................ 1–11
Hot Parallel Transfer.......................................................................................... 1–12
Fast Simultaneous Transfer.............................................................................. 1–12
Fast Sequential Transfer................................................................................... 1–12
In-Phase Transfer.............................................................................................. 1–13
Residual Voltage Transfer................................................................................. 1–13
Fixed Time Transfer.......................................................................................... 1–13
References....................................................................................................... 1–14
Figure 1-9 Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS................... 1–14

Chapter 2 Operation................................................................................................................ 2–1

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators................................................................... 2–1
Alphanumeric Display......................................................................................... 2–1
Screen Blanking................................................................................................. 2–1
Arrow Pushbuttons............................................................................................. 2–2
EXIT Pushbutton................................................................................................ 2–2
ENTER Pushbutton............................................................................................ 2–2
System OK LED................................................................................................. 2–2
Diagnostic/Time Sync LED................................................................................. 2–2

i
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Breaker Status LEDs.......................................................................................... 2–2

Table 2-1 Breaker Status LED Input Configurations ................................... 2–2
Power Supply #1 & #2 LED................................................................................ 2–3
M-3972 Status Module....................................................................................... 2–3
Output and Input Status LEDs............................................................................ 2–3
Trip (TCM) and Close (CCM) Circuit Monitor Status LEDs................................. 2–3
Figure 2-1 M‑4272 Horizontal Front Panel................................................... 2–3
Figure 2-2 Screen Message Menu Flow...................................................... 2–4
Figure 2-3 Main Menu Flow......................................................................... 2–5
STATUS RESET Pushbutton.............................................................................. 2–6
COM Port Security.............................................................................................. 2–6
Disabling COM Ports.......................................................................................... 2–6

2.2 Manual Operation............................................................................................... 2–7

Overview of Manual Transfer Methods and Transfer Modes............................... 2–7
Transfer Modes................................................................................................... 2–7
Sequential Transfer Mode................................................................................... 2–7
Simultaneous Transfer Mode.............................................................................. 2–7
Transfer Methods................................................................................................ 2–8
Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom)....................................................................... 2–9
Figure 2-4 Initiate Manual Transfer Confirmation Screen............................ 2–9
Figure 2-5 Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent Confirmation Screen.2–10
Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel).................................................... 2–10
Remote/Local Control....................................................................................... 2–12
Remote/Local Control (ISScom)....................................................................... 2–12
Figure 2-6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen.......................................... 2–12
Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel)...................................................... 2–12
Device ON/OFF................................................................................................ 2–13
Device ON/OFF (ISScom)................................................................................ 2–13
Figure 2-7 Device On/Off Dialog Box......................................................... 2–13
Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel)............................................................... 2–14
System Error Codes and Output Counters....................................................... 2–15
Reset/View System Error Codes and Output Counters (ISScom).................... 2–15
Figure 2-8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen....... 2–15
Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel)...................................................... 2–15
Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel)............................................................ 2–16
Switching The Active Setpoint Profile (ISScom)............................................... 2–17
Figure 2-9 Switching Profile Method Dialog Screen.................................. 2–17
Figure 2-10 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen........................................ 2–18
2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering........................................................................ 2–18
From ISScom.................................................................................................... 2–18
System/Monitor/Primary Metering.................................................................... 2–18

ii
 Table of Contents

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status............................................. 2–18

Figure 2-11 Primary Metering Screen....................................................... 2–19
Figure 2-12 Secondary Metering and Status Screen................................ 2–19
Figure 2-13 System Status and I/O Screen............................................... 2–20
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and Sync Scope........................................... 2–20
From MBTS Front Panel................................................................................... 2–21
Monitor Status/Metering................................................................................... 2–21
Transfer Event Log............................................................................................ 2–21
Sequence of Events Recorder.......................................................................... 2–22
Oscillograph...................................................................................................... 2–22

Chapter 3 ISScom.................................................................................................................... 3–1

3.1 ISScom Functional Description.......................................................................... 3–2
Figure 3-1 ISScom Program Icon................................................................ 3–2
Figure 3-2 ISScom Opening Screen Menu Structure.................................. 3–2
Figure 3-3 ISScom Main Screen Menu Structure (File Mode)..................... 3–3
Figure 3-4 ISScom Main Screen Menu Structure (Connected Mode)......... 3–4
Shortcut Command Buttons............................................................................... 3–4
Initiate and Reset Buttons.................................................................................. 3–5
Remote/Local Button.......................................................................................... 3–5
Figure 3-5 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen............................................ 3–5
Device ON/OFF.................................................................................................. 3–5
Figure 3-6 Device On/Off Dialog Box........................................................... 3–5
Figure 3-7 Shortcut Commands Toolbar...................................................... 3–5
File Menu............................................................................................................ 3–6
File/New Command............................................................................................ 3–6
Figure 3-8 New File System Type Dialog Screen........................................ 3–6
File/Save and Save As Command...................................................................... 3–6
File/Open Command.......................................................................................... 3–6
File/Print and Print Preview Command............................................................... 3–6
File/Exit Command............................................................................................. 3–7
Opening Screen Connect Menu......................................................................... 3–7
Figure 3-9 ISScom Serial Communication Dialog Screen........................... 3–7
Figure 3-10 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet Communication Dialog Screen........ 3–8
Figure 3-11 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen..... 3–8
System Menu...................................................................................................... 3–8
System/Setup..................................................................................................... 3–9
System/Setup/Setup System.............................................................................. 3–9
Figure 3-12 Setup System Dialog Screen................................................... 3–9
System/Setup/Setpoints..................................................................................... 3–9
System/Setup/Setpoints/Display All.................................................................. 3–10

iii
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 3 ISScom (Cont.'d)

System/Setup/Setpoints/Configure................................................................... 3–10
Figure 3-13 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen.............................................. 3–11
Figure 3-14 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen............................................... 3–11
Figure 3-15 Display All Setpoints Dialog Screen (Partial)......................... 3–12
Figure 3-16 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial)........................................... 3–13
Set Date/Time Command................................................................................. 3–14
Figure 3-17 Date/Time Dialog Screen....................................................... 3–14
Set Date and Time Command Buttons............................................................. 3–14
System/Monitor................................................................................................. 3–14
System/Monitor/Primary Metering.................................................................... 3–15
System/Monitor/Secondary Metering & Status................................................. 3–15
Figure 3-18 Primary Metering Screen....................................................... 3–15
Figure 3-19 Secondary Metering and Status Screen................................ 3–16
Figure 3-20 System Status and I/O Status Screen.................................... 3–16
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram...................................................................... 3–17
System/Monitor/Sync Scope............................................................................ 3–17
System/Monitor/Single Line Diagram............................................................... 3–17
Figure 3-21 Phasor Diagram..................................................................... 3–18
Figure 3-22 Sync Scope Screen................................................................ 3–18
Figure 3-23 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary
Metering) Screen.......................................................................................... 3–19
System/Transfer Event Log............................................................................... 3–20
System/Transfer Event Log/Download.............................................................. 3–21
Figure 3-24 Transfer Event Log Record Download Screen........................ 3–21
System/Transfer Event Log/View...................................................................... 3–21
Figure 3-25 Transfer Event Log Viewer...................................................... 3–21
Figure 3-26 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen.............................. 3–22
Figure 3-27 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen........... 3–22
Figure 3-28 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen........ 3–23
Figure 3-29 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os Status Screen....................... 3–24
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status.......................................................... 3–24
Figure 3-30 Clear Transfer Event Log Status Command Confirmation
Screen.......................................................................................................... 3–24
Figure 3-31 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared Confirmation Screen....... 3–24
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History......................................................... 3–25
Figure 3-32 Transfer Event Log Clear History Command
Confirmation Screen.................................................................................... 3–25
Figure 3-33 Transfer Event Log History Cleared Confirmation Screen...... 3–25
System/Sequence of Events Recorder............................................................. 3–25
System/Sequence of EventsRecorder/Setup................................................... 3–25
Figure 3-34 Sequence Of Events Setup.................................................... 3–26
System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Download............................................ 3–26
Figure 3-35 Sequence of Events Recorder Download Screen.................. 3–26

iv
 Table of Contents

Chapter 3 ISScom (Cont.'d)

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/View.................................................... 3–27

Figure 3-36 Sequence of Events Viewer................................................... 3–27
Figure 3-37 Sequence of Events Summary Screen.................................. 3–28
Figure 3-38 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen......... 3–28
Figure 3-39 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os Status Screen.................... 3–29
Figure 3-40 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os Status Screen.................. 3–29
System/Sequence of Events/Clear................................................................... 3–29
Figure 3-41 Clear Sequence of Events Record Command
Confirmation Screen.................................................................................... 3–29
Figure 3-42 Sequence of Events Record Cleared Confirmation Screen... 3–30
Figure 3-43 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start
Signal Status Screen.................................................................................... 3–30
System/Oscillograph......................................................................................... 3–31
Figure 3-44 Setup Oscillograph Recorder................................................. 3–31
System/Oscillograph/Setup.............................................................................. 3–32
System/Oscillograph/Retrieve.......................................................................... 3–32
Figure 3-45 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen.................................... 3–32
System/Oscillograph/Trigger............................................................................. 3–32
Figure 3-46 Oscillograph Manual Trigger Command Confirmation
Screen.......................................................................................................... 3–33
Figure 3-47 Oscillograph Triggered Successfully Confirmation Screen..... 3–33
System/Oscillograph/Clear............................................................................... 3–33
Figure 3-48 Clear Oscillograph Records Command Confirmation
Screen.......................................................................................................... 3–33
Figure 3-49 Oscillograph Records Cleared Successfully Screen.............. 3–33
System/Profile.................................................................................................. 3–34
System/Profile/Switching Method..................................................................... 3–34
Figure 3-50 Profile Switching Method Dialog Screen................................ 3–34
System/Profile/Active Profile............................................................................. 3–34
Figure 3-51 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen........................................ 3–34
System/Profile/Copy Profile.............................................................................. 3–34
Figure 3-52 Copy Profile Dialog Screen.................................................... 3–35
System/Write File To System............................................................................ 3–35
Figure 3-53 ISScom File Written to MBTS Confirmation........................... 3–35
System/Read Data From System..................................................................... 3–35
Figure 3-54 Read Data From System Save As Dialog Screen.................. 3–35
Figure 3-55 ISScom Data Reading Successful Confirmation Screen....... 3–36
Tools Menu....................................................................................................... 3–36
Tools/System Access Codes............................................................................ 3–36
Tools/System Access Codes/Comm Access.................................................... 3–36
Figure 3-56 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen.............. 3–36
Tools/System Access Codes/User Access....................................................... 3–37
Figure 3-57 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen.............................. 3–37

v
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 3 ISScom (Cont.'d)

Tools/Miscellaneous Setup............................................................................... 3–37

User Logo Line................................................................................................. 3–37
User Control Number........................................................................................ 3–37
System OK LED............................................................................................... 3–38
Figure 3-58 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen................................................. 3–38
Tools/System Outputs Test............................................................................... 3–38
Figure 3-59 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen....................................... 3–38
Figure 3-60 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen....................... 3–39
Tools/System Ethernet Setup........................................................................... 3–39
Figure 3-61 Ethernet Setup Screen........................................................... 3–39
Tools/System Firmware Update........................................................................ 3–40
Tools/Calibrate Unit.......................................................................................... 3–40
Tools/System Error Codes / Counters.............................................................. 3–40
Figure 3-62 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen.......... 3–40
Help Menu........................................................................................................ 3–41
Figure 3-63 About ISScom Dialog Box...................................................... 3–41
3.2 ISSplot.............................................................................................................. 3–42
Figure 3-64 ISSplot Main Screen............................................................... 3–42
Figure 3-65 ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts..................... 3–43
ISSplot File Menu............................................................................................. 3–44
ISSplot View Menu............................................................................................ 3–44
ISSplot Settings Menu...................................................................................... 3–44
ISSplot Select New Source for Delta Angle...................................................... 3–44
ISSplot Select Waveforms................................................................................ 3–45
Figure 3-66 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen........................................... 3–45
ISSplot Change Colors..................................................................................... 3–45
Figure 3-67 Change Colors Dialog Screen................................................ 3–45
Figure 3-68 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data................................. 3–46
ISSplot Change Scale...................................................................................... 3–46
ISSplot Default.................................................................................................. 3–46
ISSplot Auto All................................................................................................. 3–47
Figure 3-69 Change Scale Dialog Screen................................................. 3–47
ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu ................................................................... 3–47
Table 3-1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys................................................................ 3–48
Figure 3-70 ISSplot Toolbar....................................................................... 3–48
Figure 3-71 ISSplot Screen with Callouts.................................................. 3–49

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints................................................................................. 4–1

4.1 Unit Setup........................................................................................................... 4–1
General Unit Setup............................................................................................. 4–1
Figure 4-1 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen.................. 4–2
Figure 4-2 Communication Access Code Changed Successfully
Confirmation Screen...................................................................................... 4–2

vi
 Table of Contents

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Figure 4-3 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen.................................. 4–4

Figure 4-4 New User Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen................... 4–4
User Logo Line................................................................................................... 4–6
User Control Number.......................................................................................... 4–6
System OK LED................................................................................................. 4–6
Figure 4-5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen..................................................... 4–6
Figure 4-6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen................................................... 4–11
Serial Ports (RS-232)....................................................................................... 4–14
Serial Port (RS-485)......................................................................................... 4–14
Direct Connection............................................................................................. 4–14
Figure 4-7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen......................... 4–14
Device Address................................................................................................. 4–15
Figure 4-8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line
Splitter.......................................................................................................... 4–15
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time........................................................................ 4–16
Figure 4-9 COM Port Save to Device Confirmation Screen....................... 4–16
Ethernet Communication Settings.................................................................... 4–18
DHCP Protocol................................................................................................. 4–18
Ethernet Protocols ........................................................................................... 4–18
IEC 61850 ....................................................................................................... 4–18
Figure 4-10 Ethernet Setup Screen .......................................................... 4–19
Installing the Modems....................................................................................... 4–22
Connecting the PC Modem.............................................................................. 4–22
Initializing the PC Modem................................................................................. 4–23
Figure 4-11 Modem Settings Dialog Screen.............................................. 4–23
Figure 4-12 Terminal Window.................................................................... 4–23
Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTS...................................................... 4–24
Setup Oscillograph Recorder........................................................................... 4–25
Figure 4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder................................................. 4–25
Table 4-2 Recorder Partitions.................................................................... 4–26
Figure 4-14 Oscillograph Save to Device Confirmation Screen................. 4–26
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder............................................................... 4–27
Figure 4-15 Sequence of Events Save to Device Confirmation Screen.... 4–27
Figure 4-16 Sequence Of Events Setup ................................................... 4–27
4.2 System Setup................................................................................................... 4–28
MBTS Setup System........................................................................................ 4–28
Figure 4-17 Setup System Dialog Screen................................................. 4–28
Figure 4-18 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen.............................. 4–29
Figure 4-19 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen................................. 4–29
Figure 4-20 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection Screen............................. 4–30
Figure 4-21 Latched Outputs Selection Screen......................................... 4–31
Figure 4-22 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen........................................... 4–31
Table 4-3 Input Activated Profile................................................................ 4–32
Figure 4-23 Input Active States Selection Screen..................................... 4–33

vii
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

4.3 System Diagrams............................................................................................. 4–34

Figure 4-24 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram....4–34
Figure 4-25 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase
Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram............................................ 4–35
Figure 4-26 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection
Diagram........................................................................................................ 4–36
Figure 4-27 Single Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection
Diagram........................................................................................................ 4–37
Figure 4-28 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection
Diagram........................................................................................................ 4–38
Figure 4-29 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase
Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram.................................. 4–39
Figure 4-30 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase
Bus Side Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram................................ 4–40
4.4 System Setpoints.............................................................................................. 4–41
Common Settings (CS)..................................................................................... 4–42
Figure 4-31 System Setpoints Dialog Screen............................................ 4–42
Common Settings/Common Function Settings Tab.......................................... 4–42
Common Settings/Transfer Mode..................................................................... 4–43
Figure 4-32 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen (with
Adaptation Disable)...................................................................................... 4–43
Figure 4-33 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen (with
Adaptation Enable)....................................................................................... 4–44
Common Settings/Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New Source............................. 4–44
Common Settings/Breaker Closing Time.......................................................... 4–44
Breaker Closing Time/Adaptation Enable......................................................... 4–45
Figure 4-34 Adapted Breaker Closing Time Reset Confirmation Screen.. 4–45
Figure 4-35 Adapted Breaker Closing Time Reset Successfully Screen... 4–45
Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation.............................. 4–45
Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement............. 4–46
Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time....................................... 4–46
Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time Delay........................................ 4–46
Common Settings/Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay.................................... 4–46
Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer Time............................................... 4–47
Common Settings/Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length............ 4–47
Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open Condition................................................ 4–47
Common Function Settings Inputs Tab............................................................. 4–48
Common Settings/Breaker Status Inputs......................................................... 4–48
Figure 4-36 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen.................. 4–48
Common Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration................................. 4–49
Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3)................................................... 4–49
Figure 4-37 Transfer Block #1 Input Dialog Screen................................... 4–49
Common Settings/External Status Reset......................................................... 4–49
Figure 4-38 External Status Reset Input Selection Dialog Screen............ 4–49

viii
 Table of Contents

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Common Settings Outputs Tab......................................................................... 4–49

Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs...................................... 4–50
Figure 4-39 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen.... 4–50
Figure 4-40 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen............... 4–50
Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready
Outputs............................................................................................................. 4–51
Figure 4-41 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Output
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–51
Common Settings/Transfer Ready Outputs...................................................... 4–51
Figure 4-42 Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen.................... 4–51
Common Settings/Transfer Completed Outputs............................................... 4–52
Figure 4-43 Transfer Completed Output Selection Dialog Screen............. 4–52
Figure 4-44 Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection Dialog Screen........... 4–53
Automatic Transfer Settings (ATS).................................................................... 4–53
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab............................................................. 4–53
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Transfer Mode............................. 4–53
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Close After External Breaker
Trip.................................................................................................................... 4–54
Figure 4-45 Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab Dialog Screen........... 4–56
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup tab/ External Control Input Configuration.. 4–56
Automatic Transfer/Automatic Transfer Block.................................................... 4–56
Figure 4-46 Automatic Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen......... 4–57
Automatic Transfer/86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2).................................................. 4–57
Automatic Transfer/86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1).................................................. 4–57
Automatic Transfer/External Initiate (S1 to S2)................................................. 4–57
Automatic Transfer/External Initiate (S2 to S1) ................................................ 4–57
Automatic Transfer Initiation.............................................................................. 4–58
Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab.................................................. 4–58
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit ............................................ 4–58
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit...................................................... 4–58
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit................................................ 4–59
Figure 4-47 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen...4–59
Automatic Fast Transfer/Time Window.............................................................. 4–59
Automatic Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay................................... 4–59
Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................................... 4–59
Figure 4-48 Blocking Inputs Selection Screen........................................... 4–60
Automatic Fast Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs........................ 4–60
Figure 4-49 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–60
Automatic Fast Transfer Tab Save/Cancel........................................................ 4–60
Automatic Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab.......................................... 4–60
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.............................................. 4–61
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit......................................... 4–61
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Time Window...................................................... 4–61

ix
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Figure 4-50 Automatic Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog

Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–61
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection.................................... 4–62
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs......... 4–62
Figure 4-51 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–62
Automatic In-Phase Transfer Save/Cancel....................................................... 4–62
Automatic Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab.............................. 4–63
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Delay On Initiate..................................... 4–63
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit............................ 4–63
Figure 4-52 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer
Tab Dialog Screen........................................................................................ 4–63
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Close Delay............................................ 4–64
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shed on Voltage............................ 4–64
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection....................... 4–64
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs.... 4–64
Figure 4-53 Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs
Selection Screen.......................................................................................... 4–64
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel........................................... 4–64
Automatic Transfer Settings/Fixed Time Transfer Tab....................................... 4–65
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Time Delay....................................................... 4–65
Figure 4-54 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–65
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay............................. 4–66
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection................................ 4–66
Automatic Fixed-Time Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs............. 4–66
Figure 4-55 Fixed-Time Transfer Load Shedding Outputs Selection
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–66
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Save/Cancel.................................................... 4–66
Manual Transfer Settings Setup Tab................................................................. 4–68
Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer........................................................ 4–68
Figure 4-56 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen................................ 4–68
Manual Transfer Settings/External Control Input Configuration........................ 4–68
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Block............................................................ 4–69
Figure 4-57 Manual Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen.............. 4–69
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Initiate.......................................................... 4–69
Figure 4-58 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Settings Dialog Screen............ 4–69
Manual Transfer Save/Cancel........................................................................... 4–69
Manual Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer Tab...................................................... 4–70
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit................................................. 4–70
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.......................................................... 4–70
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit..................................................... 4–70
Figure 4-59 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen.... 4–70

x
 Table of Contents

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Manual Fast Transfer/Time Window.................................................................. 4–71

Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay....................................... 4–71
Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection............................................... 4–71
Figure 4-60 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–71
Manual Fast Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs............................ 4–71
Figure 4-61 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–71
Manual Fast Transfer Save/Cancel................................................................... 4–72
Manual Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab............................................... 4–72
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.................................................. 4–72
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit............................................. 4–72
Figure 4-62 Manual Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–73
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Time Window.......................................................... 4–73
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................................ 4–73
Figure 4-63 In-Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen... 4–73
Manual In-Phase Transfer/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs............. 4–74
Figure 4-64 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–74
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Save/Cancel............................................................ 4–74
Manual Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab.................................. 4–75
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Delay On Initiate......................................... 4–75
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit................................ 4–75
Figure 4-65 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–75
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Close Delay................................................ 4–76
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shed on Voltage................................ 4–76
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................... 4–76
Figure 4-66 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–76
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs........ 4–76
Figure 4-67 Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs
Selection Screen.......................................................................................... 4–76
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel............................................... 4–77
Manual Transfer Settings/Hot Parallel Transfer Tab........................................... 4–77
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit..................................... 4–77
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.............................................. 4–77
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit......................................... 4–77
Figure 4-68 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–78
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection.................................... 4–78
Figure 4-69 Hot Parallel Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–78

xi
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time Window...................................................... 4–78

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping Command Time Delay........................... 4–78
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/Cancel........................................................ 4–79
Auto Trip/Enable/Disable................................................................................... 4–79
Auto Trip/Breaker Trip Option............................................................................ 4–79
Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay.......................................................... 4–79
Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection................................................................... 4–80
Figure 4-70 Auto Trip Blocking Input Selection Dialog Screen.................. 4–80
Auto Trip Save/Cancel...................................................................................... 4–80
Figure 4-71 Auto Trip Settings Dialog Screen............................................ 4–80
Figure 4-72 Main-Tie-Main Application Example....................................... 4–81
27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)..................... 4–82
27B #2 Bus Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)...................................... 4–82
27B #3 and 27B #4 Bus Undervoltage............................................................. 4–82
Figure 4-73 Function Settings Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer
Initiate (S1 to S2) Setpoints Screen............................................................. 4–83
Figure 4-74 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate
Inputs/Outputs Selection Screen.................................................................. 4–83
Figure 4-75 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen................. 4–84
Figure 4-76 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram............................................... 4–85
Figure 4-77 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure I/O Selection Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–85
Figure 4-78 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Outputs/Inputs Initiate
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–85
Figure 4-79 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen................. 4–87
Figure 4-80 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–87
Figure 4-81 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) I/O
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–87
Figure 4-82 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog
Screen.......................................................................................................... 4–88
Figure 4-83 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss Function Inputs/Outputs
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–89
Figure 4-84 60FLB Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog Screen............................... 4–89
Figure 4-85 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–90
Figure 4-86 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function Dialog Screen.................. 4–90
Figure 4-87 81R #1(2) ROCOF Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen.. 4–91
Figure 4-88 81R #1(2) ROCOF Function Dialog Screen........................... 4–91
ISSLogic Settings and Logic Functions............................................................ 4–92
Figure 4-89 ISSLogic Function Dialog Screen........................................... 4–93
ISSLogic Function Setup.................................................................................. 4–94
Figure 4-90 Selection Screen for Initiating Outputs................................... 4–94
Figure 4-91 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout.................... 4–94
Figure 4-92 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup...................... 4–95

xii
 Table of Contents

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Figure 4-93 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status........................ 4–96

Figure 4-94 Selection Screen for Initiating Inputs...................................... 4–96
Figure 4-95 Selection Screen for Blocking Inputs...................................... 4–97
Change Active Profile (ISSLogic)..................................................................... 4–97
Figure 4-96 Selection Screen for Block System Status............................. 4–98
DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature.......................................................... 4–99
Dropout Delay Timer......................................................................................... 4–99
Reset Delay Timer............................................................................................ 4–99
Figure 4-97 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram...................................... 4–99
Figure 4-98 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram.......................................... 4–99
Figure 4-99 ISSLogic Function Diagram.................................................. 4–100
Figure 4-100 Recommended Close Circuit Monitoring Input
Configuration.............................................................................................. 4–102
Figure 4-101 Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration With Anti-
pump Relay Not Bypassed......................................................................... 4–103
Figure 4-102 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen........ 4–103
Figure 4-103 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................. 4–104
Figure 4-104 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input................................................ 4–105
Figure 4-105 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen............ 4–106
Figure 4-106 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................. 4–106

Chapter 5 Installation.............................................................................................................. 5–1

5.1 General Information............................................................................................ 5–1
Service Conditions and Conformity to CE Standard........................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions....................................................................... 5–2

Figure 5-1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions...................... 5–2
Figure 5-2 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)......... 5–3
Figure 5-3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions........................... 5–4
5.3 External Connections......................................................................................... 5–5
Power Supply...................................................................................................... 5–5
Figure 5-4 Power Supply Connection.......................................................... 5–5
Grounding Requirements................................................................................... 5–5
Unit Isolation....................................................................................................... 5–5
Insulation Coordination....................................................................................... 5–5
Torque Requirements......................................................................................... 5–6
MBTS Outputs.................................................................................................... 5–6
Replacement Fuses............................................................................................ 5–6
Figure 5-5 External Connections (Horizontal Mount).................................. 5–7
Figure 5-6 Vertical Unit External Connections............................................. 5–8
Figure 5-7 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram..... 5–9

xiii
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 5 Installation (Cont.'d)

Figure 5-8 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase

Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram............................................ 5–10
Figure 5-9 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram...5–11
Figure 5-10 Single-Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection
Diagram........................................................................................................ 5–12
Figure 5-11 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection
Diagram........................................................................................................ 5–13
Figure 5-12 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-
Phase Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram....................... 5–14
Figure 5-13 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase
Bus Side, Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram............................... 5–15
5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers................................................................ 5–16
Accessing Switches and Jumpers.................................................................... 5–16
Table 5-1 Jumpers..................................................................................... 5–16
Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1........................................................................ 5–17
Table 5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper
Configuration................................................................................................ 5–17
Table 5-4 Close Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper
Configuration................................................................................................ 5–18
Table 5-5 Trip Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper
Configuration................................................................................................ 5–18
Table 5-6 Close Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper
Configuration................................................................................................ 5–18
Figure 5-14 M‑4272 Bottom Circuit Board (B-0970).................................. 5–19
Figure 5-15 M-4272 B-0957 Top Circuit Board.......................................... 5–20
5.5 ISScom Communications and Analysis Software Installation........................... 5–21
ISScom Installation and Setup......................................................................... 5–21
Hardware Requirements................................................................................... 5–21
Installing ISScom.............................................................................................. 5–21
Figure 5-16 ISScom Program Icon............................................................ 5–21
5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications........................................................... 5–22
5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout.......................................................................... 5–23
5.8 Initial Setup Procedure..................................................................................... 5–24
Setup Procedure............................................................................................... 5–24

Chapter 6 Testing..................................................................................................................... 6–1

Testing Overview................................................................................................ 6–1

6.1 Power On Self Test ............................................................................................ 6–2

Equipment Required .......................................................................................... 6–2
Figure 6-1 Power Supply Connection ......................................................... 6–2
Torque Requirements......................................................................................... 6–3

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ............................................................................... 6–3

Overview ............................................................................................................ 6–3

xiv
 Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Testing (Cont.'d)

Equipment Required .......................................................................................... 6–4

Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode....................................................................... 6–4
Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–16 and 17)................................................ 6–4
Table 6-1 Output Contacts........................................................................... 6–5
Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1 – 18............................................................ 6–6
Table 6-2 Input Contacts.............................................................................. 6–7
Input Test (Trip Coil, Close Coil) Inputs 19–22.................................................... 6–7
Table 6-3 Trip and Close Coil Input Contacts............................................... 6–8
Figure 6-2 MBTS Trip Coil—Close Coil Input Voltage Rating ..................... 6–8
Front Panel Status LED Test............................................................................... 6–9
Figure 6-3 Status LED Panel....................................................................... 6–9
Module LED Test.............................................................................................. 6–10
Figure 6-4 M‑3972 Status Module............................................................. 6–10
Button Test ....................................................................................................... 6–11
Figure 6-5 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface Module.............................. 6–11
Display Test....................................................................................................... 6–12
COM1/COM2 Loopback Test............................................................................ 6–12
Figure 6-6 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug................................................... 6–12
COM3 Test (2‑Wire).......................................................................................... 6–13
Figure 6-7 RS‑485 2‑Wire Testing............................................................. 6–14
Clock ON/OFF.................................................................................................. 6–15
SYS OK LED Flash/Illuminated........................................................................ 6–16

6.3 Metering Tests.................................................................................................. 6–17

Equipment Required ........................................................................................ 6–17
Metering Test Setup.......................................................................................... 6–17
Voltage/Current Verification.............................................................................. 6–18
Torque Requirements....................................................................................... 6–18

6.4 Auto Calibration................................................................................................ 6–19

Figure 6-8 Metering Voltage Input Configuration....................................... 6–20
Figure 6-9 Metering Current Input Configuration....................................... 6–20

Appendix A Configuration Record Forms.............................................................................A–1

Communication Settings Record Form..........................................................A–2
Setup System Settings Record Form (1 of 3)................................................A–3
System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (1 of 9)............................A–6
System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (1 of 11).......................A–15
Function ISSLogic Setpoints (1 of 4).........................................................A–26
Sequence of Events Setup (1 of 2)..............................................................A–30
Oscillograph Setup.......................................................................................A–32
Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS – Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map (1 of 2)... A–33
Table A-2 M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map (1 of 3). A–35

xv
M-4272 Instruction Book

Appendix B Communications.................................................................................................B–1
Serial Ports.........................................................................................................B–1
Optional Ethernet Port........................................................................................B–2
Table B-1 Communication Port Signals ......................................................B–2
Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423.......................................................B–2
Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network......................................................B–3
Figure B-3 RS-485 Network........................................................................B–4
Figure B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal......................B–4

Appendix C Self-Test Error Codes........................................................................................ C–1

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (1 of 2)..................................................... C–1
Table C‑1 Self-Test Error Codes (2 of 2)..................................................... C–2
Table C‑2 ISScom Error Messages............................................................. C–2

Appendix D Transfer Event Log Samples............................................................................. D–1

Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (1 of 2).......................... D–2
Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (1 of 3)................................ D–4

Appendix E Sequence of Events Sample Printout...............................................................E–1

Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout (1 of 2).........E–2
Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (1 of 4)...............E–4

Appendix F Transfer Logic Time Sequence...........................................................................F–1

Figure F-1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.... F–2
Figure F-2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous
Transfer Mode................................................................................................F–3

Appendix G Layup and Storage............................................................................................ G–1

Storage Requirements (Environment)............................................................... G–1
Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance During Storage)......................... G–1
Layup Configuration........................................................................................... G–1
Maintenance Requirements............................................................................... G–3

Appendix H Index ................................................................................................................... H–1

Appendix I Declaration of Conformity.................................................................................... I–1

©2006 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800-4272-IB-10 01/19

Printed in U.S.A.

xvi
 Introduction – 1

1 Introduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents................................................................ 1–1

1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System................................................. 1–3

1.3 Application........................................................................................ 1–7

1.1 Instruction Book Contents

This instruction book includes six Chapters and nine Appendices.

Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter One summarizes the devices’ capabilities, introduces the instruction book contents
and describes the application of an MBTS.

Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter Two provides the necessary instructions regarding manual operation of the MBTS.
Manual operation of the MBTS is accomplished by utilizing either the unit’s front panel
controls and indicators, which include the M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI) and
M-3972 Status Module or through ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis
Software.

Chapter 3: ISScom
Chapter 3 provides a description of each element of the S‑4200 ISScom Communications
and Oscillographic Analysis Software. S‑4200 is compatible with firmware versions
V02.01.07 or later. The ISScom menu structure and commands are described in detail for
each feature and function.

Chapter 4: System Setup and Setpoints

Chapter Four is designed for the person(s) responsible for the direct setting and configuration
of the system. It describes the procedures for entering all required data into the MBTS.
Included in this chapter are functional and connection diagrams for a typical application for
the system; and describes the configuration process for the unit (choosing active functions),
output contact assignment and input blocking designation. It also illustrates the definition
of system quantities and equipment characteristics required by the MBTS, and describes
the individual function settings.

Chapter 5: Installation
The person or group responsible for the installation of the MTBS will find herein all mechanical
information required for physical installation, equipment ratings, and all external connections
in this chapter. For reference, the Three‑Line Connection Diagram is repeated from
Chapter 4, System Setup and Setpoints. Further, a commissioning checkout procedure
is outlined to check the external CT and VT connections. Additional tests which may be
desirable at the time of installation are described in Chapter 6, Testing.

1–1
M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 6: Testing
This chapter provides step-by-step test procedures for each function, as well as diagnostic
mode and auto-calibration procedures.

Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms

This Appendix supplies a set of forms to record and document the settings required for the
proper operation of the MBTS.

Appendix B: Communications
This Appendix describes communication port signals and various topologies and equipment
required for remote communication.

Appendix C: Self‑Test Error Codes

This Appendix lists all the error codes and their definitions.

Appendix D: Transfer Event Log Sample Printout

This Appendix provides a sample Transfer Event Log printout.

Appendix E: Sequence of Events Sample Printout

This Appendix provides a sample Sequence of Events printout.

Appendix F: Transfer Logic Time Sequence

This Appendix includes the Transfer Logic Time Sequence for each transfer.

Appendix G: Layup and Storage

This Appendix includes the recommended storage parameters, periodic surveillance
activities and layup configuration for the M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System.

Appendix H: Index
This Appendix includes the Index for the M‑4272 Instruction Book.

Appendix I: Declaration of Conformity

This Appendix includes the Declaration of Conformity in accordance to ISO/IEC 17050-
1:2004.

1–2
 Introduction – 1

1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System

The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) is a microprocessor-based unit that uses
digital signal processing technology to provide automatic and manual transfer modes.
The available internal functions of the system are listed in Table 1‑1. The nomenclature follows
the standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2, Standard Electric Power Systems Device Function
Numbers where applicable. The available MBTS Transfer Functions are listed in Table 1-2.

Mode Transfer Function

AUTO MANUAL
X X Fast Transfer
X X In-Phase Transfer
X X Residual Voltage Transfer
X Fixed Time Transfer
X Hot Parallel
Table 1-1 M‑4272 Transfer Functions
The control/status inputs can be programmed to block and/or to trigger the oscillograph recorder.
Any of the functions or the control/status inputs can be individually programmed to activate any
one or more of the programmable outputs, each with a contact.

QQ NOTE: See Section 1.3, Application for Transfer Function descriptions.

The M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module allows the user to access the following
features and functions from the M‑4272 front panel using a menu-driven, 2 line by 24
character alphanumeric display:
Settings
• Enable and Disable Manual Transfer
• Enable and Disable Auto Transfer
• Set MBTS to either Local or Remote
• Enter Comm settings
• Set Access Codes
• Set User Control Number
• Set display User Lines 1 and 2
• Set Date/Time
Functions
• Initiate a Manual Transfer
• Clear Alarm Counter
• Enter Diagnostic Mode
• Clear Error Codes
Status
• Metering of various quantities, including voltage, current, frequency and
phase-angle
• I/O Status
• Alarm Counter
• MBTS Unit Last Power Up Date and Time
• MBTS Unit Firmware Version and Serial Number
• Error Codes
• Checksums

1–3
M-4272 Instruction Book

Function Description
27B Bus Undervoltage
50 Instantaneous Phase Overload
50BF Breaker Failure
Source Breaker Failure Using
SBF
Breaker Status
60FL VT Fuse-Loss Detection
81 Bus Frequency
81R Rate of Change of Frequency
ISSL ISSlogic
CCM Closed Circuit Monitoring
TCM Trip Curcuit Monitoring

Table 1-2 M‑4272 Device Functions

The MBTS stores time-tagged transfer information for the four most recent transfers. The
M-3972 Status Module LEDs are used to provide a detailed visual indication of function
operation for the most recent event.
The MBTS retains up to 248 cycles of oscillograph waveform data. This data can be
downloaded and analyzed using ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis
Software.
The unit is powered from two wide input range switch mode power supplies.
The MBTS includes self-test, auto calibration, and diagnostic capabilities, in addition to
IRIG-B time-sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events.

Communication Ports
There are three physical communication ports provided on the M‑4272. If the optional RJ45
Ethernet port is purchased, then the MBTS shares COM2.
• COM1, located on the system front panel, is a standard 9-pin RS‑232 DTE-
configured port. COM1 is used to locally set and interrogate the MBTS using
a portable computer.
• COM2, located on the rear of the MBTS, is a standard 9-pin RS‑232 DTE-
configured port. When the optional RJ45 Ethernet Port is enabled, the COM2
port is disabled for communications. However, the Demodulated IRIG-B may
still be used through the COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled. When COM2
Port is enabled the Ethernet Port is not available.
The RJ45 Ethernet port uses a 10Base-T type connection that accepts an
RJ45 connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable. The Ethernet port supports
MODBUS over TCP/IP. The IP address can be obtained automatically when
using the DHCP protocol if enabled, or a static IP address can be manually
entered, using the HMI.
• COM3, located on the rear terminal block of the MBTS, is a 2-wire RS‑485
communications port.

QQ NOTE: COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be disabled for security purposes from the
Communications HMI menu. A Level 2 Access Code is required.

The system may be remotely set and interrogated utilizing either a hard-wired RS‑232 serial
connection or modem (COM2 when activated as RS‑232, or COM3), or when purchased,
the ethernet connection (RJ45 activated).

1–4
 Introduction – 1

ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software

ISScom is shipped with every MBTS. This software runs on a PC-compatible computer.
S-4200 ISScom is compatible with Windows 7 or later, and firmware version V02.01.07 or
later. When properly connected using either a direct serial connection, modem or ethernet
network connection, ISScom can provide the following functions:
• Setpoint interrogation and modification
• Bus, Source 1 and Source 2 status real-time monitoring
• Recorded oscillograph data downloading
• Display Oscillograph Data
• Initiate Transfer

See Chapter 3, ISScom for a detailed description of all ISScom features.

M-3972 Status Module

The status module (Figure 1-1), includes 24 individually labeled STATUS LEDs to indicate
operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight individually labeled OUTPUT LEDs will
be lit as long as the corresponding output contact is picked up.

27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

STATUS DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK
TRANS READY DELTA VOLTAGE OK
FAST TRANS OP DELTA FREQUENCY OK
IN-PHASE TRANS OP FAST/PARAL TRANS READY
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANS OP S1/S2 BRKR-RACKED OUT BLOCK
FIXED-TIME TRANS OP NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK
PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
50/50BF-1/SRC 1 BRKR FAIL TRIP/CLOSE CKT OPEN BLOCK
50/50BF-2/SRC 2 BRKR FAIL INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR

OUTPUTS
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

Figure 1-1 M-3972 Status Module

M‑3933/M‑0423 Serial Communication Cables

The M‑3933 cable is a 10-foot RS‑232 cable for use between the MBTS rear panel (COM2)
port and a modem. This cable includes a DB25 (25-pin) connector (modem) and a DB9 (9-pin)
at the MBTS end.
The M‑0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS‑232 cable for direct connection between
a PC and the MBTS front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2 port. This cable includes a
DB9 (9-pin) connector at each end.

1–5
M-4272 Instruction Book

M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module

The HMI module provides the means to interrogate the MBTS and to input a limited number
of settings, access data, etc. directly from the front of the MBTS. Its operation is described
in detail in Section 2.1, Front Panel Controls and Indications.

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

M-4272



EXIT ENTER

Figure 1-2 M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module

1–6
 Introduction – 1

1.3 Application

Typically most power plant and industrial plants have motors that must remain operational
in the event of a loss of the power source. There are many reasons to initiate a transfer:
• For fault clearing on the present source
• Interruption of present source
• Planned deliberate transfer to an on-site source during periods of storms
or for rate savings
• Maintenance
• Normal plant startup/shutdown
• Auxiliary system transfer.

To address this requirement, facilities employ two power sources to supply these auxiliary
systems. In a power plant these two power sources are normally the station service
transformer and the auxiliary startup transformer which is usually also connected to the
utility. In a processing plant there are two independent power sources which power separate
portions of the plant.
The purpose of a Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) is to quickly and safely transfer the bus
motor load from one source to another source in order to maintain power plant or process
plant continuity. Motor bus transfer systems are used to perform the transfer of large motors
or aggregates of smaller and larger motors. A typical configuration is shown in Figure 1-3.
The M‑4272 MBTS monitors the Source 1 voltage, the Motor Bus voltage and the Source 2
voltage. The M‑4272 also controls the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. In case of abnormal
condition, a protective relay operates and trips an 86 lockout relay which will trip the Source 1
breaker and also initiate an automatic transfer to MBTS. After recognizing an initiate transfer
signal, the M‑4272 MBTS will issue a trip command to the Source 1 breaker and then it will
issue a close command to the Source 2 breaker. This will transfer the Motor Bus load from
the troubled Source 1 to Source 2, keeping the motors on the bus running and the process
continuing to operate. Figure 1-4 illustrates a conventional unit-connected generator one-line
diagram. This application uses the unit auxiliary transformer as one source and the startup
transformer as the second source.

1–7
M-4272 Instruction Book

MAIN SOURCE STARTUP SOURCE

UNIT AUXILIARY STATION SERVICE

TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER

VT-M VT-SU

VS1 VS2

M-4272
CT-M IS1 VBus IS2 CT-SU

52 N.O. 52
M N.C. SU
VT-B

STATION BUS SYSTEM

M M
TWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

QQ NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M‑4272 50BF function, they are not
required for transfer operation.
Figure 1-3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

GENERATOR STEP-UP
TRANSFORMER

UNIT AUXILIARY STATION SERVICE

TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER

52
52
S2
STARTUP SOURCE
S1
GENERATOR BREAKER
AUXILIARY MOTOR BUS

M M M

Figure 1-4 Unit-Connected Generator Motor Bus Transfer One-line

1–8
 Introduction – 1

Figure 1-5 illustrates a typical industrial plant one-line diagram. This application has two
independent sources, with each half of the processing plant operated by each source.
There is normally an open tie breaker between the two motor buses. In this application
two M‑4272 MBTS are used. Each system controls a source breaker and the tie breaker.
Whichever source fails has its breaker tripped and the tie breaker is closed, this transfers
the motor bus load to the remaining source which now supplies power to the entire plant.
In general, the voltage characteristic of a motor bus during a transfer is governed by the
motor loads operating at the time of transfer. The majority of auxiliary system motors are
induction motors with few synchronous motors used in isolated cases. The types of motors
in use will, to a great degree, determine the voltage characteristics of the auxiliary system
buses. When the bus is disconnected from the source, the motors will maintain a voltage
due to the energy stored in the motor fields. The initial magnitude of the voltage depends
on the integrity of the power source prior to being disconnected.
A three phase fault in the Unit Auxiliary Generator Step-up transformer or on the high voltage
bus near the plant may completely de‑energize the motor fields and the resultant voltage
will be minimal. However, for all other cases a significant voltage will be induced on the
motor bus. The induced voltage will have a dynamic amplitude and phase characteristic
that will depend on the inertia of the motor loads and the field energy stored in the motors.
The characteristics for synchronous and induction motors are shown in Figure 1-6 and
Figure 1-7 respectively. Figure 1-6 represents a 6000 hp I.D. fan motor operating at 25%
load prior to transfer. This is an example of a characteristic for a large motor driving a high
inertia load. The voltage magnitude requires 42 cycles to drop 50% of it’s initial value and
the angle takes more than 60 cycles to complete a 360 degree rotation. The 960 hp boiler
circulating pump motor used for Figure 1-7 data shows a dramatic variation in characteristics.
The voltage magnitude drops to 50% within 10 cycles and the phase completes a 360 degree
rotation in less than eight cycles.

Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)

VS1 VS1

VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4272 M-4272 I S1

IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2

52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2

VT-B1 VT-B2

BUS-TIE
STATION BUS SYSTEM BUS 1 BUS 2
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2

M M M M

QQ NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M‑4272 50BF function, they are not
required for transfer operation.
Figure 1-5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus Transfer One-line

1–9
M-4272 Instruction Book

Referring to Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7, a few generalizations can be made regarding the
inertia of motor loads, motor size, and the mix of synchronous and induction motors.
• Inertia – The higher the inertia of the aggregate motor loads on the
motor bus, the more slowly the motor bus frequency will decay during
the disconnected coastdown period. That has a direct impact on how fast
the phase angle changes. Low inertia loads will cause the phase angle to
change quickly, as the frequency of the motor bus decays quickly, and the
slip frequency between the motor bus and the new source quickly increases.
• Motor Size – The larger the motor size, the longer the time the voltage will
take to decay on an induction motor.
• Mix of Synchronous and Induction Motors – Voltage will tend to decay much
more rapidly on a motor bus with all induction motors. On a motor bus with
a mix of synchronous and induction motors, the synchronous motors will
attempt to hold up the voltage during the transfer interval.
• Loading – The higher the load on the motors, the faster the motor bus
frequency will decay.

These parameters are key to analyzing the motor bus transfer issue and developing schemes
to accomplish transfers that promote process continuity while causing no damage to the
motors or the loads.
An important value to decide the viability of MBT is the resultant volts per hertz (V/Hz)
across the breaker. The resultant V/Hz is derived from the V/Hz vectors of the motor bus
and the new source at the instant just prior to connection and must not exceed 1.33 V/Hz [1].
Pursuant to phase angle and voltage, and their effect on resultant V/Hz, some generalizations
can be made:
• Phase Angle – As the phase angle increases between the two sources,
assuming the two source voltages are the same, the V/Hz will increase.
• Voltage – As the voltage difference between the two sources increases,
assuming the phase angle between the sources remains the same, the
V/Hz will increase.
6000 HP I.D. Fan
(Operating at 25% Load Prior to Transfer)
100 0
Voltage Magnitude (%)

Phase
80 -72
Phase (Degrees)

60 -144
Voltage
40 Magnitude -216

20 -288

0 -360
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Time (Cycles)

Figure 1-6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On a Large Induction Motor

1–10
 Introduction – 1

960 HP Boiler Circulating Pump

(Operating at Full Load)
100 0

Voltage Magnitude (%)

Phase (not shown for T>20)
80 -72

Phase (Degrees)
60 -144

40 -216
Voltage
20 -288

0 -360
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Time (Cycles)

Figure 1-7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On a Small Induction Motor

The resultant V/Hz issue is exacerbated when the phase angle difference increases and the
voltage difference increases as shown in Figure 1-8. The following relationship in equation
1 defines this condition:

2 2
ER = E S + E M − 2 ES EM cos θ
[1]
where
• ES System equivalent V/Hz

• EM Motor residual V/Hz (on system base)

• ER Resultant vectorial V/Hz

• θ Phase angle between the motor bus and new source at the instant prior
to connection
E M = 0.81 pu

E
R =
1.
33
pu
@ -95 degree

θ
s

ES = 1 pu @ 0 degrees

Figure 1-8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM

Hot Parallel, Fast, In-Phase, Residual Voltage and Fixed Time Transfer Methods
MBTs can be categorized as closed or open transition [2]. The closed transition involves
brief paralleling of the sources. The closed transition transfer is commonly referred to as
a hot parallel transfer. Open transition transfers do not parallel the sources, and include
fast, in-phase, residual voltage and fixed time. The fast transfer can be subcategorized as
simultaneous or sequential. All other transfers are sequential.

1–11
M-4272 Instruction Book

Hot Parallel Transfer

In a hot parallel transfer, the new source is connected to the motor bus before the old
source is tripped. The intent is to transfer sources without interruption. The phase angle,
delta voltage and delta frequency from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated
prior to the transfer to assure that the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism.
This method has gained wide acceptance for routine source transfers because transients
on the motor bus are eliminated.
There may be instances where the two sources may not be derived from the same primary
source and a large standing phase angle may be present between them, precluding a hot
parallel transfer. Assuming the two sources’ phase angle relationship is acceptable, with the
two sources paralleled, currents flowing into and through the bus may violate the interrupt
rating for the circuit breakers and the short term withstand ratings of the source transformers.
A fault occurring either on the bus or on one of the sources during the time the sources
are paralleled can overstress the components of the bus system. The probability of this
happening may be viewed as small; however, the consequences of such a fault occurring
during the source paralleled operating interval should be thoroughly understood before the
hot parallel transfer system is used.

Fast Simultaneous Transfer

In a fast simultaneous transfer, a trip command is issued to the present source breaker and
a close command is issued to the new source breaker at the same instant. The phase angle,
delta voltage and delta frequency from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated prior
to the transfer to assure that the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism. This
is the fastest transfer type that does not deliberately parallel the sources. Due to breaker
operating time variations and control voltage variations, brief unintentional paralleling of
the sources may occur.
The M‑4272 includes settings that allow delaying the close command to avoid any paralleling
of the source.
Close commands used in the fast simultaneous transfers make certain assumptions about
the phase angle and slip frequency between the decelerating motors and the new source:
• The transfer is affected before the phase angle between the new source
and the motor bus increases to an undesirable value.
• A fault occurs on the present source, which may affect the phase angle at
the instant the transfer sequence starts.
• There will be little change in the phase angle between the motor bus and
new source once the present source has been disconnected.
• Any preconceived notions about the deceleration characteristics of the
motor bus have not changed. Key characteristics would be changes in the
combined inertia of the motor loads and changes in the mix of synchronous
and induction motors.

When Fast Simultaneous Transfer is selected, a breaker failure function is required in the
event the breaker does not trip. The M‑4272 includes two Breaker Failure methods (see
Section 4.4, System Setpoints).

Fast Sequential Transfer

In a fast sequential transfer, the present source is tripped, and as soon as the present source
breaker has started to open (typically indicated by an “early b” contact), a close command
is issued to the new source breaker. The phase angle, delta voltage and delta frequency
from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to assure that
the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism. This is the second fastest transfer
type that does not deliberately parallel the sources.

1–12
 Introduction – 1

A close command used in the fast sequential transfers can be dynamically blocked, just
after the present source is disconnected, if any of the following occur:
• A fault occurs on the present or new source, which may affect the phase
angle at the instant the transfer sequence starts.
• There is a large change in the phase angle between the motor bus and new
source once the present source has been disconnected [2].
• Any preconceived notions about the deceleration characteristics of the motor
bus have changed in that the deceleration has increased, therefore causing
the phase angle to change rapidly. This would occur from a decrease in the
inertia of the motor loads.

There is a type of sequential transfer that may be applied if a fast transfer cannot be made,
but before a residual voltage or fixed time transfer. It is called an in-phase transfer and offers
an additional opportunity to transfer while the motors are still spinning and the likelihood of
process interruption is minimized.

In-Phase Transfer
An in-phase transfer is defined as connecting a motor bus and the new source that have a
slip frequency between them at the first (zero degrees) phase coincidence (the motor bus
is coasting down). It is essentially a specialized type of automatic synchronizing under high
slip frequency (typically from 0.5 to 15 hertz), and a rapidly decelerating motor bus frequency
(rapidly growing slip frequency). This requires the use of very fast measurement and output
command techniques. As the slip frequency is changing rapidly due to the deceleration of
the motor bus, calculation of the rate of change of frequency may be required in addition
to examination of the instantaneous slip frequency when making the new source closing
command decision [3].

Residual Voltage Transfer

In a residual voltage transfer, the motor bus is connected to the new source after the voltage
on the coasting motor bus falls to less than 0.33 pu. In this manner, no matter what the
phase angle, the resultant V/Hz will not exceed 1.33 V/Hz. This is the third type of transfer
type that does not parallel the sources. This type of transfer, however, typically is not fast
enough to maintain process continuity, as certain motor loads that cause rapid stalling may
necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus.

Fixed Time Transfer

In a fixed time transfer, the motor bus is connected to the new source after a time delay that
would reflect that the voltage on the coasting motor bus has fallen to less than 0.33 pu. In
this manner, no matter what the phase angle, the resultant V/Hz will not exceed 1.33 V/Hz.
This is the fourth type of transfer type that does not parallel the sources. This type transfer,
however, will not be able maintain process continuity, as certain motor loads that cause
rapid stalling may necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus.
These open transition transfers would be attempted in the order they are presented, as shown
in Figure 1-9. The first possible transfer would be the fast transfer which would be made if
the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is met. If that transfer was not
made, an in-phase, residual voltage or fixed time transfer would be initiated. Obviously, the
fast transfer offers the greatest chance of process continuity, as the interruption period to
the motors is short. The in-phase transfer provides one more opportunity to transfer with
a good possibility to keep process continuity. By the time a residual voltage or fixed time
transfer is initiated, the motors may have stopped against low inertia loads, such as positive
displacement pumps or conveyors, and a process interruption may occur. In addition, if many
motors must be started to restart the process, load shedding and staggered starting of the
motors may have to be undertaken so as not to overload the capacity of the new source
and cause unacceptable voltage sags during the restarting procedure.

1–13
M-4272 Instruction Book

References
[1] ANSI C50.41-2000, American Nation Standard for Polyphase Induction
Motors for Power generating Stations.
[2] A.P. Gabba and D.S. Hill, “Make Automatic Power Source Transfers a
Success for Your Plants,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol.
37, No. 2, Mar/Apr 2001.
[3] W.G. Hartmann, “Automatic Synchronizing for Generation and Tie Lines,”
18th Annual Georgia Tech Protective MBTSing Conference, Atlanta, GA,
May 1999.

Fast
0 1 pu
Phase (Degrees)

Voltage
Residual Voltage
180
and Fixed Time

In-Phase
0 pu
360
Time
Figure 1-9 Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS

1–14
 Operation – 2

2 Operation

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators................................................. 2–1

2.2 Manual Operation............................................................................. 2–7

2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering..................................................... 2–18

This chapter contains information that describes the operation of the Motor Bus Transfer
System (MBTS). M‑4272 operation includes the following:
• Front Panel Controls and Indicators
• Initiate Transfer
• Remote/Local Control
• Automatic Transfer Enable/Disable
• Manual Transfer Enable/Disable
• Status Monitoring/Metering
• Reset Error Codes
• Reset Alarm Counters
• Device On/Off

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

This section describes the operation of the M‑4272 as a function of the M‑3931 Human
Machine Interface Module (HMI) and the M-3972 Status module.
The MBTS can be interrogated locally with the HMI panel. An integral part of the design is
the layout and function of the front panel indicators and controls, illustrated in Figure 2-1.

Alphanumeric Display
To assist the operator in operating and interrogating the MBTS locally, the HMI displays
menus which guide the operator to the desired function or status value. These menus consist
of two lines. The bottom line lists lower case abbreviations of each menu selection with the
chosen menu selection shown in uppercase. The top menu line provides a description of
the chosen menu selection.

Screen Blanking
The display will automatically blank if there are no events in the Transfer Event Log after
exiting from the Main Menu, or from any screen after five (5) minutes of unattended operation.
To wake up the display, the user must press any key except EXIT.
If there are Transfer Events in the Transfer Event Log, they must be cleared (RESET
pushbutton) before the screen will Auto Blank. See Transfer Event Log/Clear Status in
Section 3.1, ISScom Functional Description.

2–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Arrow Pushbuttons
The left and right arrow pushbuttons are used to choose among the displayed menu
selections. When entering values, the left and right arrow pushbuttons are used to select
the digit (by moving the cursor) of the displayed setpoint that will be increased or decreased
by the use of the up and down pushbuttons.
The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase or decrease input values or change between
upper and lower case inputs. If the up or down pushbutton is pressed and held when adjusting
numerical values, the speed of increment or decrement is increased.

EXIT Pushbutton
The EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayed screen and move up the menu tree.
Any changed setpoint in the displayed screen will not be saved if the selection is aborted
using the EXIT pushbutton.

ENTER Pushbutton
The ENTER pushbutton is used to choose a highlighted menu selection, to replace a setting
or other programmable value with the currently displayed value, or to move down within
the menu tree.

System OK LED
The Green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the unit's microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM
OK LED indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also be programmed to be
continuously illuminated to indicate proper program cycling.

Diagnostic/Time Sync LED

The Green DIAG/TIME SYNC LED will illuminate to indicate that the IRIG‑B time signal is
received and the internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG‑B time signal. IRIG‑B time
information is used to accurately tag target and oscillograph events.
The LED will flash when a self-test error is detected. The LED will flash the Error Code
number; for example, for Error Code 32, the LED will flash 3 times, followed by a short
pause, and then flash 2 times, followed by a long pause, then repeat LED flash sequence.
The Error Code number is also displayed on the M-3931 HMI screen.

Breaker Status LEDs

The Red SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED, SOURCE 2 BRKR CLOSED LEDs and the Green
SOURCE 1 BRKR OPEN, SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN LEDs will illuminate when the selected
breaker status input is closed. Table 2-1 presents the available input configurations for the
Breaker Status LEDs.

Source 1 Breaker Status LEDs Red (Closed)

S1 52a Closed S1 52b Open S1 52a and S1 52b
(Input 1) (Input 2) (Inputs 1 and 2)
Green (Open)
S1 52a Open S1 52b Closed S1 52a and S1 52b
(Input 1) (Input 2) (Inputs 1 and 2)
Source 2 Breaker Status LEDs Red (Closed)
S2 52a Closed S2 52b Open S2 52a and S2 52b
(Input 4) (Input 5) (Inputs 4 and 5)
Green (Open)
S2 52a Open S2 52b Closed S2 52a and S2 52b
(Input 4) (Input 5) (Inputs 4 and 5)

Table 2-1 Breaker Status LED Input Configurations

2–2
 Operation – 2

Power Supply #1 & #2 LED

The Green PS LED indicator will remain illuminated for the appropriate power supply
whenever power is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating correctly. The two
power supplies are not redundant and the unit requires both supplies to operate for correct
unit functioning.

M-3972 Status Module

The Status module includes 24 Status LEDs, and 8 Output Status LEDs. The 24 Status
LEDs are preassigned to provide the status of specific functions and features. The Status
LEDs provide the following indication:
• When a function is in a "Picked Up" (exceeded the setpoint value) condition,
the assigned Status Indicator will illuminate when the "Status Reset"
pushbutton is depressed and held.
• When a function is in a "Picked Up" (exceeded the setpoint value) condition,
and the Time Delay timer has timed out the assigned Status Indicator will
illuminate as well as any assigned Output LEDs.
• Transfer Conditions

When a condition exists that causes the operation of Outputs 1 through 8, the assigned
STATUS LED on the M-3972 Status Module will illuminate. Status Module LEDs will remain
illuminated until the condition causing the trip is cleared, and the operator presses the
"STATUS Reset" pushbutton.

Output and Input Status LEDs

When a condition exists that causes the operation of Outputs 9 through 16 or Inputs 7
through 18 the assigned Status LED on the M-4272 Front Panel will illuminate. The Status
LEDs will remain illuminated until the condition causing the operation is cleared, and the
operator presses the "STATUS RESET" pushbutton.

Trip (TCM) and Close (CCM) Circuit Monitor Status LEDs

The Trip and Close Circuit Monitor LEDs provide the status of the Trip and Close circuits. If a
Trip or Close circuit is open (cannot perform either trip or close function) the corresponding
LED will be illuminated until the open circuit is corrected.

†     †

†
†
‰ Œ  ˆ  ‡ ‹ Š Œ   ‹ Š

    

†
†  ‰ ˆ ‡ 




 € 

 
ƒ


† † 
 


  
 
 

ƒ „ ‚   †
  
ƒ
†     
€     


    
  

     



 ­
   

  
   


      

    
      

  

         
   

Figure 2-1 M‑4272 Horizontal Front Panel

2–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Power-On Beckwith Electric Co.

Substation Name AUTO FAST TRANSFER
Self Tests
PICKUP ELEMENTS
POWER ON SELFTESTS
Default Message Screens
XXXXXXX
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
A27 #1 AUTO PH UNDERVOLT

LED Test
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
OPERATE ELEMENTS

POWER ON SELFTESTS AUTO FAST TRANSFER

PASS 02-NOV-2005 15:28:38:539

Model Number
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
OUTPUTS
Beckwith Electric Co.
M-4272

AUTO FAST TRANSFER

CT Rating 04 01

Beckwith Electric Co.

CT RATING 5A
Transfer Event
Frequency Rating Screens
Beckwith Electric Co.
FREQ RATING 60Hz
ENTER ACCESS CODE
Software Version
5-minute
Beckwith Electric Co. access
D-0135V01.00.31 601b ACCESS DENIED!
lockout
Serial Number after
LEVEL 1 ACCESS
3 tries
Beckwith Electric Co.
SERIAL NUMBER 137 GRANTED!

System Date and Time Access Screens (optional)

Beckwith Electric Co.
03-JAN-2006 15:24:32

User Logo
INIT TRANSFER
Beckwith Electric Co. INIT rmte_lcal auto_xfer man-xfer stat comm setup
Substation Name

INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?

Power On Self-Test yes NO
and Status Screens
Main Menu Flow

Figure 2-2 Screen Message Menu Flow

2–4
 Operation – 2

INIT TRANSFER SETUP UNIT

INIT rmte_lcal   stat comm SETUP 
• Software Version
REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL
init RMTE_LCAL  • Serial Number
• Alter Access Codes
AUTO TRANSFER • User Control Number
 AUTO_XFER man_xfer  • User Logo Line 1
• User Logo Line 2
MANUAL TRANSFER • Clear Alarm Counter
 auto_xfer MAN_XFER  • Date & Time
• Clear Error Codes
STATUS • Eth Firmware Version
 STAT comm setup 
• Diagnostic Mode 
• Voltage Status
• Current Status
DIAGNOSTIC
MODE
• Frequency Status
• Phase Angle Status • Output Test (Relay)
• In/Out Status • Input Test (Status)
• Alarm Counter • Status Led Test
• Time of Last Power up • Module Led Test
• Error Codes • Button Test
• Checksums • Display Test
• Com1 Loopback Test
COMMUNICATION
• Com2 Loopback Test
 stat COMM setup 
• Com3 Echo Test 2 Wire
• Com1 Setup • Clock Test
• Com2 Setup • Flash Sys Ok Led
• Com3 Setup • Auto Calibration
• Communication Address • Factory Use Only
• Comm Access Code
• Ethernet Setup
DEVICE ON/OFF
 ON_OFF exit
• Ethernet IP Address

EXIT LOCAL MODE

 on_off EXIT

Figure 2-3 Main Menu Flow

2–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

STATUS RESET Pushbutton

Pressing and holding the STATUS RESET pushbutton performs four functions:
• Resets all Status LEDs if the condition causing the condition is no longer
present.
• Displays the present pickup status of all functions available on the status
module. This is a valuable diagnostic tool which may be used during
commissioning and testing.
• Resets Latched Outputs
• Resets HMI display of last transfer

COM Port Security

COM1, COM2 and COM3 may be disabled for security purposes from the unit HMI. A Level
2 Access Code is required.

Disabling COM Ports

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

Communication
stat COMM setup

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr

6. Press ENTER and the following is displayed:

PORT ACCESS
enable DISABLE
7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbutton as necessary to enable or disable the
COM port.
8. Press ENTER and the following is displayed:

COM1 BAUD RATE

baud_4800 BAUD_9600
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as necessary for additional COM Ports.

2–6
 Operation – 2

2.2 Manual Operation

Overview of Manual Transfer Methods and Transfer Modes

A Manual transfer can be initiated utilizing either:
• The Human Machine Interface (HMI)
• Through Local Serial Connections
• A Control/Status Input
• Through remote serial communications

The Manual Transfer allows transfer operation in either direction, from Source 1 to Source
2 or from Source 2 to Source 1.
Manual Transfer provides Hot Parallel Transfer or Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer and
Residual Voltage Transfer. The Manual Transfer is blocked when any lockout/blocking
condition occurs. The MBTS will not respond to any transfer command and will not send
the trip command while in the lockout/blocking condition.

Transfer Modes
There are two transfer modes, Sequential and Simultaneous, in the open transition transfer
operation.

Sequential Transfer Mode

When a transfer is initiated with Sequential Mode selected, the old source breaker is tripped
within 10 ms and closure of the new source breaker is attempted only upon confirmation by
the breaker status contact that the old source breaker has opened. Within 4 ms of receipt of
this confirmation, all three transfer methods, Fast, In-Phase and Residual Voltage Transfer
are enabled to supervise closure of the new source breaker. The Fixed Time Transfer is
enabled 30 cycles later. The new source breaker is then closed by the Fast Transfer Method
if the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within the delta phase
angle limit immediately after the old source breaker opens.
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is not within the delta phase
angle limit, the old source breaker is still tripped. When the four methods of transfer are
enabled, the new source breaker then closes either as a result of a subsequent movement
into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time Window, a movement through
a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window, or by a
drop in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed
time delay of the Fixed Time Transfer. Transfer is completed and the new source breaker is
closed by any of the previously listed methods whose criteria is first satisfied.
Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence for Timing Sequence of Transfer
Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.

Simultaneous Transfer Mode

When a transfer is initiated with Simultaneous Mode selected, within 10 ms of transfer
initiate, all three methods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and Residual Voltage Transfer are
immediately enabled to supervise closure of the new source breaker without waiting for
the breaker status contact confirmation that the old source breaker has opened. At the
same instant, the commands for the old source breaker to trip and the new source breaker
to close are sent simultaneously if the phase angle between the motor bus and the new
source is within the delta phase angle limit for the Fast Transfer Method immediately upon
transfer initiation. However only the Fixed Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old
source breaker has opened.

2–7
M‑4272 Instruction Book

If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is not within the delta phase
angle limit, the old source breaker is still tripped. Since the four methods of transfer are
enabled, the new source breaker then closes either as a result of a subsequent movement
into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time Window, a movement through
a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window, or by a drop
in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed time
delay of the Fixed Time Transfer. The new source breaker is closed by any of the above
methods whose criteria is first satisfied and the transfer is completed.
Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence, for Timing Sequence of Transfer
Logic, in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.

Transfer Methods
The type of transfer that occurs when a Manual Transfer is initiated is determined by the
Manual Transfer settings. Whenever the Hot Parallel Transfer is enabled the Manual Fast,
In-phase and Residual Voltage Transfers are disabled. Only when the Hot Parallel Transfer
is disabled can the Manual Fast, In-phase and Residual Voltage Transfers be enabled.

Fast Transfer
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fast Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within the
limit setting.
• The delta voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within the
limit setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The delta frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
the limit setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The transfer must be completed within the Fast Transfer time window of
1 to 10 cycles.

In-Phase Transfer
The conditions that are necessary to execute an In‑Phase Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not been met. (If this setting is enabled)
• The delta voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within the
limit setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The delta frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
the limit setting.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is changing
and must enter the first phase coincidence (first zero degree crossing)
within the In-Phase Transfer time window (adjustable from 10 to 600 cycles).
The In-Phase Transfer feature includes two programmable advanced breaker
closing times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers to coordinate the closing
at the first phase coincidence. Programmable breaker closing time is from
0 to 12 cycles.

Residual Voltage Transfer

The conditions that are necessary to execute a Residual Voltage Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not been met. (If this setting is
enabled)
• The conditions for In-Phase transfer have not been met. (If this setting is
enabled)
• The motor bus voltage decreases to less than the Residual Voltage Transfer
limit setting (adjustable from 5 to 50 V) within the incomplete transfer lockout
time limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

2–8
 Operation – 2

Hot Parallel Transfer

When the transfer operation is from Source 1 to Source 2, the close command to the Source
2 circuit breaker is issued first. Then after receipt of the breaker status contact confirmation
that the Source 2 circuit breaker has closed and the tripping command time delay (0 to
30 cycles), the trip command to the Source 1 breaker is issued.
When the transfer operation is from Source 2 to Source 1, the close command to the Source
1 circuit breaker is issued first. Then after receipt of the breaker status contact confirmation
that the Source 1 circuit breaker has closed and the tripping command time delay (0 to
30 cycles), the trip command to the Source 2 breaker is issued.
In hot parallel transfer, it is necessary to confirm that the circuit breaker has been closed after
a close command is issued to that circuit breaker. This will prevent the motor bus voltage
from becoming dead if the circuit breaker fails to close and the other breaker is tripped.
This failure of the breaker to close could be caused by electrical or mechanical problems.
In hot parallel transfer, when the Source 1 Breaker Failure (S1BF or 50BF#1) and Source
2 Breaker Failure (S2BF or 50BF#2) functions are enabled, an auto-decoupling feature is
activated to trip the breaker that was closed by the transfer if the breaker requested to open
has not opened within the predefined paralleling time.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Hot Parallel Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within the
limit setting.
• The delta voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within the
limit setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The delta frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
the limit setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The Hot Parallel Transfer must be completed within the time window of 1 to
50 cycles.

Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom)

To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Bus utilizing ISScom perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar select System/Monitor/System Status
and I/O. ISScom will display Figure 2-13.
2. Verify that the MBTS is in Remote by observing the Remote Mode/Local Mode
status indicator (System Status).
3. Verify that the Transfer Ready (System Status) indicator is Green.
4. If the Transfer Ready (System Status) indicator is not Green, then clear the
condition(s) blocking the transfer.
5. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Initiate. ISScom will display the Initiate
Manual Transfer Confirmation screen Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Initiate Manual Transfer Confirmation Screen

2–9
M‑4272 Instruction Book

6. Select YES, ISScom will display the Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent
confirmation screen Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent Confirmation Screen

The MBTS will start the Manual Transfer based on the system parameters present
and MBTS settings.
7. If the Manual Transfer cannot be completed the Incomplete Transfer Blocked
indicator will be illuminated (System Status).
The MBTS is blocked from issuing operation commands.
8. If the MBTS completes the Manual Transfer successfully, then the following will
be indicated in the System Status section of the Secondary Metering and Status
screen:
• Transfer Completed
• What type of transfer was completed
• Close S1(S2) Breaker Command
• Trip S2(S1) Breaker Command
• S1(S2) Breaker Closed
• S2(S1) Breaker Opened
• Source 1(S2) (New Source)
9. Select the RESET button from the ISScom command bar or locally press and
release the Status Reset pushbutton to reset the status indicators.

Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel)

To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Bus from the MBTS Front Panel perform the
following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4. Verify that the Transfer Ready (Status Module) indicator is Green.

2–10
 Operation – 2

5. If the Transfer Ready (Status Module) indicator is not Green, then clear the
condition(s) blocking the transfer.

6. Verify the HMI display indicates the following:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?

yes NO
8. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once to select YES.

9. Initiate a Manual transfer by pressing ENTER. The following will be displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
10. If the Manual Transfer cannot be completed, then INCOMP TRANS BLOCK will
be illuminated on the Status Module.
The MBTS is blocked from performing another transfer until reset.
11. If the MBTS completes the Manual Transfer successfully, then the following will
be indicated:
Status Module
• What type of transfer was completed
• Close S1(S2) Breaker
• Trip S2(S1) Breaker

Front Panel LEDs

• S2(S1) Breaker Closed LED
• S1(S2) Breaker Opened LED

HMI will display (scroll) the following screens:

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

30-JUN-2015 10:11:49.948

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

--OUTPUTS--

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

04 01

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

--PICKUP ELEMENTS--

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

--OPERATE ELEMENTS--
12. Press and release the Status Reset pushbutton to reset the status indicators.

2–11
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Remote/Local Control
The Remote/Local selection feature provides control of the MBTS from Local mode (COM1
or HMI) and remote mode (COM2, RS485, Ethernet or external input). Remote/Local feature
is configured from Local mode (COM1 or HMI) only.
When Local mode is selected manually, initiated transfers or settings changes through the
COM1 or HMI are allowed. Any Remote manually initiated transfers or settings changes of
the MBTS is blocked.
When Remote mode is selected manually, initiated transfers or settings changes through
the COM1, HMI, COM2, RS485, Ethernet or external input is allowed.

Remote/Local Control (ISScom)

To switch Control Method utilizing ISScom perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar select Remote/Local. ISScom will display
the Remote/Local Mode dialog screen Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen

2. Select the desired control mode, then select Save.
3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desired mode by observing the Remote Mode/Local
Mode status indicator on the System Status and I/O screen (Figure 2-13).

Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel)

To switch Control Method from the MBTS Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

2–12
 Operation – 2

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

REMOTE/LOCAL CONTORL
init RMTE_LCAL

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CONTROL METHOD
LOCAL remote
6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to select the desired Control
Mode (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will be displayed:

REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL
init RMTE_LCAL
8. The MBTS is now in the selected Control Method. Press EXIT as necessary to
return to the Main Menu.

Device ON/OFF
The Device ON/OFF feature allows the operator to place the MBTS in a lockout condition.
When "Device OFF" is selected, no automatic or manual transfers can be executed either
through Local mode or Remote mode and all output relays are deactivated. The "Device
ON" selection returns the MBTS back to normal operation.
When selecting Device ON/OFF feature through Local mode (COM1 or HMI) the MBTS
Local mode must be selected. Any Remote attempt is blocked.
When selecting Device ON/OFF feature through Remote mode (COM2, RS485 or Ethernet),
the MBTS Remote mode must be selected. Any Local attempt is blocked.
Upon saving the "Device OFF" selection, the Self-Test relay contact terminals 55 & 56 close,
the front panel System OK and Transfer Ready Status LED indicators extinguish. All output
relays are deactivated.
Upon saving the "Device ON" selection, the Self-Test relay contact terminals 55 & 56 open,
front panel System OK and Transfer Ready Status LED indicators illuminate for normal
operation. All output relays return to activated states.

Device ON/OFF (ISScom)

To switch the MBTS ON or OFF utilizing ISScom perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar select Device ON/OFF. ISScom will
display the Device On/OFF dialog screen Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 Device On/Off Dialog Box

2. Select either Device ON or Device OFF, then select Save.
3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desired mode by observing the Device On/Off Mode
status indicator on the System Status and I/O screen (Figure 2-13).

2–13
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel)

To switch the MBTS On or OFF from the Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

DEVICE ON/OFF
ON_OFF exit

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

DEVICE MODE
ON off
6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to select the desired Device
Mode (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will be displayed:

DEVICE ON/OFF
ON_OFF exit
8. The MBTS is now in the selected Device Mode. Press EXIT as necessary to return
to the Main Menu.

2–14
 Operation – 2

System Error Codes and Output Counters

The System Error Codes and Output Counters feature provides the user with the ability to
view and clear system Error Codes, Processor Resets, Alarm Counters, Power Loss Counter
and Output Counters. Also, Checksums can be viewed for Calibration and Setpoints.

Reset/View System Error Codes and Output Counters (ISScom)

To view and/or Reset System Error Codes and Output Counters utilizing ISScom perform
the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar select Tools/System Error Codes/
Counters. ISScom will display the System Error Codes and Output Counters
dialog screen Figure 2-8.
2. Select the desired System Error Code, Processor Reset, Alarm Counter, Power
Loss Counter to be reset, then select OK. ISScom will return to the Main Menu.

Figure 2-8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen

Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel)

To reset Alarm Counters from the Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

2–15
M‑4272 Instruction Book

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
VERS sn access number

6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

CLEAR ALARM COUNTER

logo1 logo2 ALARM

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CLEAR ALARM COUNTER

PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

8. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CLEAR ALARM COUNTER

-ALARM COUNTER CLEARED-
9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the Main Menu.

Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel)

To clear Error Codes from the Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

2–16
 Operation – 2

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
VERS sn access number

6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

CLEAR ERROR CODES

time ERROR eth diag

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CLEAR ERROR CODES

PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

8. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CLEAR ERROR CODES

-ERROR CODES CLEARED-
All Error codes have been cleared.
9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the Main Menu.

Switching The Active Setpoint Profile (ISScom)

The Active Profile may be chosen manually or by contact input. When the profile switching
method is set to "Manual", ISScom remote communications or one of the ISSLogic elements
will select the active profile. See Chapter 3, ISScom for additional information.
To manually select the Active Setpoint Profile proceed as follows:
1. Open the ISScom Communications and Analysis software.
2. Establish communications with the target M‑4272.
3. Select System/Profile/Switching Method and verify that the Switching Profile
Method is selected to "Manual" (Figure 2-9). Select Save.

Figure 2-9 Switching Profile Method Dialog Screen

4. Select System/Profile/Active Profile. ISScom will display the "Select Active Profile"
dialog screen Figure 2-10.

2–17
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 2-10 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen

QQ NOTE: During profile switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately 1 second.

▲▲ CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the MBTS is on-line may cause
unexpected operation if the wrong profile is selected.

5. Select the desired Profile, then select Save. ISScom will return to the main screen

2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering

From ISScom

System/Monitor/Primary Metering
The Primary Metering screen Figure 2-11, includes the Source 1 and Source 2, Primary
Voltage, Primary Current, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus Frequency, Positive and Negative
Sequence.

System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status

The Secondary Metering and Status screen Figure 2-12, includes the Source 1 and Source
2, Secondary Voltage, Secondary Current and Bus Frequency.
The Secondary Metering section also displays Bus New Source information that includes
Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and the New Source identity (Source
1 or Source 2). The Secondary Metering and Status screen also includes the individual
sections for Function Status, Oscillograph Triggered Status, Transfer Event Log Stored
Status and Sequence of Event Stored Status.
The Voltages portion of the metering screen displays the Phase Voltages for the three voltage
inputs to the MBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence (VPS) and Bus Negative
Sequence (VNS) when three phase voltages are applied. When Single-phase is selected for
S1, S2 and Bus the screen will display values for the Single-phase. The currents portion of the
metering screen displays the single phase currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source
2 breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. The displayed
Frequency is the frequency of the bus. The Bus-New Source portion displays the difference
in phase angle, frequency and voltage across the open breaker between the Bus and the
New Source. The Source that is presently defined as the New Source is also displayed. The
remainder of the screen presents the Function and Oscillograph Trigger status.

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle OK, Delta Voltage OK or Delta
Frequency OK status indicators of the ISScom software to determine
when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the
communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these
indications do not provide "live" information.

2–18
 Operation – 2

Always use the status indicators of the MBTS front panel. These indicators use the manual
transfer settings to determine when a parameter is OK.

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate of ISScom when Delta Phase Angle and
Delta Voltage are constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate of the
MBTS Front Panel.

The Function Status window displays the status of various functions, with "T" representing
the function which has timed out, and "P" representing the function which has picked up
and is timing.

Path: System / Monitor / Primary Metering

Figure 2-11 Primary Metering Screen

Path: System / Monitor / Secondary Metering & Status

Figure 2-12 Secondary Metering and Status Screen

2–19
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 2-13 System Status and I/O Screen

System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and Sync Scope

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle, Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or
Sync Scope Pointer of the ISScom Sync Scope screen to determine
when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the
communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these
indications do not provide "live" information.

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate of ISScom when Delta Phase Angle and
Delta Voltage are constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate of the
MBTS Front Panel.

The Phasor Diagram (Figure 3-21) provides selected reference Phase Angle to Phase Angle
data from other sources. The Phasor Diagram also includes a Freeze capability to freeze
the data displayed on the Phasor Diagram.
The Sync Scope screen (Figure 3-22) provides the Delta Frequency relationship between the
Bus and the New Source, illustrated in a Fast or Slow direction based on Delta Frequency.

2–20
 Operation – 2

From MBTS Front Panel

Monitor Status/Metering
The HMI menu categories for monitored values are:
• Voltage Status – S1, S2 and Bus phase voltages, Bus positive sequence
voltage, Bus negative sequence voltage, delta voltage (referenced to new
source)
• Current Status – S1 and S2 phase currents (single-phase A, B or C /   a,
b or c)
• Frequency Status – Bus Frequency, Delta Frequency and Rate of Change
of Frequency (referenced to new source)
• Phase Angle Status
• I/O Status – Status of input and output contacts
• Alarm Counter
• Time of Last Power up
• Error Codes
• Checksums – setpoints, calibration, ROM

To access the STATUS menu and begin monitoring, proceed as follows:

1. Press the ENTER, the following will be displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

2. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

STATUS
STAT comm setup

3. Press the ENTER, the following will be displayed:

VOLTAGE STATUS
VOLT curr freq phang

4. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton until the desired parameter is selected
(upper case), then press ENTER. The MBTS will display the selected parameter.
5. Press the ENTER pushbutton to move down within the STATUS menu to the desired
category. To exit a specific category and continue to the next menu category, press
the EXIT pushbutton.

Transfer Event Log

The initiating event that starts the Transfer Event Log is the "Start" signal for any transfer.
A Transfer Event Log is considered complete when one of following occurs:
• When the breaker from the Old Source trips and the breaker to the New
Source closes.
• When a breaker failure occurs.
• When the incomplete transfer timer times out.

The trigger and complete events are used to define the time frame during which the transfer
event log is storing information. One transfer can have up to 4 records. After 16 records
have been stored, any new record will cause the oldest existing record to be lost. Each
Transfer Event Log parameter is time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.
A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. See Chapter 3,
ISScom, subsection System/Transfer Event Log for Transfer Event Log Download, View,
Clear Status and Clear History selections.

2–21
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Sequence of Events Recorder

The Sequence of Events Recorder stores every change in the input status, trip commands,
close commands, any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change in any breaker
status, and status reset.
Each of these Running Events are time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.
The Running Event Log stores the last 512 events, when a new event occurs the oldest
event is removed.
A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. See Chapter 3,
ISScom, subsection System/Sequence of Events for Sequence of Events Recorder
Download, View and Clear selections.

Oscillograph
The Oscillographic Recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored
waveforms, and status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data.
The Oscillographic Recorder is triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a
MBTS initiate input), an automatically initiated signal, a trip output, a manual transfer signal
or from serial communications. The Oscillograph Recorder settings are not considered to
be part of the Setpoint Profile and should be recorded manually. Recorder settings are
common to all profiles.
See Chapter 3, ISScom, subsection System/Oscillograph for Oscillograph Recorder
Retrieve, Trigger and Clear selections.

2–22
 ISScom – 3

3 ISScom

3.1 ISScom Functional Description........................................................ 3–2

3.2 ISSplot........................................................................................... 3–42

This chapter is designed for the person or group responsible for the operation and setup
of the MBTS. ISScom S-4200 Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software is
required to successfully communicate system settings and operational commands to the
MBTS as well as access the extensive monitoring and status reporting features. ISScom
S‑4200 is compatible with firmware versions V02.01.07 or later. If the user attempts to
connect to an M‑4272 with an earlier firmware version, an Error Screen will be displayed
similar to the following:

Figure 3-4 represents the ISScom Main screen menu structure when connected. This chapter
provides a general description of each ISScom menu selection and command in the same
order as they are displayed in the software program. Those ISScom features and functions
that are covered in other sections of this Instruction Book will be noted and referenced.

3–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

3.1 ISScom Functional Description

The ISScom installation and establishing initial local communications are covered
in Section 5.5, ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software
Installation, and Section 5.6, Activating Initial Local Communications.
Selecting the ISScom Program from the Becoware Folder or selecting the ISScom Program
Icon (Figure 3-1), from the Desktop will open the program and display the ISScom Opening
Screen (Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-1 ISScom Program Icon

Figure 3-2 ISScom Opening Screen Menu Structure

3–2
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-3 ISScom Main Screen Menu Structure (File Mode)

3–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 3-4 ISScom Main Screen Menu Structure (Connected Mode)

Initiate and Reset Buttons

The Initiate and Reset buttons are used to control the MBTS. The Initiate button is used
to initiate a Manual Transfer and the Reset Button Resets the Output Status of Latched
Outputs, Timed Out Function Statuses that are Latched, the System Status and Latched
Lockout indicators (if the condition is no longer present).

3–4
 ISScom – 3

Remote/Local Button
The Remote/Local button opens a dialog screen (Figure 3-5), that provides a selection
between Remote and Local control of the MBTS. If Local is selected only locally initiated
transfers will be performed, then Remote Control (manual initiate transfer) of the MBTS is
blocked. Local mode also blocks remote setpoint changes. Remote Control is defined as
those manual transfers that initiate through any serial port (except for the RS-232 port on
the front panel) and any externally connected manual initiate command through inputs;
blocking inputs are still allowed.

Figure 3-5 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen

Local is defined as originating from the HMI of the MBTS or the RS-232 port COM1 on the
front panel. This setting prevents a transfer from being initiated remotely when personnel
are on-site "Locally" operating the MBTS. Remote communications is still possible and all
the status information can still be read, only manual transfer initiate control and settings
changes are blocked. When in Local control the state of this selection cannot be changed
remotely, this means someone cannot remotely change back to Remote Control. However,
the Remote/Local selection can always be changed locally, personnel on-site have priority. If
Remote Control is selected, then manual transfers can be initiated either remotely or locally.
This applies to manually initiated transfers. The Automatic Transfer can still be initiated by
internal undervoltage initiate, ISSLogic, 86P-S1 Initiate, 86P-S2 Initiate, 27-S1 or 27-S2
initiates. The Automatic Transfer operates independently from Remote/Local control.

Device ON/OFF
The Device ON/OFF button opens a dialog screen (Figure 3-6), that provides a selection
between "Device ON" and "Device OFF". If "Device OFF" is selected, then the MBTS is
placed in a lockout condition and no transfers can be executed either remotely, locally,
automatically or manually. Monitoring of all status conditions with ISScom is still possible,
either locally (HMI or COM1) or remotely in "Device OFF" state. The "Device ON" selection
allows normal operation.

Figure 3-6 Device On/Off Dialog Box

Shortcut Command Buttons

Shortcut commands for the most common operations are displayed in the top Toolbar
(Figure 3-7). These tools are also accessible using the Menu dropdowns.

Figure 3-7 Shortcut Commands Toolbar

3–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

File Menu

The File menu enables the user to create a new data file, open a previously created data
file, close, save, save as, print preview, print and printer setup. The ISScom program can
also be exited through the File menu.

File/New Command
When not connected to the MBTS, using the New command, a new file is established with
the System Type dialog screen (Figure 3-8). Selecting Save allows the new data file to be
named by using the Save or Save As... commands.

QQ NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unit and setpoint configuration values are
based on factory settings specified for the profiled MBTS.

Figure 3-8 New File System Type Dialog Screen

Command Buttons
OK Saves the currently displayed information.
Cancel Returns to the ISScom main screen; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

File/Save and Save As Command

The Save and Save As... commands allow saving a file or renaming a file, respectively.

File/Open Command
The open command allows opening a previously created data file. With an opened data file,
use the System... Setup... menu items to access the setpoint windows.
If communication can be established with a MBTS, it is always preferred to use the Read
Data From System command in the System menu to update the PC’s data file with the
MBTS data. This file now contains the proper system type information, eliminating the need
to set the information manually.

File/Print and Print Preview Command

The Print and Printer Preview commands allow user to select printer options and print out
setpoint data from the open data file or directly from the MBTS, if an MBTS is communicating
with the PC.

3–6
 ISScom – 3

File/Exit Command
The Exit command quits the ISScom program.

Opening Screen Connect Menu

The Connection dialog screens allow selection of the ISScom communication parameters
to coordinate with the MBTS.
Serial Port displays the Serial Port Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-9). When communicating
by way of a fiber optic loop network, echo cancelling is available by checking the Echo
Cancel box. This command masks the sender’s returned echo.
TCP/IP displays the TCP/IP Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-10) for Ethernet communication.
Modem displays the Modem Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-11), to establish contact with
remote locations. The Modem screen also includes a "Bring up terminal window after dialing"
option. When selected ISScom will open a terminal window to allow modem commands to
be sent to the target modem.
Select Connect from the applicable dialog screen. If the MBTS has a default communication
access code of 9999, a message window will be displayed showing Access Level #3 was
granted. Otherwise, another dialog screen will be displayed to prompt the user to enter the
access code in order to establish communication.

When connected, select Comm/Disconnect to discontinue communication.

Figure 3-9 ISScom Serial Communication Dialog Screen

3–7
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 3-10 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet Communication Dialog Screen

Figure 3-11 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen

System Menu

The System menu provides access to the screens used to set, monitor, or interrogate the
MBTS. Six submenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Transfer Event Log, Sequence of
Events Recorder, Oscillograph and Profile as well as two commands, Write File to
System, and Read Data From System.

3–8
 ISScom – 3

System/Setup
The Setup submenu includes the Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time selections.

System/Setup/Setup System
The Setup System selection displays the Setup System dialog screen (Figure 3-12) allowing
the user to input the pertinent information regarding the system on which the MBTS is applied
(see Section 4.2, System Setup, for detailed information regarding the specific elements
of the Setup System dialog screen).

QQ NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the
"operated" state established by an opening rather than a closing external
contact.

Command Buttons
Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information to file and returns to the ISScom
Main screen.
Cancel Returns to the ISScom Main screen; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

Figure 3-12 Setup System Dialog Screen

System/Setup/Setpoints
The Setpoints menu selection displays the M‑4272 System Setpoints dialog screen
(Figure 3-13) from which the individual Transfer Setting and Function Setting dialog screens
can be accessed. Selecting a Transfer Setting or Function Setting button will display the
corresponding function dialog screen (See Figure 3-14 as an example).

Command Buttons
Display All Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog screen for the specified range of functions.
Configure Opens the Configure dialog screen.
Close Exits the screen and returns to the ISScom main screen.

3–9
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Command Buttons
Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information and returns to the System Setpoints
screen or All Setpoints Table.
Cancel Returns to the System Setpoints screen or All Setpoints Table; any changes to the
displayed information are lost.

Feature and Function Selection Buttons

The individual Feature and Function selection buttons are described in the applicable
sections.

System/Setup/Setpoints/Display All
Selecting the Display All button displays the All Setpoints Table dialog screen (Figure 3-15).
This dialog screen contains the settings for each MBTS function within a single window to
allow scrolling through all MBTS setpoint and configuration values.
Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons
which allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual MBTS function
dialog screen and return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be
reviewed or changed when jumping to an MBTS configuration dialog screen from either
scrolling dialog screen.

Display all Jump Command buttons

This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that take the user to the corresponding
MBTS dialog screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any of these dialog screens
will return the user to the All Setpoints Table dialog screen.

System/Setup/Setpoints/Configure
Selecting the Configure button displays the Configure dialog screen (Figure 3-16), which
contains a chart of programmed input and output contacts, in order to allow scrolling through
all MBTS output and blocking input configurations.
Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons
which allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual MBTS function
dialog screen and return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be
reviewed or changed when jumping to a MBTS configuration dialog screen from either
scrolling dialog screen.

Configure Jump Command Buttons

This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that take the user to the corresponding
MBTS dialog screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any of these dialog screens
will return the user to the Configure dialog screen.

3–10
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-13 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen

Path: System / Setup / System Setpoints / ATS command button OR ATS jump hotspot within All Setpoints Table
Figure 3-14 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen

3–11
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Path: System menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen/ Display All button
Figure 3-15 Display All Setpoints Dialog Screen (Partial)

3–12
 ISScom – 3

Path: System / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen / Configure button

Figure 3-16 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial)

3–13
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Set Date/Time Command

The Set Date/Time command (Figure 3-17) allows the system date and time to be set
manually by entering the desired time and date or set to the displayed PC time. The system
clock can also be stopped or restarted. This dialog screen also displays an LED mimic to
identify when the Time Sync is in use (preventing the time from being changed by user).
The time field in the dialog box is not updated continuously. The time at which the dialog
box was opened is the time that is displayed and remains as such. This is true whether the
MBTS is synchronized with the IRIGB signal or not.
There is a green Time Sync LED mimic in this dialog box (the LED is displayed as different
shading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED is green, the MBTS is synchronized
with the IRIG-B signal and the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field can’t be
changed. But the Date field can be changed (by editing and selecting Save).
When the LED is grayed out, the MBTS is not time-synchronized and therefore, both the
Date and Time fields can be changed.

Path: System/ Setup / Set Date/Time

Figure 3-17 Date/Time Dialog Screen

Set Date and Time Command Buttons

Relay Clock When selected displays the current date and time at the instant that "Relay
Clock" is selected.
System Clock When selected initiates the writing of the PC time and date to the relay.
Start/Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, the MBTS clock. "Stop" pauses, "Start"
resumes.
Save Saves Time and Date settings to the MBTS when applicable.
Cancel Returns to the ISScom main window. Any changes to the displayed information
is lost.

System/Monitor
The Monitor submenu provides the user with access to the present status of the MBTS
measured and calculated values, other real-time parameters and conditions. The Monitor
submenu provides seven commands:
• Primary Metering
• Secondary Metering & Status
• System Status and I/O
• Phasor Diagram
• Sync Scope
• Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering)
• Single Line Diagram (Secondary Metering)

QQ NOTE: Displayed parameters in monitor/status screens will vary depending on unit

configuration.

3–14
 ISScom – 3

System/Monitor/Primary Metering
The Primary Metering screen (Figure 3-18) allows the user to review the Source 1 and
Source 2, Primary Voltage, Primary Current, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus Frequency, Positive
and Negative Sequence.

System/Monitor/Secondary Metering & Status

The Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure 3-19) allows the user to review the Source
1 and Source 2, Secondary Voltage, Secondary Current Bus Frequency and Bus Voltage.
The Secondary Metering section also displays Bus‑New Source information that includes
Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and the New Source identity (Source
1 or Source 2). The Secondary Metering and Status screen also includes the individual
sections for Function Status, Oscillograph Triggered Status, Transfer Event Log Stored
Status and Sequence of Event Stored Status.
The Voltages portion of the metering screen displays the Phase Voltages for the three voltage
inputs to the MBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence (VPS) and Bus Negative
Sequence (VNS) when three phase voltages are applied. S1V, S2V, and Bus V for the
selected single phase will be displayed. The currents portion of the Secondary Metering and
Status screen displays the single phase currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source
2 breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. The displayed
Frequency is the frequency of the bus. The Bus-New Source portion displays the difference
in phase angle, frequency and voltage across the open breaker between the Bus and the
New Source. The Source that is presently defined as the New Source is also displayed. The
remainder of the screen presents the Function and Oscillograph Trigger status.

Path: System / Monitor / Primary Metering

Figure 3-18 Primary Metering Screen

3–15
M‑4272 Instruction Book

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle OK, Delta Voltage OK or Delta
Frequency OK status indicators of the ISScom software to determine
when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the
communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these
indications do not provide "live" information. Always use the status
indicators of the MBTS front panel. These indicators use the manual
transfer settings to determine when a parameter is OK. If manual
transfer is disabled a warning message "Manual Transfer Blocked" will
be displayed and no transfer will occur.

The Function Status window displays the status of various functions, with "T" representing
the function which has timed out, and "P" representing the function which has picked up
and is timing.

Path: System / Monitor / Secondary Metering and Status

Figure 3-19 Secondary Metering and Status Screen

Figure 3-20 System Status and I/O Status Screen

3–16
 ISScom – 3

System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram
The Phasor Diagram (Figure 3-21) provides the user with the ability to evaluate a source
reference Phase Angle to Phase Angle data from other sources. The Phasor Diagram also
includes a menu that is accessed by executing a right mouse click which allows the user to
select/deselect sources to be displayed and Freeze capability to freeze the data displayed
on the Phasor Diagram.

System/Monitor/Sync Scope
The Sync Scope screen (Figure 3-22) provides the user with the ability to observe the Delta
Frequency relationship between the Bus and the New Source, illustrated in a Fast or Slow
direction based on Delta Frequency.

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle, Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or
Sync Scope Pointer of the ISScom Sync Scope screen to determine
when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the
communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these
indications do not provide "live" information.

System/Monitor/Single Line Diagram

The Single Line Diagram screen (Figure 3-23) is a mimic display that allows the user
to observe the Source 1 (S1) and Source 2 (S2)’s Secondary Voltage, Current and Bus
Secondary Voltage. All of these metering values can be selected to be primary or secondary
values.
The screen displays the Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to the M‑4272 MBT
System. The voltages of S1, S2 and Bus for the selected single phase will be displayed.
The screen displays the single phase currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source 2
breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. If the S1/S2 CT
Configuration is set to "No" (S1 & S2 CT not connected to the rear terminals) (Figure 4-20),
then the Single Line Diagram will not display current values.
The Single Line Diagram screen also displays Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency and
Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source (the new source is defined as
the source to which the bus is being transferred).
In addition the screen displays the status of Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. The CB-S1
and CB-S2 indicators display RED color when the Source 1 breaker (CB-S1) or Source 2
breaker is in the closed position. The CB-S1 and CB-S2 indicators display GREEN color
when the Source 1 breaker (CB-S1) or Source 2 breaker (CB-S2) is in the open position.
In the M‑4272 MBT System portion of the screen the 52-S1 In-Service and 52-S2 In-Service
indicators display GREEN color when the Source 1 or Source 2 breakers are in the service
position; the 52-S1 In‑Service and 52-S2 In-Service indicators will not be illuminated when
the Source 1 or Source 2 breakers are not in service or in test position. These indicators
will be set to In-Service when no inputs are selected for this function.
The M‑4272 MBT System portion of the screen also displays the Manual Transfer Ready
status, Lockout/Blocking status, the Remote/Local control status and the Device ON/
Device OFF status.
The Manual Transfer Ready indicator displays GREEN color when the Manual Fast Transfer
Ready or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is met.
The Manual Transfer Ready indicator is not illuminated when the Manual Fast Transfer
Ready or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is not met.
The Lockout/Blocking indicator displays RED color when the Lockout/Blocking condition
occurs. The Lockout/Blocking indicator is not illuminated when no Lockout/Blocking
condition occurs.
The Remote indicator displays GREEN color and Local indicator is not illuminated when
the Remote/Local control is selected to the Remote position.

3–17
M‑4272 Instruction Book

The Remote indicator is not illuminated and Local indicator displays GREEN color when
the Remote/Local control is selected to Local position.
The Device ON indicator displays GREEN color and Device OFF indicator is not illuminated
when the Device On/Off control is selected to Device On position.
The Device ON indicator is not illuminated and Device OFF indicator displays RED color
when the Device On/Off control is selected to Device Off position.

Path: System / Monitor / Phasor Diagram

Figure 3-21 Phasor Diagram

Path: System / Monitor / Sync Scope

Figure 3-22 Sync Scope Screen

3–18
 ISScom – 3

 NOTES:
1. If the S1/S2 CT Configuration is set to "No" (S1 & S2 not connected to the rear
terminals) (Figure 4-20), then the Single Line Diagram will not display current values.
2. The user may select either the primary or secondary values on the Single Line
Diagram.
Path: System / Monitor / Single Line Diagram

Figure 3-23 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary Metering) Screen

3–19
M‑4272 Instruction Book

System/Transfer Event Log

The Transfer Event Log feature captures the following parameters:
• Start signal. The signals that trigger a transfer are an external protective
relay initiate, external undervoltage relay initiate, internal automatic bus
undervoltage relay initiate, and manual initiate (either local, remote or
through serial communications).
• Source 1 voltage and current at time of trip (or close)
• Source 2 voltage and current at time of close (or trip)
• Bus voltage at time of close (or trip)
• Delta Voltage between bus and new source at time of close command (or
trip command)
• Delta Voltage between bus and new source at the time of actual breaker
close (or breaker open)
• Bus frequency, at time of close (or trip)
• Bus rate of change of frequency at time of close (or trip)
• Resultant Volts/Hertz at time of actual breaker close
• Element(s) Timed Out, for example: 27B, 81, 81R, 50BF, TCM and CCM
Functions
• Element(s) picked up, for example: 27B, 81, 81R, 50BF, TCM and CCM
Functions
• Input/output contact status changes
• Trip and close commands
• Delta phase angle between bus and new source at time of close command
(or trip command)
• Delta phase angle between bus and new source at time of actual breaker
close (or breaker open)
• Delta frequency between bus and new source at time of close command
(or trip command)
• Delta frequency between bus and new source at time of actual breaker
close (or breaker open)
• Breaker closing time (the time period from when the close command is
issued to when the new source’s breaker status contact closes
• Breaker Opening Time
• Open transition time (the time period from when the old source breaker
status contact opens to when the new source breaker status contact closes)
• Close transition time in Hot Parallel Transfer only (the time period from
when the new source breaker status contact closes to when the old source
breaker status contact opens)
• Transfer completed: Fast, In-Phase, Residual Voltage, Fixed Time or Hot
Parallel

A transfer can have up to four records. After 16 records have been stored, any new record
will cause the oldest existing record to be lost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is time
stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.
The initiating event that starts the Transfer Event Log is the "Start" signal for any transfer. A Transfer
Event Log is considered complete when one of following occurs:
• When the breaker from the Old Source trips and the breaker to the New
Source closes.
• When a breaker failure occurs.
• When the incomplete transfer timer times out.

3–20
 ISScom – 3

The trigger and complete events are used to define the time frame during which the transfer event
log is storing information. The Secondary Metering and Status Screen (Figure 3-19) will display
a status when a complete Transfer Event Log has been stored. A reset feature is provided
to clear this log through the serial communications. The Transfer Event Log is available for
viewing utilizing the S‑4200 ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software.
The Transfer Event Log menu selection opens a submenu that includes the Download,
View, Clear Status and Clear History selections.

System/Transfer Event Log/Download

To download available Transfer Event Logs perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/
Download. ISScom will display the Transfer Event Log Record Download screen
(Figure 3-24) and indicate the number of Transfer Events available for download.

Figure 3-24 Transfer Event Log Record Download Screen

2. Select Download. The Transfer Event Log Record Download screen will display
a bar indicating the status of the download. When the download is complete the
Save As screen will be displayed with a default ".log" file extension.
3. Select the destination folder and name the file, then select Save to save the Transfer
Event Log Record or Cancel.

System/Transfer Event Log/View

To view available Transfer Event Log Records perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/View.
ISScom will display the Transfer Event Log Viewer screen (Figure 3-25).

Figure 3-25 Transfer Event Log Viewer

3–21
M‑4272 Instruction Book

2. Select Open. ISScom will display the Open screen with a default ".log" file
extension.
3. Select the location of the ".log" files, then select the file to be viewed.
4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target file in the Transfer Event Log Viewer
Summary screen (Figure 3-26).

Figure 3-26 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen

5. Select Details. ISScom will expand the Transfer Event Log Viewer screen to
include the Details section (Figure 3-27) which includes additional Transfer Event
information.

Figure 3-27 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen

3–22
 ISScom – 3

6. To print the Transfer Event Log Summary information select Print Summary.
ISScom will print the Summary information to the default printer connected to the
computer. See Appendix D, Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.
7. To print the Transfer Event Log Detail information select Print Detail. ISScom will
print both the Summary and Detail information to the default printer connected to
the computer. See Appendix D, Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.
8. To view the System Status and Transfer Start Signal information select System
Status and Transfer Start Signal. ISScom will display the System Status and
Transfer Start Signal Status screen (Figure 3-28).
9. To view the Transfer Event Log Pickup Input and Output information, select Pickup
I/Os. ISScom will display the Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-29).

Figure 3-28 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen

3–23
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 3-29 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os Status Screen

System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status

The Clear Status feature resets the Transfer Event Log status.
To Clear the Transfer Event Log Status perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/Clear
Status. ISScom will display the Clear Transfer Event Log Status confirmation
screen (Figure 3-30).

Figure 3-30 Clear Transfer Event Log Status Command Confirmation Screen
2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Clear Transfer Event Log Status Cleared
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-31).

Figure 3-31 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared Confirmation Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4).

3–24
 ISScom – 3

System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History

The Clear History feature clears all Transfer Event Logs stored on the MBTS.
To Clear the Transfer Event Log perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/Clear
History. ISScom will display the Clear Transfer Event Log History confirmation
screen (Figure 3-32).

Figure 3-32 Transfer Event Log Clear History Command Confirmation Screen
2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Transfer Event Log Clear History
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-33).

Figure 3-33 Transfer Event Log History Cleared Confirmation Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4).

System/Sequence of Events Recorder

The Sequence of Events Recorder stores every change in the input status, trip commands,
close commands, any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change in any breaker
status, and status reset. Each of these Running Events are time stamped with the date and
time in 1 ms increments. The Running Event Log stores the last 512 events, when a new
event occurs the oldest event is removed. The Secondary Metering and Status Screen
(Figure 3-19) will display a status when a Sequence of Events recorded event has been
stored. A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications.
The events and the associated data are available for viewing utilizing the S‑4200 ISScom
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software.
The Sequence of Events Recorder submenu allows the user to Setup the events that
trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder, Download events from the MBTS, View the
parameters captured at the time of the event and Clear the event recorder.

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Setup

The Setup menu item displays the Sequence of Events Setup screen (Figure 3-34). See
Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.
Protective function Pickup, Time Out, Dropout and/or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are
selected to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder. Selecting Save transmits the Sequence
of Event settings to the MBTS. When not connected to the MBTS the Send selection saves
the Sequence of Event settings to the open file.

3–25
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Path: System / Sequence of Events Recorder / Setup

Figure 3-34 Sequence Of Events Setup

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Download

The Download selection downloads the events from the currently connected MBTS (events
must be retrieved from the MBTS and stored in a file in order to view them).
To download available Sequence of Events perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events
Recorder/Download. ISScom will display the Sequence of Events Recorder
Download screen (Figure 3-35) and indicate the number of Sequence of Events
Recorder Events available for download.

Figure 3-35 Sequence of Events Recorder Download Screen

2. Select Download, The Sequence of Events Recorder Download screen will display
a bar indicating the status of the download. When the download is complete the
Save As screen will be displayed with a default ".evt" file extension.
3. Select the destination folder and name the file, then select Save to save the
Sequence of Events Record or Cancel.

3–26
 ISScom – 3

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/View

The Sequence of Events viewer screen includes the commands Open, Close, Print
Summary, and Print Detail. Open opens a saved sequence of events file. Close closes
the print file. Print Summary prints an event summary, and Print Detail prints the detailed
event report. Clear deletes event history from the control.
To view available Sequence of Events Records perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events/View.
ISScom will display the Sequence of Events Viewer screen (Figure 3-36).

Figure 3-36 Sequence of Events Viewer

2. Select Open. ISScom will display the Open screen with a default ".evt" file
extension.
3. Select the location of the ".evt" files, then select the file to be viewed.
4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target file in the Sequence of Events Viewer
Summary screen (Figure 3-37).
5. Select Details. ISScom will expand the Sequence of Events Viewer screen to
include the Details section (Figure 3-38) which includes additional Sequence of
Events information.
6. To print the Sequence of Events Summary information select Print Summary.
ISScom will print the Summary information to the default printer connected to the
computer. See Appendix E, Sequence of Events Printout Sample.

3–27
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 3-37 Sequence of Events Summary Screen

Figure 3-38 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen

7. To print the Sequence of Events Detail information select Print Detail. ISScom will
print both the Summary and Detail information to the default printer connected to
the computer. See Appendix E, Sequence of Events Printout Sample.
8. To view the Sequence of Events Pickup Input and Output information select Pickup
I/Os. ISScom will display the Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-39).

3–28
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-39 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os Status Screen

9. To view the Sequence of Events Dropout Input and Output information select
Dropout I/Os. ISScom will display the Dropout I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-40).

Figure 3-40 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os Status Screen

10. To view the System Status and Transfer Start Signal information select System
Status and Transfer Start Signal. ISScom will display the System Status and
Transfer Start Signal Status screen (Figure 3-43).

System/Sequence of Events/Clear
The Clear feature clears all Sequence of Events Records stored on the MBTS.
To Clear all Sequence of Events Records perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events/Clear.
ISScom will display the Clear Sequence of Events Records confirmation screen
(Figure 3-41).

Figure 3-41 Clear Sequence of Events Record Command Confirmation Screen

3–29
M‑4272 Instruction Book

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Sequence of Events Records Cleared
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-42).

Figure 3-42 Sequence of Events Record Cleared Confirmation Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-43 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen

3–30
 ISScom – 3

System/Oscillograph
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored
waveforms, and status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is
user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The number of samples per cycle used to store
the data is user selectable. The number of samples per cycle that can be selected is 16 or
32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples selected effects the length of the data that can
be saved and its resolution. The lower the number of samples, the longer the record length
that can be stored (but at a lower resolution).
The oscillographic recorder is triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a MBTS
initiate input), a trip output, from serial communications, or a change in the breaker position.
If a 52a breaker status contact input has been selected and it is going to be used to trigger
the oscillograph, the Trigger Dropout Input section of the Oscillograph Setup must be used.
Since the 52a contact is closed when the breaker is closed and opens when the breaker is
tripped, the oscillograph trigger must be activated when the 52a contact opens or "drops out".
When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most
recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues
to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be
analyzed using ISScom, and are also available in COMTRADE file format.
The following parameters are captured by the Oscillographic Recorder:
• MBTS start (initiate) signal. It can be manual transfer initiate, protective
relay initiate, or bus phase undervoltage initiate.
• Source 1 and Source 2 breaker status (Closed or Open)
• Trip and close commands to the Source 1 breaker
• Trip and close commands to the Source 2 breaker
• Source 1 voltage waveforms, single-phase or three-phase
• Source 2 voltage waveforms, single-phase or three-phase
• Source 1 current waveforms, single-phase if available
• Source 2 current waveforms, single-phase if available
• Bus voltage waveforms, single-phase or three-phase
• Delta Phase Angle
• Delta frequency
• Inputs 1–18
• Outputs 1–16
• TCM1, CCM1, TCM2 and CCM2

Path: System / Oscillograph / Setup

Figure 3-44 Setup Oscillograph Recorder

3–31
M‑4272 Instruction Book

The Oscillograph submenu includes the Setup, Retrieve, Trigger and Clear selections.
The Oscillograph recorder settings are not considered to be part of the Setpoint Profile.
Recorder settings are common to all profiles.

System/Oscillograph/Setup
The Setup selection displays the Oscillograph Setup screen (Figure 3-44) which allows the
user to set the number of records and triggering designations to be made. See Section 4.1,
Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

System/Oscillograph/Retrieve
The Retrieve feature allows the user select the Oscillograph records to be retrieved
(downloaded) and to determine the save location on the PC.
To Retrieve Oscillograph recorders perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Retrieve.
ISScom will display the Retrieve Oscillograph Records screen (Figure 3-45).
2. Select the Oscillograph record to be Retrieved (downloaded).
3. Select the destination folder (Browse) and name the file, then select Save, the path
for the file will be displayed in the "File Name Destination" window.
4. Select Retrieve, The screen will display a bar indicating the status of the Retrieval.
When the download is complete ISScom will display a Oscillograph Record Retrieval
complete message.

Path: System / Oscillograph / Retrieve

Figure 3-45 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen

System/Oscillograph/Trigger
The Trigger selection allows the user to manually trigger the Oscillograph. This can be
confirmed by observing the Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure 3-19).
To manually Trigger the Oscillograph Recorder perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Trigger.
ISScom will display the Oscillograph Manual Trigger confirmation screen
(Figure 3-46).

3–32
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-46 Oscillograph Manual Trigger Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Oscillograph Triggered Successfully
Confirmation Screen (Figure 3-47).

Figure 3-47 Oscillograph Triggered Successfully Confirmation Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4)

System/Oscillograph/Clear
The Clear feature clears all Oscillograph Records stored on the MBTS.
To Clear all Oscillograph Recorder records perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Clear. ISScom
will display the Clear Oscillograph Record confirmation screen (Figure 3-48).

Figure 3-48 Clear Oscillograph Records Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Oscillograph Records Cleared
Successfully Screen (Figure 3-49)

Figure 3-49 Oscillograph Records Cleared Successfully Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4)

3–33
M‑4272 Instruction Book

System/Profile
The system supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows multiple setpoint profiles
to be defined for the type of transfer initiated (Automatic, Manual or Hot Parallel) and the
direction of the next transfer. The Profile submenu provides three selections: Switching
Method, Active Profile, and Copy Profile.

System/Profile/Switching Method
▲▲ CAUTION: During Profile Switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately
1 second.

The Profile Switching Method feature (Figure 3-50) allows the user to select either Manual
or Input contact. When the Switching Profile Method is set to Manual, ISScom, remote
communications or one of the ISSlogic elements will select the Active Profile.
When the Switching Method is set to Input Contact, the profile is selected by the input
contacts IN17 and IN18. When Input Contact is selected, only the input contacts can switch
the system’s profile, and none of the Manual methods will switch the profile. See Table 4-3
for input contact profile switching logic.

Figure 3-50 Profile Switching Method Dialog Screen

System/Profile/Active Profile
Active Profile (Figure 3-51) allows user to designate active profile. The user can select
between four profiles. If a profile is not saved into a profile the profile will contain factory
default settings.

▲▲ CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the MBTS is on-line may cause
unexpected operation if the wrong profile is selected.

▲▲ CAUTION: During Profile Switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately

1 second.

Figure 3-51 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen

System/Profile/Copy Profile
The Copy Profile (Figure 3-52) feature copies the active profile to one of four profiles (user
should allow approximately 2 minutes for copying.)

3–34
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-52 Copy Profile Dialog Screen

System/Write File To System

The Write File To System command is used to write a saved data file to the MBTS.
1. From the ISScom Main Screen select System/Write File To System. ISScom will
display an OPEN dialog screen with the default file extension of ".dat".
2. Browse to the location of the file to be written to the MBTS, then select the target file.
3. Select OPEN, ISScom will write the file contents to the target MBTS. When the
file has been successfully written to the MBTS ISScom will display a File Written
Confirmation (Figure 3-53)
4. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-53 ISScom File Written to MBTS Confirmation

System/Read Data From System

The Read Data From System command is used to read the data contained in the MBTS
settings and configuration to the ISScom program running on the PC.
To perform a Read Data From System command proceed as follows:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen select System/Read Data From System. ISScom
will display a Save As dialog screen (Figure 3-54). Select the desired location for
the setting file and select Save. ISScom will read the data from the target MBTS
and when complete display a confirmation screen (Figure 3-55).

Figure 3-54 Read Data From System Save As Dialog Screen

3–35
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 3-55 ISScom Data Reading Successful Confirmation Screen

2. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-4).

Tools Menu

The Tools menu provides the user with access to ISScom MBTS support features and
Functions.

Tools/System Access Codes

The System Access Codes menu item includes the Comm Access and User Access
code submenus.

Tools/System Access Codes/Comm Access

The Comm Access selection displays the Communication Access Code Reset screen
(Figure 3-56) which allows the user to reset the MBTS Comm Access Code. See Section 4.1,
Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.
If additional communication link security is desired, a communication access code can be
programmed. Like the user access codes, if the communication access code is set to 9999
(default), communication security is disabled.

Figure 3-56 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen

3–36
 ISScom – 3

Tools/System Access Codes/User Access

The User Access selection displays the User Access Codes Reset screen (Figure 3-57)
which allows the user to reset the MBTS User Access Codes. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup
for detailed setup instructions.
The MBTS includes three levels of access codes. Depending on their assigned code, users
have varying levels of access to the installed functions.
1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints, monitor status, view status history.
2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1 privileges, plus read & change setpoints, target
history, set time clock.
3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges, plus access to all configuration functions
and settings.

Each access code is a user‑defined one- to four-digit number. Access codes can only be
altered by a level 3 user.
If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access code feature is disabled. When access
codes are disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all users have full access to all the
MBTS menus. The device is shipped from the factory with the access code feature disabled.

Figure 3-57 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen

Tools/Miscellaneous Setup
The Miscellaneous Setup menu selection displays the Miscellaneous Setup screen
(Figure 3-58) which provides the user with the ability to edit/input the User Logo lines of the
HMI display, enter/edit the User Control Number and set the operating mode of the System
OK LED. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

User Logo Line

The user logo is a programmable, two-line by 24‑character string, which can be used to
identify the MBTS, and which is displayed locally during power up after Self Test completion.
This information is also available in ISScom.

User Control Number

The User Control Number is a user-defined value which can be used for inventory or
identification. The unit does not use this value, but it can be accessed through the HMI or
the communications interface, and can be read remotely.

3–37
M‑4272 Instruction Book

System OK LED
The green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the unit’s microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM
OK LED indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also be programmed to be
continuously illuminated.

Figure 3-58 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen

Tools/System Outputs Test

The System Outputs Test menu selection displays the System Outputs Test screen
(Figure 3-59) which provides the user with the ability to test each output relay. See Section 6,
Testing for detailed testing instructions.

Figure 3-59 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen

3–38
 ISScom – 3

Tools/System Comm Setup

The System Comm Setup menu selection displays the System Communication Setup
screen (Figure 3-60) which provides the user with the ability to set the System’s COM
Port communication parameters. Also, when selected ISScom will display a message
identifying which COM Port is currently being used. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed
communication setup instructions.

Figure 3-60 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen

Tools/System Ethernet Setup

The System Ethernet Setup menu selection displays the Ethernet Setup screen (Figure 3-61)
which provides the user with the ability to set the System’s Ethernet Port communication
parameters. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed communication setup instructions.

Figure 3-61 Ethernet Setup Screen

3–39
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Tools/System Firmware Update

The System Firmware Update selection allows the user to update MBTS firmware version
in the field.
Detailed step by step instructions will be provided by Beckwith Electric regarding Field Firmware
Updates.

Tools/Calibrate Unit
The Calibrate Unit menu selection provides the user with instructions to recalibrate Nominal
Voltage, Current and Frequency. See Chapter 6, Testing for detailed MBTS calibration
instructions.

Tools/System Error Codes / Counters

The System Error Codes / Counters menu selection displays the System Error Codes / Output
Counters screen (Figure 3-62) which provides the user with the ability to view and clear
system Error Codes, Processor Resets, Alarm Counters, Power Loss Counter and Output
Counters. Also, Checksums can be viewed for Calibration and Setpoints. See Section 2.2,
Manual Operation for detailed instructions.

Figure 3-62 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen

3–40
 ISScom – 3

Help Menu

The Help menu provides two commands. The Contents command initiates a link to a
PDF (Portable Document File) version of this instruction book for easy reference. Adobe
Acrobat reader is required to view this document. The M‑4272 Instruction Book has been
Bookmarked. By selecting the "Navigator pane’ in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can
directly access selected topics.
The About ISScom command displays ISScom version and development information
(Figure 3-63). Also, this screen displays unit information.

Figure 3-63 About ISScom Dialog Box

3–41
M‑4272 Instruction Book

3.2 ISSplot

ISSplot allows the user to plot and print waveform data downloaded from a Beckwith Electric
MBTS. The ISSplot feature is also capable of plotting and printing waveform data files that
are in COMTRADE format.
When the ISSplot menu item is selected, ISSplot is launched in an independent Windows
Window. The ISSplot Main Screen and menu bar is displayed (Figure 3-64). The ISSplot
Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts are illustrated in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-64 ISSplot Main Screen

3–42
 ISScom – 3

Figure 3-65 ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts

3–43
M‑4272 Instruction Book

ISSplot File Menu

The ISSplot File menu allows the user to open an oscillograph file previously downloaded
by ISScom. ISScom supports COMTRADE format data files (file extension *.cfg). The File
menu also permits the user to preview and print selected oscillographs. Exit closes the
ISSplot program.

ISSplot View Menu

The View menu allows the user to select Toolbar and Status Bar for display.

ISSplot Settings Menu

The Settings menu allows the selection of the new source (1 or 2) for Delta Angle, waveforms
to be displayed, the formatting of display colors, and the ability to change the waveform
scaling.

ISSplot Select New Source for Delta Angle

Allows the user to select Source 1 or Source 2.

3–44
 ISScom – 3

ISSplot Select Waveforms

Allows the selection of voltages, currents, inputs, and outputs to be plotted or printed.

Figure 3-66 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen

ISSplot Change Colors

Allows the user to change waveform colors for customized plotting.

Figure 3-67 Change Colors Dialog Screen

3–45
M‑4272 Instruction Book

QQ NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow on
a bar and dragging the mouse. Double click the left key to position one cursor
bar and Shift‑Double Click or left mouse down and click the right key to position
the other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.

Figure 3-68 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data

ISSplot Change Scale

Allows the individual designation of a magnitude scale for voltage and current traces.

ISSplot Default
Sets all similar waveforms to the same scale (largest).

3–46
 ISScom – 3

ISSplot Auto All

Allows ISSplot to set the scale for each individual waveform.

Figure 3-69 Change Scale Dialog Screen

ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu

The Window menu enables the positioning and arrangement of multiple ISSplot windows at
the same time. Selecting any displayed window activates that frame, allowing manipulation
of the data.

The Help menu provides information about ISSplot menus and commands. The About
command provides version information for ISSplot.
ISSplot makes use of shortcut key commands for many functions, making ISSplot as easy
as clicking your mouse and touching a few keys.

3–47
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Key Strokes Action

Left‑Mouse button down and drag, or select zoom in
Magnify the selected area in main display
icon on toolbar menu

Left‑mouse double click Move Marker #1 to current position in main display

Shift + Left‑mouse double‑click or left‑mouse down and

Move Marker #2 to current position in main display
right‑mouse click

Align cursor on Marker #1 and drag Drag Marker #1 in main display

Align cursor on Marker #2 and drag Drag Marker #2 in main display

Current and voltage selection menu in main display

Right‑mouse down
Voltage and Current in the Phase diagram

Left key or select left scroll icon in toolbar menu Move left in main display

Right key or select right scroll icon in toolbar menu Move right in main display

Home key or select move to beginning icon in toolbar

Move to the beginning of the record in the main display
menu

End key or select move to end icon in toolbar menu Move to the end of the record in the main display

Table 3-1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys

Figure 3-70 ISSplot Toolbar

3–48
 ISScom – 3

Delta value between

Marker #1 and
Marker #2.
MARKER #2
MARKER #1

Value at Marker #1

Value at Marker #2

All analog traces. This view

shows peak values. RMS values
may also be displayed.

Scaling for each analog trace.

This can be set automatically or
manually adjusted.

Time at
Marker #1

Time at
Marker #2

Time difference between Markers

Time at Marker #1
Control status input
and contact output Date and Timestamp Time of Trip
traces (discrete I/O) Time at Marker #2
for record Command

QQ NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow
on a bar and dragging the mouse. Double click the left key to position one
cursor bar and Shift-Double Click or double click the right key to position the
other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.

Figure 3-71 ISSplot Screen with Callouts

3–49
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

3–50
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

4 System Setup and Setpoints

4.1 Unit Setup........................................................................................ 4–1

4.2 System Setup................................................................................. 4–28

4.3 System Diagrams........................................................................... 4–34

4.4 System Setpoints........................................................................... 4–41

Chapter four is designed for the person or group responsible for the Unit Setup, System
Setup and System Setpoints of the M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS).
Chapter 4 consists of:
• Functional and connection diagrams for a typical application of the MBTS.
• The Unit Setup Section, which consists of general unit setup information,
Communications setup, Oscillograph setup and Transfer Event Log setup.
• The System Setup Section provides the definitions of system quantities
and equipment characteristics required by the MBTS which include CT, VT
configuration selection and Input and Output assignments.
• A System Setpoints Section which describes the unit transfer settings,
enabling functions and setpoints, output contact assignments and digital
input assignments.

The selection of the MBTS System Setup parameters and Setpoints is performed using
ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software. However, some setup
information can also be entered from the unit’s M‑3931 Front Panel Human Machine Interface
(HMI), and will be included where applicable.

4.1 Unit Setup

QQ NOTE: Setup Record Forms are contained in Appendix A. The Setup Record Form
tables list the MBTS parameter settings choices for each feature and function.

General Unit Setup

The General Unit setup consists of the setup of the following features and functions:
• Comm Access Code • User Control Number
• User Access Codes • OK LED Flash
• User Logo Lines • Time and Date

4–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

COMM ACCESS CODE

If additional communication link security is desired, a communication access code can be
programmed. Like the user access codes, if the communication access code is set to 9999
(default), communication security is disabled.

Comm Access Code Setup from ISScom

To set the MBTS Comm Access Code perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/System Access Code/Comm
Access. ISScom will display the Communication Access Code Reset dialog
screen(Figure 4-1).

Figure 4-1 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen

2. Enter the desired New Communication Access Code (1-9999), then re-enter
(confirmation) the New Access Code.
3. Select Save, ISScom will display the Access Code Changed Successfully
Confirmation Screen (Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2 Communication Access Code Changed Successfully Confirmation Screen

4. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.
The new Communication Access Code will not be in effect until communications
have been closed with the MBTS for approximately 2.5 minutes.

4–2
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Comm Access Code Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

COMMUNICATION
stat COMM setup
5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr
6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

COMM ACCESS CODE

ACCSS eth eth_ip
7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COMM ACCESS CODE

9999
8. Input the desired Comm Access Code as follows:
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Comm Access Code digits.
c. When the desired Comm Access Code has been input, then press ENTER.
The following will be displayed:

COMM ACCESS CODE

ACCSS eth eth_ip
9. Press EXIT.

4–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

USER ACCESS CODES

The MBTS includes three levels of access codes. Depending on their assigned code, users
have varying levels of access to the installed functions.
1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints, monitor status, view status history.
2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1 privileges, plus read & change setpoints, target
history, set time clock.
3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges, plus access to all configuration functions
and settings.

Each access code is a user‑defined one- to four-digit number. Access codes can only be
altered by a level 3 user.
If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access code feature is disabled. When access
codes are disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all users have full access to all the
MBTS menus. The device is shipped from the factory with the access code feature disabled.

User Access Codes Setup from ISScom

To set the MBTS User Access Codes perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/System Access Code/
User Access. ISScom will display the User Access Code Reset dialog screen
(Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-3 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen

2. Enter the desired New User Access Code (1-9999), then re-enter (confirmation)
the New User Access Code.
3. Select Save, ISScom will display a New User Access Code Sent Confirmation
Screen (Figure 4-4).

Figure 4-4 New User Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen

4. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.

User Access Codes Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

4–4
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

5. If User Access Codes are to be set, then use the RIGHT arrow pushbutton to select
ALTER ACCESS CODES. The following will be displayed:

ALTER ACCESS CODES

vers sn ACCESS number

6. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

ALTER ACCESS CODES

vers sn ACCESS number

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

LEVEL #1
9999

8. Input the desired User Access Code as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Access Code.
c. When the desired Access Code has been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:

ALTER ACCESS CODES

vers sn ACCESS number

9. To set User Access Code Level #2 press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton to select
LEVEL #2, then press ENTER the following will be displayed:

LEVEL #2
9999
10. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level #2 User Access Code.

4–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

11. To set User Access Code Level #3 press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton to select
LEVEL #3, then press ENTER the following will be displayed:

LEVEL #3
9999
12. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level #3 User Access Code.

13. Press the EXIT pushbutton will return to the previous selection screen:

ALTER ACCESS CODES

vers sn ACCESS number

User Logo Line

The user logo is a programmable, two-line by 24‑character string, which can be used to
identify the MBTS, and which is displayed locally when the unit is idle. This information is
also available in ISScom.

User Control Number

This is a user-defined value which can be used for inventory or identification. The unit does
not use this value, but it can be accessed through the HMI or the communications interface,
and can be read remotely.

System OK LED
The green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the unit’s microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM
OK LED indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also be programmed to be
continuously illuminated.

User Logo Line, User Control Number and System OK LED Setup from ISScom
To set the MBTS User Logo Line, User Control Number and System OK LED perform the
following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/Miscellaneous Setup. ISScom
will display the Miscellaneous Setup dialog screen (Figure 4-5).

Figure 4-5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen

2. If entering/editing the User Logo lines, then enter the desired User Logo Lines.
3. If changing the User Control Number, then enter the desired User Control Number.
4. If enabling/disabling the System OK LED Flash operation, then select either
Enable of Disable.
5. Select Save, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.

4–6
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

User Logo Line Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
vers sn access number

6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 1

LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 1

_BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

8. Input the desired User Logo Line 1 as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first letter/
symbol/digit/blank space.
b. Press the Right arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired User Logo Line 1.
c. When the desired User Logo Line 1 has been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 1

—WAIT—

USER LOGO LINE 1

LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm

4–7
M‑4272 Instruction Book

9. To enter a User Logo Line 2 press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton once, the following
will be displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 2

logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm

10. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 2

_ M‑4272

11. Input the desired User Logo Line 2 as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first letter/
symbol/digit/blank space.
b. Press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired User Logo Line 2.
c. When the desired User Logo Line 2 has been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:

USER LOGO LINE 2

—WAIT—

USER LOGO LINE 2

logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm
12. Press EXIT.

User Control Number Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

4–8
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
vers sn access number

6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

USER CONTROL NUMBER

vers sn access number

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

USER CONTROL NUMBER

1

8. Input the desired User Control Number as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired User Control Number.
c. When the desired User Control Number has been input, then press ENTER.
The following will be displayed:

USER CONTROL NUMBER

vers sn access NUMBER
9. Press Exit.

System OK LED Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in

service. Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in
service removes all protective functions of the MBTS.

4–9
M‑4272 Instruction Book

4. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
 stat comm SETUP 

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
VERS sn access number 

6. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

DIAGNOSTIC MODE
 time error eth DIAG

7. Press ENTER, the following warning will be displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!

ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in

service. Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in
service removes all protective functions of the MBTS.

8. Press ENTER, the relay will reset and DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
displayed followed by:

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)

OUTPUT input led module 

9. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

com3 clock LED cal 

10. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

off ON

11. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons select either ON or OFF.

12. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

–DONE–

13. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

com3 clock LED cal 

14. Press EXIT, the following will be displayed:

PRESS EXIT TO
EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE

15. Press EXIT, the unit will cycle through the Power Self Tests.

4–10
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

SYSTEM CLOCK
This feature allows the user to set the MBTS internal clock. The clock is used to time stamp
system events such as transfers and oscillograph operations.
The clock is disabled when shipped from the factory (indicated by "80" seconds appearing
on the clock) to preserve battery life. If the MBTS is to be unpowered for an extended length
of time, the clock should be stopped (from Diagnostic Mode or ISScom Figure 4-6). If the
IRIG‑B interface is used, the hours, minutes, and seconds information in the clock will be
synchronized with IRIG‑B time information every hour.
The MBTS can accept a modulated IRIG‑B signal using the rear panel BNC connector, or
a demodulated TTL level signal using extra pins on the rear panel COM2 RS‑232 interface
connector (see Figure B-4 for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signal is to be used, then Jumper 5
will be required to be positioned (see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).

Set Date/Time from ISScom

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Setup/Set Date/Time.

ISScom will display the Set Date/Time dialog screen (Figure 4-6).

Figure 4-6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen

2. If setting the Date and Time to the connected PC Date and Time then:
a. Select System Clock. ISScom will display a "write values to unit?" confirmation
screen.
b. Select Yes. The Time and Date will be set to the PC Time and Date. ISScom
will then return to the main screen.

3. If setting the Date and Time manually then:

a. Select Relay Clock.
b. Enter the desired Date and Time.
c. Select Save. ISScom will display a "write values to unit?" confirmation screen.
d. Select Yes. The Time and Date will be set to the desired Time and Date.
ISScom will then return to the main screen.

SET DATE and TIME from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

4–11
M‑4272 Instruction Book

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP

5. Press ENTER, then press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton until the following is
displayed:

DATE & TIME

 TIME error eth diag

6. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

08-Jan-2001 00:00:80

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

01 Year

8. Input the desired Year as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Year.
c. When the desired Year has been input, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

Jan feb mar apr may 

9. Input the desired Month as follows:

a. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons select the desired Month.
b. When the desired Month has been selected, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

01 Date

10. Input the desired Date as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired Date first
digit.

4–12
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired date.
c. When the desired Date has been input, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

SUN mon tue wed thu 

11. Input the desired Day as follows:

a. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons select the desired Day.
b. When the desired Day has been selected, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

01 Hour

12. Input the desired Hour as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Hour.
c. When the desired Hour has been input, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

13 Minutes

13. Input the desired Minutes as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Minute(s).
c. When the desired Minutes have been input, then press ENTER. The following
will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

16 Seconds

14. Input the desired Seconds as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Seconds.
c. When the desired Seconds have been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:

DATE & TIME

 TIME error eth diag

4–13
M‑4272 Instruction Book

COMMUNICATION SETUP
Communication setup can be accomplished utilizing either ISScom or the HMI. The
Communication setup consists of the setup of the following features and functions:
• COM Port definitions and Device Address
• Ethernet Port Settings
• Installing Modems

Serial Ports (RS-232)

QQ NOTE: COM1 and COM2 can be disabled for security purposes from the
communications HMI menu. A Level 2 Access Code is required.

Two serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, are standard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured
ports. The front-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally set and interrogate the MBTS using
a temporary connection to a PC or laptop computer. The second RS-232 port, COM2, is
provided at the rear of the unit. COM2 is unavailable for communications when the optional
ethernet port is enabled. However, the Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the
COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled.

Serial Port (RS-485)

QQ NOTE: COM3 can be disabled for security purposes from the communications HMI
menu. A Level 2 Access Code is required.

COM3 located on the rear terminal block of the M‑4272 is an RS-485, 2-wire connection.
Appendix B, Figure B-3 illustrates a 2-wire RS-485 network.
Individual remote addressing also allows for communications through a serial multidrop
network. Up to 32 MBTSs can be connected using the same 2 wire RS-485 communications
line.

Direct Connection
In order for ISScom to communicate with the relay using direct serial connection, a serial "null
modem" cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for the system, and an applicable
connector for the computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a null modem adapter
are provided in Appendix B, Communications.
An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423) is available from the factory, for direct
connection between a PC and the relay’s front panel COM port, or the rear COM2 port.

Figure 4-7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen

4–14
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

When fabricating communication cables, every effort should be made to keep cabling as
short as possible. Low capacitance cable is recommended. The RS‑232 standard specifies
a maximum cable length of 50 feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cable length
is required, other technologies should be investigated.
Other communication topologies are possible using the M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus
Transfer System. An Application Note, "Serial Communication with Beckwith Electric’s
Integrated Protection System Relays" is available from the factory or from our website at
www.beckwithelectric.com.

Device Address
Individual MBTS Device Addresses should be between 1 and 255. The default Device Address
is 1.

Figure 4-8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter

COM Port Definitions and System’s Communication Address from ISScom

To setup the COM Ports and Communication Addresses perform the following:

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/System Comm Setup. ISScom
will display the System Communication Setup dialog screen (Figure 4-7).
The System COM Port that is in use will be indicated at the top of the display.
2. Select the desired COM Port to be setup (1, 2 or 3).
3. Enter the desired "Dead Sync Time" (2 to 300 msec).

4–15
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This delay establishes the line idle time to re-sync packet communication. Dead sync
time should be programmed based on the channel’s baud rate.

Baud Rate Dead-Sync Time

9600 4 ms
4800 8 ms
2400 16 ms
1200 32 ms
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time
4. Enter the desired "Baud Rate" (1200 to 9600). COM2 and COM3 share the same
baud rate (see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).
5. Enter the desired "Stop Bits" value (1 or 2).
6. Enter the desired "Parity" (None, odd or even).
7. Enter the desired "System’s Communication Address" (1 to 255).
The individual addressing capability of ISScom and the MBTS allows multiple
systems to share a direct or modem connection when connected through COM2
using a communications-line splitter (Figure 4-8). One such device enables 2 to 6
units to share one communications line. Appendix B, Figure B-2 illustrates a setup
of RS-232 Fiber Optic network.
8. When the COM Port settings have been entered, then select Save. ISScom will
display the COM Port Save to Device Confirmation Screen (Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9 COM Port Save to Device Confirmation Screen

9. Select Yes, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.

COM Port Enable/Disable, Definitions and Device Address from the HMI
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

4–16
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

Communication
stat COMM setup

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr

6. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

PORT ACCESS
enable DISABLE
7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbutton as necessary to enable or disable the
COM port.

8. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 BAUD RATE

baud_4800 BAUD_9600
9. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to select the desired baud
rate.

10. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME

50 ms

11. Input the desired Dead Sync Time as follows:

a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired first digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once, then repeat the previous step as
necessary to input the desired Dead Sync Time.
c. When the desired Dead Sync Time has been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:

COM1 PARITY
NONE odd even

12. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to select the desired Parity
setting.

13. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 STOP BITS

1

14. Utilizing the Up or Down arrow pushbuttons select the desired Stop Bits.

4–17
M‑4272 Instruction Book

15. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr
16. Selecting COM2 or COM 3 will activate the same menu choices as displayed with
the selection of COM1. Repeat as necessary to setup the remaining COM Ports.

Ethernet Communication Settings

The optional RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled utilizing either ISScom from the Ethernet
Settings menu or from the HMI Communication menu. When the ethernet port is enabled the
COM2 Serial Port is not available for communications. However, the Demodulated IRIG-B
may still be used through the COM2 Port when ethernet is enabled.
The following parameters must be set for proper ethernet communication:

DHCP Protocol
ENABLE: If the network server supports the DHCP protocol the network server will assign
the IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway Address.
DISABLE: If the network server does not support the DHCP protocol or the user chooses
to manually input ethernet settings, then obtain the IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway
address from the Network Administrator and enter the settings.

Ethernet Protocols
The Standard Port Number for the MODBUS over TCP/IP protocol is 502. The master device
may require the entry of the Standard Port Number.

IEC 61850 – The Ethernet option with IEC 61850 protocol has the capability of 4 concurrent
sessions of IEC 61850 communication. When Ethernet is purchased with IEC 61850 protocol,
no other protocol may be selected. The services provided by the IEC 61850 protocol include:
• DynAssociation – dynamic building of data association
• GetDirectory – service to read the contents of a server
• GetDataObjectDefinition – service to retrieve data definitions
• DataObjectDirectory – service to get data defined in a logical node
• GetDataSetValue – service to retrieve all data values of a data set
• SetDataSetValue – service to write data
• DataSetDirectory – service to write data information of the members of
a data set
• ReadWrite – basic Read and Write to get data, set data and operate
• ConfReportControl – report configuration
• GetCBValues – read values of a control block

These services allow a user to monitor all metering values, change settings and also generate
unsolicited reports. The metering values are reported in the metering and measurement
nodes data classes (MMTR, MMXU), the setpoints and configuration settings are viewed
and modified in the protection function nodes and system logical nodes data classes (PTOV,
PTUV, etc.). These data classes are defined by the 61850-7-4 document. Furthermore, the
M‑4272 is compatible with the IEC 61850 substation configuration language (SCL), making
the data set for the report control block highly configurable. In addition to the generation of
reports due to a change in a data value, e.g., a change in pickup status of a protective function,
the M‑4272 also supports an integrity period, where a report control block is transmitted to
the connected SCADA system at the expiration of the integrity period.

4–18
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP from ISScom

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/System Ethernet Setup.
ISScom will display the Ethernet Setup screen (Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-10 Ethernet Setup Screen

2. Select Ethernet Enable.
3. Select DHCP Protocol Enable.
4. Select Save. The ethernet board is now configured for use and may be accessed
through a network.

Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP from ISScom

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select Tools/System Ethernet Setup.
ISScom will display the Ethernet Setup screen (Figure 4-10).
2. Select Ethernet Enable.
3. Select DHCP Protocol Disable.
4. Enter values for IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway.
5. Select Save. The ethernet board is now configured for use and may be accessed
through a network.

Ethernet Port Setup from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

4–19
M‑4272 Instruction Book

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

COMMUNICATION
stat COMM setup

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr 

6. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select ETH (Upper Case).

ETHERNET SETUP
 access ETH eth_ip

7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

ETHERNET
DISABLE enable

8. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select ENABLE (Upper Case), then press
ENTER, the following will be displayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGS
TCP_SETTINGS

9. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

DHCP PROTOCOL
DISABLE enable

10. If the network does not support the DHCP protocol, then go to Manual Configuration
of Ethernet Board (following page) to manually configure the ethernet board.

11. If the DHCP Protocol is to be enabled, then use the Right/Left arrow pushbutton to
select ENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGS
TCP_SETTINGS

12. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will reconfigure and the following will be displayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board successfully obtains an IP Address the following will be displayed
for approximately 2 seconds:

ETHERNET IP ADDRESS
xx.xx.xx.xx
The ethernet board is now configured for use and may be accessed through a
network. The display will return to the following:

ETHERNET SETUP
 access ETH eth_ip

4–20
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IP Address within 15 seconds the following
will be displayed (for approximately 2 seconds):

CONFIGURING ETH...
ETH BOARD ERROR
Contact the Network Administrator to determine the cause of the configuration failure.

Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board from the HMI

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

COMMUNICATION
stat COMM setup

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr 

6. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select ETH (Upper Case).

ETHERNET SETUP
 access ETH eth_ip
7. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

ETHERNET
DISABLE enable

8. Ensure that ENABLE is selected (Upper Case).

If ENABLE is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Left arrow pushbutton to
select ENABLE.

9. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

DHCP PROTOCOL
DISABE enable

4–21
M‑4272 Instruction Book

10. Ensure that DISABLE is selected (upper case). If DISABLE is not selected, then
use the left arrow pushbutton to select DISABLE.

11. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

IP ADDRESS
XX.XX.XX.XX

12. Enter the desired IP Address, then press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

NET MASK
XX.XX.XX.XX

13. Enter the desired Net Mask, then press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

GATEWAY
XX.XX.XX.XX

14. Enter the desired Gateway, then press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGS
TCP_SETTINGS

15. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will reconfigure and the following will be displayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board is successfully configured, then the entered IP Address will be
displayed for approximately 2 seconds:

ETHERNET IP ADDRESS
xx.xx.xx.xx
The ethernet board is now configured for use and may be accessed through a network.

Installing the Modems

Using ISScom to interrogate, set or monitor the MBTS using a modem requires both a remote
modem connected at the MBTS location and a local modem connected to the computer with
ISScom installed.

QQ NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used; however, the unit only communicates
at 1200 to 9600 baud.

In order to use ISScom to communicate with the MBTS using a modem, the following must
be provided with the MBTS:
• An external modem (1200 baud or higher), capable of understanding
standard AT commands.
• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector for the MBTS and the applicable
connector for the modem.

Similarly, the computer running ISScom must also have access to a compatible internal or
external modem.

Connecting the PC Modem

1. If the computer has an external modem, then use a standard straight-through
RS‑232 modem cable (M-3933) to connect the computer to the modem.
2. If the computer has an internal modem, then refer to the modem’s instruction book
to determine which communications port should be selected.

4–22
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

3. Verify that the modem is attached to (if external) or assigned to (if internal) the
same serial port as assigned in ISScom.
While ISScom can use any of the 255 serial ports (COM1 through COM255), most
computers support only COM1 and COM2.
4. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.

Initializing the PC Modem

1. Verify that the modem is connected as described in "Connecting the PC Modem".
2. Open ISScom, then select "Modem" from the Connect menu dropdown.
3. ISScom will display the Modem Connection dialog screen (Figure 4-11).
4. Enter the required information in the Modem Settings section of the screen, then
select Connect.

Figure 4-11 Modem Settings Dialog Screen

Command Buttons
Add Allows you to review and change the user lines (unit identifier), phone number,
and communication address of a selected entry.
Remove Deletes a selected entry.
Save Saves any changes to the displayed information
Connect Dials the entry selected from the directory.
Cancel Ends modem communication, allowing the user to dial again.

Figure 4-12 Terminal Window

4–23
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTS

Setup of the modem attached to the MBTS may be slightly complicated. It involves
programming parameters (using the AT command set), and storing this profile in the modem’s
nonvolatile memory.
After programming, the modem will power up in the proper state for communicating with
the MBTS. Programming may be accomplished by using the "Bring Up Terminal Window
after dialing" selection (Figure 4-11). Refer to your modem manual for further information.

QQ NOTE: The MBTS does not issue or understand any modem commands. It will
not adjust the baud rate and should be considered a "dumb" peripheral. It
communicates with 1 start, 8 data, and 0, 1 or 2 stop bits.

Connect the Modem to the MBTS as follows:

1. Connect the unit to an external modem by attaching a standard RS-232 modem
cable to the appropriate serial communications port on both the unit and the modem.
2. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.

The modem attached to the MBTS must have the following AT command configuration:
E0 No Echo
Q1 Don’t return result code
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hangup and reset
&S0 DSR always on
&C1 DCD ON when detected
S0=2 Answer on second ring
The following commands may also be required at the modem:
&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE
N0 Answer only at specified speed
W Disable serial data rate adjust
\Q3 Bidirectional RTS/CTS relay
&B1 Fixed serial port rate
S37 Desired line connection speed
When connected to another terminal device, the Terminal Window allows the user to send
messages or commands. Outgoing communications are displayed in the top pane and
incoming messages are displayed in the bottom two panes, in ASCII text and HEX format.
There are some variations in the AT commands supported by modem manufacturers. Refer
to the hardware user documentation for a list of supported AT commands and direction on
issuing these commands.

4–24
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

OSCILLOGRAPH SETUP
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms,
and status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable
from 1 to 16 partitions.
The number of samples per cycle used to store the data is user selectable. The number of
samples per cycle that can be selected are 16 or 32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples
selected effects the length of the data that can be saved and its resolution. The lower the
number of samples, the longer the record length that can be stored (but at a lower resolution).
The oscillographic recorder can be triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a
MBTS initiate input), an automatically initiated signal, a trip output, a manual transfer signal,
serial communications or manually by the user.
When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most
recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues
to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be
analyzed using ISScom, and are also available in COMTRADE file format.

Setup Oscillograph Recorder

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.
When not connected to the MBTS the Send selection does not save the
Oscillograph Recorder settings to an open file.

To setup the Oscillograph Recorder perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Setup. ISScom
will display the Oscillograph Setup screen (Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder

2. Select the Number of Records (Partitions).
The recorder’s memory may be partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions. The MBTS Oscillograph
Recorder memory buffer is fixed and contains room for a finite number of cycles of
recorded data. Consider Table 4-2 when determining the number of Oscillograph
records, The number of cycles of recorded data is directly related to the number of
records selected.

4–25
M‑4272 Instruction Book

QQ NOTE: Table 4-2 is based on 32 samples per cycle. For other sample rates the number
of cycles per partition has to be scaled accordingly.

Number of Number of Cycles per

Partitions Each Partition
1 124 Cycles
2 80 Cycles
3 60 Cycles
4 48 Cycles
5 40 Cycles
6 32 Cycles
7 28 Cycles
8 24 Cycles
9 24 Cycles
10 20 Cycles
11 20 Cycles
12 16 Cycles
13 16 Cycles
14 16 Cycles
15 12 Cycles
16 12 Cycles
Table 4-2 Recorder Partitions
3. Select the desired Trigger Inputs and Trigger Outputs.
The recorder can be triggered remotely through serial communications using ISScom,
or automatically using programmed status inputs or outputs.

4. Select the Post Trigger Delay.

A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95% must be specified. After triggering, the recorder
will continue to store data for the programmed portion of the total record before re-
arming for the next record. For example, a setting of 80% will result in a record with
20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.

5. Select the Oscillograph Samples per Cycle.

The number of data samples per cycle can be selected either 16 or 32 samples per
cycle.

6. Select Save, ISScom will display a Save to Device Confirmation Screen

(Figure 4-14).

Figure 4-14 Oscillograph Save to Device Confirmation Screen

7. Select Yes, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.

4–26
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER SETUP

Protective function Pickup, Trip, Dropout and/or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected
to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder.

Setup Sequence of Events Recorder

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.
When not connected to the MBTS the Save selection does not save the
Sequence of Event settings to the open file.

To setup the Sequence of Events Recorder perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Event
Recorder/Setup. ISScom will display the Sequence of Events Setup screen
(Figure 4-16).
2. Select the desired Inputs and Outputs, then select Save. ISScom will display a
Save to Device Confirmation Screen (Figure 4-15).

Figure 4-15 Sequence of Events Save to Device Confirmation Screen

3. Select Yes, ISScom will return to the Main Screen.

Figure 4-16 Sequence Of Events Setup

4–27
M‑4272 Instruction Book

4.2 System Setup

QQ NOTE: Setup Record Forms are contained in Appendix A. The Setup Record Form
tables list the MBTS parameter settings choices for each feature and function.

The System Setup consists of defining all pertinent information regarding the system
quantities. The Setup System dialog screen (Figure 4-17) is accessed through the System
menu (System/Setup/Setup System). Regardless of the functions that are enabled or
disabled, all Setup System values are required to be entered. Several MBTS functions
require the proper setting of these values for correct operation.

MBTS Setup System

The Nominal Frequency of 50 or 60 Hz and the CT Secondary Rating (1 or 5 Amp) has been
configured at the factory and is indicated (grayed out and can not be changed). However,
when an ISScom "New File" is opened, the Nominal Frequency and CT Secondary Rating
may be selected. Attempting to write a file to an MBTS that is not configured the same, will
result in ISScom returning an error message.

QQ NOTE: Communication must be established with the target MBTS for this procedure.

To setup the MBTS System perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Setup/Setup System.
ISScom will display the Setup System screen (Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17 Setup System Dialog Screen

QQ NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams for Typical VT Three-Line Connection
Diagrams.

4–28
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

2. Enter the Nominal Voltage.

The Nominal Voltage setting (50 to 140 V) is needed for proper normalization of per
unit quantities. Nominal Voltage for the following voltage connections is as follows:
• Line-to-Line VT connections
VNominal = V Bus / VT Ratio
• Line-to-Ground VT connections
VNominal = V Bus / (S3 VT Ratio)
3. Enter the Nominal Current. The secondary CT current of the phase CTS.
4. Select the Phase Rotation. (ABC or ACB).
QQ NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams for Typical VT Three-Line Connection
Diagrams.

5. Select the S1/S2 VT Configuration button. ISScom displays the S1/S2 VT

Configuration selection screen (Figure 4-18).
The S1/S2 VT Configuration allows the selection of the Source 1 and Source 2 voltage
transformer configuration. When phase‑ground (three­­­­‑phase) is selected, the phase-
to-phase single phase choices are grayed out and only one phase to ground choice
can be made. When phase-to-phase (three‑phase) is selected, the phase‑to‑ground
single‑phase choices are grayed‑out and only one phase‑to‑phase choice can be
made. Both Source 1 and Source 2 must have the same VT Configuration.
6. Select the desired S1 and S2 VT Configuration, then select OK, ISScom returns
to the Setup System screen.
7. Select the Bus VT Configuration button. ISScom displays the Bus VT Configuration
selection screen (Figure 4-19).

Figure 4-18 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen

Figure 4-19 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen

4–29
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Some selections are grayed-out depending on the Source 1/Source 2 selection.

The Bus VT Configuration must have the same phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase
selection as the Source 1/Source 2 configuration. If either of three-phase selections
are chosen for the Source 1/Source 2, then the bus must have the same configuration.
However, if the Source 1/Source 2 single-phase selection is chosen then the bus
configuration can be either the same single-phase or the three-phase.
For example, if the Source 1/Source 2 selection is phase-to-phase (three phase),
then the bus must use the same phase-to-phase (three-phase) configuration. If the
Source 1/Source 2 selection is phase-to-phase (single phase BC), then the bus
choices will be phase-to-phase (single phase BC) or phase-to-phase (three phase).
8. Select the desired Bus VT Configuration, then select OK, ISScom will return to
the Setup System screen.
9. Select the S1/S2 CT Configuration button. ISScom displays the S1/S2 CT
Configuration Selection screen (Figure 4‑20).
The S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection is based on whether the S1 and S2 CTs are
connected to the rear terminals of the MBTS. The default selection is "Yes" which
includes the current values for S1 and S2 on the Single Line Diagram (Figure 3‑23).
Selecting "No" removes the S1 and S2 current elements from the Single Line Diagram.

Figure 4-20 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection Screen

10. Enter the VT and CT ratios (Figure 4-17).
The VT and CT ratios are used only for monitoring and displaying system primary
quantities.
• Ratio of the Phase VTs
Example:
13,800 V: 120 V = 13,800/120 = 115: 1
• Ratio of Phase CTs
Example:
3,000: 5 = 3000/5 = 600: 1

QQ NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled, then the output contact will
default to the Normal Mode. Normal Mode maintains the output contact
energized as long as the condition that caused it to operate exists. After the
actuating condition is cleared, the contact will reset after the programmed
seal-in time has elapsed.

4–30
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

11. Select Outputs from the LATCHED OUTPUTS section of the System Setup
screen. ISScom will display the Latched Outputs Selection Screen (Figure 4-21).

Figure 4-21 Latched Outputs Selection Screen

The Latched Outputs selection screen allows the user to select which outputs are
latched when they are activated. Outputs 1 through 4 are the Trip and Close command
outputs for the breakers and cannot be latched (the pulse length of these outputs
are set in the Common Settings screen Figure 4-32). These outputs remain latched
until reset by an ISScom command or by the HMI of the MBTS. When selected as
Latched the output will be grayed out in the Pulsed Output Selection screen.

12. Select the desired outputs to be Latched, then select OK, ISScom will return to
the Setup System screen.
QQ NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled, then the output contact will
default to the Normal Mode. Normal Mode maintains the output contact
energized as long as the condition that caused it to operate exists. After the
actuating condition is cleared, the contact will reset after the programmed
seal-in time has elapsed.

13. Select Outputs from the PULSED OUTPUTS section of the System Setup screen.
ISScom will display the Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen (Figure 4-22).

Figure 4-22 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen

The Pulsed Outputs selection screen allows the user to select which outputs are
pulsed when they are activated. The pulse width is defined in the Output Seal in
time section of Figure 4-17, Setup System Dialog Screen. If pulse MBTS operation
is selected, output will dropout after the seal-in delay expires, even if the condition
which caused the MBTS to pick up is still out of band. When selected as Pulsed the
output will be grayed out in the Latched Output Selection screen.

Outputs 1 through 4 are the trip and close command outputs for the breakers, the pulse
length of these outputs are set in the Common Settings screen (Figure 4-32).

4–31
M‑4272 Instruction Book

14. Select the desired outputs to be Pulsed, then select OK, ISScom will return to the
Setup System screen.
QQ NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled, then the output contact will
default to the Normal Mode. Normal Mode maintains the output contact
energized as long as the condition that caused it to operate exists. After the
actuating condition is cleared, the contact will reset after the programmed
seal-in time has elapsed.

15. Select Input Status from the INPUT ACTIVE STATE section of the System Setup
screen. ISScom will display the Input Active States Selection Screen (Figure 4-23).
This Input Active States selection screen allows the user to select the active input state for
each input. Inputs 1, 2, 4 and 5 are the breaker status inputs which have predefined
terminals for "a" and "b" contacts. Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open
parameter designates the "operated" state established by an opening rather than
closing an external contact. The Input LED on the Status Module and Input LED on
the ISScom's Input/Output Status Section in the Secondary Metering and Status
screen will illuminate according to the input "operated" state.
For example: Checking Inputs 3 and 6 for the Active Input Close parameter designated
the operated state of the breaker TOC, 52PS or 52H intelligence contact that is
closed when the breaker is fully racked-in. If the breaker is not fully racked-in (in test
position), the M-4272 will block any type of transfer.
16. Select the desired Active Input State for each Input, then select OK, ISScom will
return to the Setup System screen.
17. Select the desired Duplicate Outputs.
The Duplicate Outputs Selection feature (Figure 4-20) allows an additional output
to be selected that will operate at the same time as the trip or close commands are
issued to their assigned outputs. The duplicate output can provide additional trip
and close outputs as needed.
18. Select the Output Seal In Time for each Output (2 to 8160 Cycles).
The Output Seal-in Time provides the user with the ability to individually enter the
seal-in time of each output. This setting is only used if the output has not been
selected as a latched output. The seal-in time defines the time period that the output
is closed even if the condition no longer exists.
19. When all Setup System parameters have been entered/selected, then select Save.
20. From the ISScom main screen menu select System/Profile/Switching Method.
ISScom will display the Switching Profile Method screen (Figure 3-47).

21. Select the desired Switching Method.

• If "Manual" was selected, then no further action is required.
• If "Input Contact" was selected the status of input contacts IN17 and
IN18 will determine the active profile as indicated in Table 4-3.

Input 17 Input 18 Selection

Open Open Profile 1
Closed Open Profile 2
Open Closed Profile 3
Closed Closed Profile 4
Table 4-3 Input Activated Profile

QQ NOTE: Assuming active state is closed.

4–32
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-23 Input Active States Selection Screen

4–33
M‑4272 Instruction Book

4.3 System Diagrams

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
M-4272
IS1 IS2
M-4272 VA VB VC M-4272 1

1 97 99
91 90 93 92 95 94

52S1 96 98 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

Figure 4-24 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–34
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye

Alternate Connection Alternate Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single
Alternate Connection
Phase CT Phase CT
M-4272
IS1 IS2
M-4272 VA VB VC M-4272 1

1 97 99
91 90 93 92 95 94

52S1 96 98 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

Figure 4-25 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT

Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–35
M‑4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84

VBC VBC
81 87

80 86

VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection Phase CT
IS1 M-4272
IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
VAB VBC VCA
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.

Figure 4-26 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–36
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Ground 2 Phase-Ground
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B One VT CT-S2 Single

Phase CT 2 Phase-Ground Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
M-4272
VA VB VC
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -
Ground.

Figure 4-27 Single Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–37
M‑4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Phase 2 Phase-Phase
Connection Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84
VBC VBC
81 87

80 86
VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B One VT CT-S2 Single

2 Phase-Phase Phase CT
Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
M-4272
VAB VBC VCA
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -
Phase C.

Figure 4-28 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–38
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Ground 2 Phase-Ground
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
IS1 VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 M-4272 1

1 97 VA VB VC 99

91 90 93 92 95 94
96 98

52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -
Ground.

Figure 4-29 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,

Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–39
M‑4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Phase 2 Phase-Phase
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84
VBC VBC
81 87

80 86
VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection
IS1 IS2
M-4272 M-4272 M-4272 1

VAB VBC VCA

1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98

52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the same
phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.

Figure 4-30 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase Bus Side

Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram

4–40
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

4.4 System Setpoints

The System Setpoints consist of defining all pertinent information regarding the system
setpoints and transfer logic settings. The M‑4272 System Setpoints dialog screen
(Figure 4-31) is accessed through the System menu (System/Setup/Setpoints).

QQ NOTE: Configuration Record Forms are contained in Appendix A. The Configuration

Record Form tables list the System Setpoint parameters and the settings
choices for each function.

The MBTS System Setpoints consists of entering the following:

• Selecting Transfer Logic and conditions including Automatic, Manual Transfer
settings
• Enabling the functions and entering the desired settings
• Designating the output contacts each function will operate, and which control/
status inputs will enable or block the transfer.

The choices include 11 programmable output contacts (OUT5–OUT16) and six breaker
status inputs (IN1–IN6) for Source 1 and Source 2, plus 12 other programmable inputs. A
block or fixed time transfer choice for bus fuse loss logic operation.
The transfer settings for Automatic Transfers, Manual Transfers, Common Settings, control/
status inputs and output contact assignments must be chosen before entering the settings
for the individual functions.
Each of the individual submenus are described in the following pages. Settings for disabled
functions do not apply. Some menu and setting screens do not appear for functions that
are disabled. The System Setpoints can only be entered using the ISScom software. See
Section 1.2, M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System for a listing of those Settings, Functions
and Status values that are available from the front panel display and HMI.
The System Setpoints dialog screen contains two setting groups, the Transfer Settings and
the Function Settings. The Transfer Settings group contains the settings that are necessary
for transferring the motor bus load quickly and safely from one power source to another
power source.
The Function Settings group contains settings that can initiate the transfer or are used as
logic inputs to the transfer logic.
At the bottom of the System Setpoints dialog screen there are two additional selections:

• Display All – Selecting the Display All button displays the All Setpoints
Table dialog screen (Figure 3-15). This dialog screen contains the settings
for each MBTS function within a single window to allow scrolling through
all MBTS setpoint and configuration values.
• Configure – Selecting the Configure button displays the Configure dialog
screen (Figure 3-16), which contains a chart of programmed input and
output contacts, in order to allow scrolling through all MBTS output and
blocking input configurations.

Both dialog screens (All Setpoints Table and Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons
which allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual MBTS function
dialog screen and return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be
reviewed or changed when jumping to a MBTS configuration dialog screen from either
scrolling dialog screen.
The Transfer Settings group includes four menus. The Common Settings submenu contains
settings that are used by the Automatic Transfer, Manual Transfer and Automatic Trip Logic.
For example, some of the common settings are the Breaker Closing Time, Trip and Close
Pulse Lengths and New Source Voltage Limits. These and other settings are used whether
an Automatic or Manual Transfer is performed. Therefore, the settings in the Common
Settings submenu must be entered for a transfer to operate correctly.

4–41
M‑4272 Instruction Book

TRANSFER SETTINGS

Common Settings (CS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings
The Common Settings selection from the Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-31) opens
the Common Function Settings Dialog screen (Figure 4-32), which includes the Common
Function Settings, Inputs and Outputs tabs.

Figure 4-31 System Setpoints Dialog Screen

Common Settings/Common Function Settings Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings
The MBTS Transfer Settings/Common Settings/Common Function Settings Tab is illustrated
in Figure 4-32 (with Breaker Closing Time Adaptation Disable) and Figure 4-33 (with Breaker
Closing Time Adaptation Enable).

4–42
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Common Settings/Transfer Mode

Transfer Mode can be selected as either Simultaneous or Sequential:
• Simultaneous – With a transfer initiated, within 10 ms of transfer initiate,
all three methods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and Residual Voltage Transfer
are immediately enabled to supervise closure of the new source breaker
without waiting for the breaker status contact confirmation that the old
source breaker has opened. At the same instant, the commands for the
old source breaker and the new source breaker to trip and close are sent
simultaneously if and only if the phase angle between the motor bus and
the new source is within the delta phase angle limit for the Fast Transfer
Method immediately upon transfer initiation. However only the Fixed Time
Transfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old source breaker has opened.
Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence for Timing Sequence
of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.
• Sequential – With a transfer initiated, the command to trip the old source
breaker is sent within 10 ms. Upon confirmation from the old source breaker
status contact that the old source breaker is open. Within 4ms of receipt
of this confirmation, all three transfer methods, Fast, In-Phase Transfer
and Residual Voltage Transfer are enabled to supervise closure of the new
source breaker and the Fixed Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles later.
Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence for Timing Sequence
of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.

Figure 4-32 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen (with Adaptation Disable)

4–43
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-33 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen (with Adaptation Enable)

Common Settings/Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New Source

This setting defines the upper and lower voltage limits of the new source. If the new source
voltage is not within these limits, then a transfer is blocked.
If a transfer is blocked and an initiate transfer signal is received, the transfer is not started
(no trip or close command is sent to the supply breakers). This prevents a transfer to a new
source that does not meet the voltage requirements established by the Upper and Lower
Voltage Limits. The result is that the motor bus will lose power when the protective MBTS
trips the supply breaker and initiates a transfer to the new source at the same time. Since
the existing power is being tripped (due to some abnormality) and the new source is outside
of the setting range, a transfer will not occur and the motor bus will lose power.

Common Settings/Breaker Closing Time

The Breaker Closing Time setting defines the breaker closing time (the time period from
when the close command is issued to when the new source breaker status contact closes)
of the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers that the MBTS is controlling. The breaker closing
time is used during an In-phase transfer. The in‑phase transfer sends the close command
in advance of the phase coincidence, based on this Breaker Closing Time setting in cycles,
and the rate of change of the frequency of the decaying motor bus.
The purpose of using the breaker closing time is to have the breaker actually close just at
the time of the phase coincidence.

4–44
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Breaker Closing Time/Adaptation Enable

The Adaptation Enable feature, when selected calculates the S1 and S2 breaker closing
times based on the average time of the last 8 breaker operations. When initially selected, the
entered breaker closing time will be used until eight breaker operations have been averaged.
If ISScom is connected to the M‑4272 and the Common Function Settings screen is active
during a transfer, the Common Function Settings screen must be closed and then reopened
in order to refresh the breaker closing time value in Adaptation Enable mode.
When Adaptation Enable is selected, the S1 and S2 Set Breaker Closing Time setpoints
will be grayed out and cannot be changed. In addition, the S1 and S2 Set Breaker Closing
Time setpoints will be labeled "S1 and S2 Adapted Breaker Closing Time".
With Adaptation Enable selected, the Reset button will be accessible. When the Reset button
is selected, the adapted values will be reset to match the set "Adaptation Disable" values.
For example, if the set value for S1 = 3.5 cycles, and the adapted value is 4.5 cycles, when
the Reset command is sent, then the adapted value resets to 3.5 cycles.
When the Reset button is selected, ISScom will display a S1/S2 Reset confirmation screen
(Figure 4-34). Selecting Yes sends the Reset command, which will be followed by the Reset
Successful confirmation screen (Figure 4-35).

Figure 4-34 Adapted Breaker Closing Time Reset Confirmation Screen

Figure 4-35 Adapted Breaker Closing Time Reset Successfully Screen

Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation

The S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting establishes when the breaker has
exceeded the normal expected variations, plus or minus from the programmed closing time.
When the Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting is exceeded a "S1/S2 Breaker Closing
Time Out of Range" indicator on the System Status section of the Secondary Metering and
Status screen will be activated. Activation of this indicator would indicate that the breaker
may require maintenance.

4–45
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement

The S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement settings define the time the 52a and 52b
breaker status contacts of the same breaker are allowed to be in the same state before
the MBTS responds to that condition. If the 52a and 52b contacts on the same breaker
are both closed or both open, then transfers are blocked. The Pickup Time is the time that
both breaker status contacts are either closed or both open before the unit responds to
that condition. The Pickup Time allows for possible overlap of the contacts as the breaker
changes position. The Dropout Time Delay is the time period for the MBTS to consider the
breaker status contact inputs in the same state after they are no longer in the same state.
This setting is only applicable when both the 52a and 52b breaker status contacts are
connected to the MBTS.

Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time

The Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time setting establishes the time period in which an
Automatic Transfer must be completed. The time period is defined as the time at which the
transfer is initiated until the transfer is complete.
If a transfer is not completed within the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time period the following
MBTS actions will occur:
1. The status of the target breaker will be set by this timer.
2. The MBTS will stop attempting to finish the present transfer.
3. The MBTS will enter into a lockout condition.
4. The Lockout Blocking contact (output 8) will change state and any subsequent
transfer initiate commands will be ignored.

This feature keeps the unit from operating until the cause of the incomplete transfer is
determined. It also prevents the unit from unexpectedly closing at a later time when the
conditions would allow a close.

Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time Delay

The Local Manual Initiate Time Setting establishes the time delay before a locally initiated
Manual Transfer actuates.
The manual local transfer can be initiated in either the Remote or Local mode of operation.
The purpose of this time delay is to allow personnel initiating the transfer to move away from
the front of the switchgear that would be operating during the transfer. This assumes that
the M‑4272 is physically located on the switchgear. Typically, manual transfers occur when
the motor bus load is being transferred from one source to another and the conditions are
stable and a time delay would have no effect on if the transfer is successful. This feature
should not be used if there is any difference in frequency or fluctuating voltage amplitudes.

Common Settings/Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay

▲▲ CAUTION: This feature should NOT be used if there is any difference in frequency
or fluctuating voltage amplitudes.

The Remote Manual Initiate Time Setting establishes the time delay before a remotely
initiated Manual Transfer actuates.
The Remote Manual Transfer can be initiated in Remote mode of operation. The purpose
of this time delay is to allow personnel initiating the transfer to move away from the front of
the switchgear that would be operating during the transfer. This assumes that the remote
manual initiate pushbutton is physically located on the switchgear. Typically, manual transfers
occur when the motor bus load is being transferred from one source to another and the
conditions are stable and the time delay would have no effect if the transfer is successful.

4–46
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer Time

The Blocking After Transfer Time setting establishes the time delay after a transfer has been
completed before another transfer is possible. During this time period, all initiate commands
are ignored. The initiate commands are not stored or remembered, the initiate command
will only be recognized after this block time. The purpose of this feature is to prevent an
immediate automatic transfer back to an unviable source. In addition, the new source voltage
may dip due to the motor bus load being connected. This dip in voltage could cause the 27B
Bus Phase Undervoltage (internal or external) to trigger a transfer.

Common Settings/Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings
The Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length settings establish the length of the
trip and close outputs.

Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open Condition

This feature works in conjunction with the Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) monitor function.
If the Trip/Close Circuit function is enabled and detects an open condition this feature when
enabled will block any transfers.

Common Settings Save/Cancel – The Save selection (Figure 4-32) saves the Common
Function Settings Tab Settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns
the user to the previous open screen.

4–47
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Common Function Settings Inputs Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Input
Figure 4-36, illustrates the MBTS Common Function Settings found under the Inputs Tab
on the Common Function Settings dialog screen.

Common Settings/Breaker Status Inputs

The Breaker Status Inputs section provides the user with the ability to select the type of
52 breaker status contact being used for Source 1 and Source 2. One of the three choices
presented must be selected, the 52a, or 52b or both 52a and 52b. Only one choice for each
breaker can be selected. The selection must match the physical connections to the unit for
proper operation.
The 52a or 52b breaker status input contacts need to be breaker auxiliary contacts that
change state whenever the breaker closes/opens and when the breaker is in test or fully
racked-in (connected) positions. During commissioning, when a bus transfer test is simulated,
the M‑4272 needs to see the 52a or 52b contacts change state even when the breaker is
in test position.

Figure 4-36 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen

4–48
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Common Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration

The External Control Inputs Configuration section includes four selections:
• Transfer Block #1 • Transfer Block #3
• Transfer Block #2 • External Status Reset

Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3)

The Transfer Block #1, #2 and #3 provide three possible inputs to be used to block transfers.
When the Transfer Block #1 button is selected the Transfer Block #1 Inputs dialog screen
is displayed (Figure 4-37).
The desired input or inputs for blocking can be selected. The same is true for Transfer Block
#2 and Transfer Block #3 dialog screens. Once an input has been selected it will be grayed
out on the other dialog screens since it has already been assigned.

Figure 4-37 Transfer Block #1 Input Dialog Screen

Common Settings/External Status Reset

This feature allows the user to select the external input to be used to reset the system status
and any selected latched outputs. When the External Status Reset button is selected the
External Status Reset Input Selection dialog screen is displayed (Figure 4-38).
Only one input can be selected. When an input is selected it will be grayed out in other
dialog boxes which allow selection of inputs for different functions.

Common Function Inputs Save/Cancel – The Save selection (Figure 4-36) saves the
Common Function Settings Input Tab settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS.
Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Figure 4-38 External Status Reset Input Selection Dialog Screen

Common Settings Outputs Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Outputs
Figure 4-40, illustrates the MBTS Common Function Settings found under the Outputs Tab
on the Common Function Settings dialog screen.

4–49
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs

The Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs feature (Figure 4-40) allows the user to select one
or more outputs (Figure 4-39) to indicate when the Automatic Fast transfer is ready.
The conditions that are necessary for a Fast Transfer to be ready to execute are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Voltage between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.

Figure 4-39 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen
If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/Blocking conditions or the conditions for an
Auto Fast Transfer are not true, then a Fast transfer would not occur. The trip command
would be sent, but the close command would not occur until conditions would allow an in-
phase, residual or fixed time transfer.

Figure 4-40 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen

4–50
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Outputs

The Manual Fast Transfer/ Hot Parallel Ready Outputs feature (Figure 4-40) allows the user
to select one or more outputs (Figure 4-41) to indicate when the Manual Fast Transfer/Hot
Parallel Ready Outputs are ready.

Figure 4-41 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen
The conditions that are necessary for a Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel to be ready to
execute are as follows:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The Phase Angle between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Voltage between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the Motor Bus and the New Source is within
limit setting.

If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/Blocking conditions or any of the conditions
for a Manual Fast Transfer are not true, then a Fast Transfer would not occur. The Manual
Transfer trip command would be sent, but the close command would not occur until the
conditions would allow an In-Phase, Residual or Fixed Time Transfer. For the Hot Parallel
Transfer, when a Manual Hot Parallel Transfer is attempted and one of the parameters is
outside of the setting, the close command is not sent if transfer conditions are not met. If
conditions are not met before the incomplete transfer block timer expires, then an Incomplete
Transfer Blocked Indication will be displayed.

Common Settings/Transfer Ready Outputs

The Transfer Ready Outputs feature (Figure 4-40) allows the user to select one or more
outputs (Figure 4-42) to indicate when the Transfer Ready Outputs are ready.

Figure 4-42 Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen

The Transfer ready indication only indicates that there are no blocking conditions, it does
not indicate the Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, or Delta Voltage parameters are within
the settings of the Automatic or Manual Transfer settings. If a transfer is initiated when there
were any Lockout/Blocking conditions present, then the transfer will be blocked. The trip
command would not be sent.

4–51
M‑4272 Instruction Book

One or more outputs can be selected to indicate when an Automatic or Manual Transfer is
ready. A Transfer Ready indication is given when there are no Lockout/Blocking conditions.
Lockout/Blocking conditions that will prevent a transfer are:
• Voltage Blocking – If prior to a transfer, the new source voltage exceeds
the Upper or Lower Voltage Limits, all transfers are blocked as long as the
voltage remains outside these limits.
• External Blocking – When any external blocking control input contact is
closed, all transfers are blocked.
• Incomplete Transfer Lockout – Blocks any transfer initiated by a protective
relay initiate, or an automatic initiated transfer or a manual transfer if the
last transfer was not completed within the time delay. A time delay can be
set from 50 to 3000 Cycles. The MBTS remains in the lockout condition
until manually reset.
• Bus VT Fuse Loss Blocking – Transfer is blocked if the user has selected
Bus VT Fuse Loss to block transfers and the MBTS detects a Bus VT Fuse
Loss (60FL).
• Both Breakers Same State Blocking – If both breaker status contacts
are in the open state, due to an external operation that opens the second
breaker while leaving the first one open, and if the Auto Close feature is not
selected, no transfer sequence is initiated.
Furthermore, any subsequent initiation of a transfer sequence while the
breakers are in this state is inhibited. If both breaker status contacts are
closed due to an external operation that closes the second breaker while
leaving the first one closed, and if the auto trip feature is disabled, no transfer
sequence is initiated.
• Transfer in Process Blocking – When a transfer is in process, any other
transfer initiate inputs will be ignored until the original transfer is complete.
• Blocking After Transfer – After a transfer has been completed, any
additional transfers are blocked for 0 to 8160 cycles, as selected by the user.
• Trip/Close Circuit Open Blocking – Transfer is blocked if the Trip or Close
Circuit Open is detected.
• 52a and 52b Position Disagreement Blocking – Transfer is blocked when
the 52a and 52b status input positions disagree (applicable when both 52a
and 52b status inputs are used).

Common Settings/Transfer Completed Outputs

The Transfer Completed Outputs feature (Figure 4-40) allows the user to select one or more
outputs (Figure 4-43) to indicate which output is to be used to indicate when a transfer has
been completed.
Typically this output would be configured as a latched output so it would remain closed like
a target to indicate that a transfer had been completed.

Figure 4-43 Transfer Completed Output Selection Dialog Screen

4–52
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Outputs The Incomplete Transfer Outputs feature

(Figure 4-40) allows user to select one or more outputs (Figure 4-44) to indicate which
output is to be used to indicate when a transfer has been incomplete. Typically this output
would be latched so it would remain closed like a target to indicate that a transfer has been
incomplete. The MBTS remains in the lockout condition until manually reset.

Figure 4-44 Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Common Function Outputs Save/Cancel – The Save selection (Figure 4-40) saves the
Common Function Settings Outputs Tab settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS.
Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Automatic Transfer Settings (ATS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings
The Automatic Transfer Settings selection from the Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-31)
opens the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen (Figure 4-45), which includes the
following tabs:
• Setup
• Fast Transfer
• In-Phase Transfer
• Residual Voltage Transfer
• Fixed Time Transfer

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/Setup
Figure 4-45, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer Settings found under the Setup Tab
on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen.

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Transfer Mode

The Auto Transfer Mode (Figure 4-45) can be Disabled or Enabled. If Disable is selected
and then Save is selected, then the remaining settings in the Automatic Transfer Settings
dialog screen are grayed out.

Automatic Transfer Mode Enable/Disable from the HMI

To enable or disable Automatic Transfer from the Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

4–53
M‑4272 Instruction Book

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

AUTO TRANSFER
AUTO_XFER man_xfer

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

AUTO TRANSFER
disable ENABLE

6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to enable or disable Auto
Transfer (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will be displayed:

AUTO TRANFER
AUTO X_FER man x_fer

8. The MBTS is now in the selected Auto Transfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary
to return to the Main Menu.

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Close After External Breaker Trip
The AC (Auto Close After External Breaker Trip) portion of the dialog screen (Figure 4-45)
provides a selection for how the MBTS should respond to an External Breaker Trip.
In normal operation either the Source 1 or the Source 2 breaker is closed. If the breaker that is
closed is opened by an external operation when "No Transfer" is selected, then no transfer is
performed by the M‑4272. While this condition continues to exist any transfer initiated externally
or internally will be blocked and no transfers will occur.
If "Initiate Automatic Transfer" has been selected, then if the breaker that was closed
is opened by an external operation, the automatic transfer is initiated. The other breaker
will be closed by the Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage transfer or Fixed
Time Transfer settings of the Automatic Transfer feature. The transfer method used will
depend on how the motor bus voltage decays when the power source is disconnected.
For example, assume the Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open.
An operator accidentally opens the Source 1 breaker. The MBTS will close the Source 2
breaker based on the Automatic Transfer settings.

4–54
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

The Initiate Automatic Transfer selection operates an automatic transfer in either direction.
The purpose is to permit a transfer when the normally-closed breaker is accidentally/
inadvertently tripped resulting in two open breakers. This operation is very similar to the
regular automatic transfer process except that it does not send out the trip command, since
the second breaker is already open.

▲▲ CAUTION: When the Auto Close Function is SELECTED, the following steps and
procedures must be performed in order to avoid unexpected/accidental
automatic transfer operation.

Assume the Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open. An operator plans
to open the Source 1 normally-closed breaker for maintenance purposes, during normal
start up or shut down and does NOT want an automatic transfer operation to occur after
the Source 1 breaker is open.
Before opening the Source 1 normally-closed breaker, an external block transfer signal
must be applied to an M‑4272 input FIRST in order to block a transfer. This input MUST be
programmed to block automatic transfers. When the Source 1 breaker is open resulting in two
open breakers, the automatic transfer is blocked by this external signal. While the Source 1
breaker and Source 2 breaker are open, DO NOT remove the external block transfer signal
until either the Source 1 breaker or the Source 2 breaker is closed. Removing the external
blocking signal will stop blocking the Auto Close function and if both breakers open, the
automatic transfer by the Auto Close function will occur. Remove the external block transfer
signal ONLY after either the Source 1 breaker or Source 2 breaker is closed.
Similar steps must be taken in case of the bus fault condition.
In the bus fault condition, the bus protective relay or the bus lockout relay that trips the
main (Source 1) breaker MUST apply a block transfer signal to the M‑4272 input at the
same time, because this results in two open breakers. Therefore, the automatic transfer by
the Auto Close function is blocked by the protective relay/lockout relay block signal. This
input signal must be latched and remain closed as long as both breakers are open. This
protective relay/lockout relay input MUST NOT be removed until one of the breakers is
closed. After the bus fault is clear, DO NOT RESET the latched block transfer signal of the
protective relay /lockout relay until the following steps are completed in sequential order to
avoid unexpected/accidental automatic transfer operation:
1. Activate an additional separate external block transfer signal (block transfer from
DCS or from local control switch) to an M‑4272 input first in order to block a transfer.
2. Then, reset the bus protective relay/lockout relay trip signal.
3. Close the main (Source 1) breaker which will deactivate/reset the Auto Close
function.
4. Finally, remove the external block transfer signal (block transfer from DCS or from
local control switch).

4–55
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-45 Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab Dialog Screen

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup tab/ External Control Input Configuration

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/Setup
The External Control Input Configuration portion of the Automatic Transfer Settings Setup
Tab (Figure 4-45) includes the following External Control Input configuration selections:
• Automatic Transfer Block
• 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)
• 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)
• External Initiate (S1 to S2)
• External Initiate (S2 to S1)

Automatic Transfer/Automatic Transfer Block

The Automatic Transfer Block selection opens the Automatic Transfer Block dialog screen
(Figure 4-46) that allows the user to select an input that is used to block Automatic Transfers.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

▲▲ CAUTION: When the Automatic Transfer Mode is selected (using an external

Automatic/Manual selector switch on the control panel), the Manual
Transfer Block SHOULD BE ENABLED to prevent an inadvertent Manual
Transfer. Conversely, when Manual Transfer Mode is selected (using an
external Automatic/Manual selector switch on the control panel), the
Automatic Transfer Block SHOULD NOT BE ENABLED. If an unexpected
event occurs, tripping the present source while the selector switch is in
the Manual position, and before a Manual Transfer is initiated, with the
only means of transfer blocked, the motor bus will begin to die. The decay
is so rapid that the operator will not be able to respond quickly enough
to initiate a transfer.

4–56
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-46 Automatic Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen

Automatic Transfer/86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)

The 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-46 that allows the
user to select an input that is used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an 86P Lockout relay.
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source
2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open, the transfer is blocked since the
breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer, the transfer is ignored. Since Automatic
Transfers can occur in either direction, a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

Automatic Transfer/86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)

The 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-46 that allows the
user to select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an 86P
Lockout relay.
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 2 to Source 1. If the
Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open, the transfer is blocked since
the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since
Automatic Transfers can occur in either direction, a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

Automatic Transfer/External Initiate (S1 to S2)

The External Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-46 that allows
the user to select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an
external 27 device.
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 1 to Source 2. If the
Source 2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open the transfer is blocked since
the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since
Automatic Transfers can occur in either direction a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

Automatic Transfer/External Initiate (S2 to S1)

The External Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-46 that allows
the user to select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an
external 27 device.
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 2 to Source 1. If the
Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open the transfer is blocked since
the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since
Automatic Transfers can occur in either direction a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

4–57
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/27B Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer

Initiate – The Setpoints dialog screen for the 27B function is also available from the Automatic
Transfer Settings Setup Tab.
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Save/Cancel – The Save selection (Figure 4-45)
saves the Automatic Transfer settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel,
returns the user to the previous open screen.

Automatic Transfer Initiation

The 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2), 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1), 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) or 27-
S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) will provide an internal single-shot initiate signal with a short pulse
lasting less than 10ms. This internal initiate signal will turn off even though the external input
contact is still high and latched.
For example, when the M‑4272 receives an external input command at 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to
S2) and the transfer is already blocked due to unhealthy voltage at the new standby source.
The Internal Transfer Initiate Signal expires and no transfer was initiated. When the healthy
voltage at the new standby source is restored later, even though an external input command
is still high, the M‑4272 relay’s internal single shot 86P-S1 initiating transfer command has
already turned off and no transfer is initiated.
For the continuous internal multi-shot automatic transfer initiation, use the M‑4272 ISSlogic
function to implement this special automatic transfer logic.
The internal initiate transfer signal in ISSlogic stays high as long as the Input contact
initiating a transfer is high (closed) and there are no blocking transfer conditions and block
transfer signals.
If the blocking transfer signal (such as unhealthy voltage at the new standby source or any
external block input signals) occurs before the Input contact initiating a transfer is activated,
the transfer is blocked and the internal initiate transfer signal is off. However, when the
blocking condition is released, the internal initiate transfer signal turns on immediately to
start a transfer process.
The ISSlogic section is described in detail later in this chapter.

Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer
The Fast Transfer tab (Figure 4-47) displays the settings for the Automatic Fast Transfer.
The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable or enable
the automatic fast transfer. This selection allows the Automatic Fast Transfer to be disabled
(or enabled) independent from the Automatic In-Phase, Residual and Fixed Time transfers.
Since the Fast Transfer is the most desirable type of transfer, this feature is typically used to
disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic
includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers. All transfers
are enabled at the same time with the decay of the motor bus voltage determining which
type of transfer is possible. This feature allows the user to disable the individual types of
transfers if desired.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit

The Delta Phase Angle Limit (Figure 4-47) can be set from 0.0 to 90.0 degrees. The Delta
Phase Angle is the angle between the voltages of the motor bus and the new source.
This setting cannot be disabled, the phase angle is always one of the parameters used to
determine if a fast transfer can be executed.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit (Figure 4-47) can be set from 0 to 60 volts. The Delta Voltage is the
voltage difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be disabled.
If it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a Fast Transfer.

4–58
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit

The Delta Frequency Limit (Figure 4-47) can be set from 0.2 to 2.0 Hz. The Delta Frequency
is the frequency difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can
be disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a
fast transfer.

Figure 4-47 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

Automatic Fast Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window (Figure 4-47) can be set from 1 to 10 cycles. The Time Window defines
the window of opportunity for a Fast Transfer. The Time Window starts when the transfer is
initiated and ends at the selected time limit. If a Fast Transfer has not been completed by the
end of this Time Window, then the Fast Transfer is disabled and will no longer attempted.
An In-Phase, Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still possible.
Closing command Time Delay is grayed out when Common Function Settings/Transfer
Mode is set to Sequential.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay

The time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer
method in Simultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close commands are normally
issued at the same time for Fast Transfer method in Simultaneous transfer mode, this time
delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-
make mode of operation (open transition).

Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button (Figure 4-47) opens the Blocking Inputs Selection
dialog screen (Figure 4-48). Any Input can be selected to block a Fast Transfer. When
other functions such as Transfer Block #1 are selected for these inputs it will be identified
next to that input.

4–59
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-48 Blocking Inputs Selection Screen

Automatic Fast Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-47) allows the user to select
one or more outputs (Figure 4-49) to indicate which output is to be used for Fast Transfer
Load Shedding.
The Fast Transfer Load Shedding command is sent at the same time as the Trip command
for either Simultaneous or Sequential modes of transfer.

Figure 4-49 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen

Automatic Fast Transfer Tab Save/Cancel

The Save selection (Figure 4-47) saves the Automatic Fast Transfer settings either to an
open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fast Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within limit
setting.
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• A transfer must be completed within the Fast Transfer time window of 1 to
10 cycles.

Automatic Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer
Figure 4-50, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer Settings found under the In-Phase
Transfer Tab on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen. The top right corner of the
display includes a command button that will disable or enable the automatic In-Phase
Transfer. This selection allows the automatic In-Phase Transfer to be disabled (or enabled)
independent from the Automatic Fast, Residual and Fixed Time Transfers.

4–60
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F,
Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and
Sequential Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time and the characteristics
of the motor bus voltage decay determines which type of transfer is possible. This feature
allows the user to disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 120 volts. The Delta Voltage is the voltage
difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be disabled. If it is
disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute an In-Phase Transfer.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit

The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.10 to 15.00 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the
frequency difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting cannot be
disabled. The frequency is always one of the parameters used to determine if an In‑Phase
Transfer can be executed.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window can be set from 10 to 600 cycles. The Time Window defines the window
of opportunity for a In-Phase Transfer. The time window starts when the transfer is initiated
and ends at the selected time limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not been completed by
the end of this time window then the In‑Phase Transfer is disabled and will no longer be
attempted. A Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still possible.

Figure 4-50 Automatic Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

4–61
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-48). Any Input can be selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When other functions
such as Transfer Block #1 are selected for these inputs it will be identified next to that input.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-50) allows the user to
select one or more outputs (Figure 4-51) to indicate which output is to be used for In-Phase
Transfer Load Shedding.

Figure 4-51 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen
The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding command is sent at the same time as the closing
command of In-Phase Transfer. The purpose of this load shedding output is to disconnect
some loads so there will be a better possibility of completing an In-Phase Transfer. There
may be a load that would cause the motor bus to decay very quickly if a Fast Transfer was
not successful and it would be better to disconnect that load so the rest of the motor bus
would have a better chance to complete an In-Phase transfer. Another purpose could be
to disconnect a very sensitive load, such as synchronous motors, if a Fast Transfer is not
possible.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Automatic In-Phase Transfer Tab settings either to an open
file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute an In‑Phase Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not been matched.
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Phase Angle between the motor bus and the new source is changing
and must enter the first phase coincidence (first zero degree crossing)
within the In-Phase Transfer time window (adjustable from 10 to 600 cycles).
• The In-Phase Transfer feature includes two programmable advanced
breaker closing times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers (Figure 4-32) to
coordinate the closing of the first phase coincidence. Programmable breaker
closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles.

4–62
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Automatic Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer
Figure 4-52, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer Settings found under the Residual
Voltage Transfer Tab on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen.
The Residual Voltage Transfer tab (Figure 4-52) displays the settings for the Residual Voltage
Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable
or enable the automatic Residual Voltage Transfer. This selection allows the automatic
Residual Voltage Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent from Automatic Fast,
In-Phase and Fixed Time Transfers.
Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix
F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and
Sequential Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time and the decay characteristic
of the motor bus voltage determines which type of transfer is possible. This allows the user
to disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Delay On Initiate

The Delay On Initiate can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This time delay defines the time period
the Residual Transfer is delayed after the initiate of the transfer.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit

The Residual Voltage limit can be set from 5 to 50 volts. When the motor bus voltage drops
below the Residual Voltage Limit, and if the Close Delay is set for 0 cycles, then the close
command is sent to the new source breaker. If the Close Delay is set to a value other than
zero, then the selected Load Shedding Output will be closed when the motor bus voltage
drops below the Residual Voltage Limit, and the close command will be sent after the Close
Delay setting is exceeded.
This setting cannot be disabled, it is always the parameter used as the condition to execute
a Residual Voltage Transfer. There is no Time Window for the Residual Voltage Transfer.
However, it must be completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Figure 4-52 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

4–63
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Close Delay

The Close Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. This time delay is for load shedding and
defines the time period from the moment the motor bus voltage decreases to less than the
Residual Voltage setting, until the close command is sent. This setting allows the feeder
breaker shedding the load, enough time to open before the motor bus is connected to the
new source. Typically if Load Shed on Voltage is disabled, this time delay is set for 2 cycles.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shed on Voltage

The Load Shed on Voltage can be set from 5 to 50 volts. When the motor bus voltage drops
below the Load Shed on Voltage setting, the load shedding output command is sent by
the selected output contact. This allows the load shedding voltage to be set independently
from the Residual Voltage Limit. This function can be enabled or disabled separately from
the Residual Voltage Limit. The Load Shed on Voltage setting must be 1 V higher than the
Residual Voltage Limit setting.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-48). Any Input can be selected to block a Residual Voltage Transfer. When an
input is selected, it is not grayed out in the other types of transfers.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-52) allows the
user to select one or more outputs (Figure 4-53) to indicate which output is to be used for
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding.
For Residual Voltage Transfer, the Load Shedding Output is closed when the motor bus
voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Limit setting, or the Load Shed on Voltage setting,
if enabled. The close command for Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed
close delay.

Figure 4-53 Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs Selection Screen

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer Tab settings either to
an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

The conditions that are necessary to execute a Residual Voltage Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not been matched.
• The conditions for an In-Phase Transfer have not been matched.
• The motor bus voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Transfer Limit
setting (adjustable from 5 to 50 V) within the Incomplete Transfer Lockout
Time Limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

4–64
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Automatic Transfer Settings/Fixed Time Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings/Fixed-Time Transfer
Figure 4-54, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer Settings found under the Fixed Time
Transfer Tab on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen.
The Fixed Time Transfer tab (Figure 4-54) displays the settings for the Automatic Fixed Time
Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable
or enable the Automatic Fixed Time Transfer. This selection allows the automatic Fixed
Time Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent from Automatic Fast, In‑Phase and
Residual Voltage transfers.
Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F,
Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and
Sequential Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time and the decay of the motor
bus voltage determines which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows the user to
disable the individual types of transfers if desired.
The Fixed Time Transfer is based only on Time Delay and does not use the Phase Angle,
Frequency or Voltage to supervise the closing of the new source breaker.

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Time Delay

The Time Delay setting can be set from 30 to 1000 cycles. When the conditions are met
for a Fixed Time Transfer the Time Delay starts timing. When the Time Delay times out, a
close command is sent to the Load Shedding Time Delay. When the Load Shedding Time
Delay times out the close command is sent to the new source breaker. No other parameters
are monitored.
If Fixed Time Transfer has been selected as a Load Shedding Function Selection in the
Common Settings (Figure 4-44), then the signal sent to the Load Shedding Output will be
true when the Fixed Time Transfer, Time Delay times out.
These settings cannot be disabled, they are the only parameters used as the condition
to execute a Fixed Time Transfer. There is no Time Window for the Fixed Time Transfer.
However, it must be completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Figure 4-54 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

4–65
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay

The Load Shedding Time Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. The Load Shedding Time
Delay defines the time period from when the Fixed Time Transfer, Time Delay times out
and when the close command is sent to the new source breaker.

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-48). Any Input can be selected to block a Fixed Time Transfer. When an input is
selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Automatic Fixed-Time Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The Fixed-Time Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-54) allows the user to
select one or more outputs (Figure 4-55) to indicate which output is to be used for Residual
Voltage Transfer Load Shedding.
For the Fixed Time Transfer, the Load Shedding Output is closed when the Fixed Time Delay
has timed out. The close command for the Fixed Time Transfer is sent after the programmed
load shedding time delay.

Figure 4-55 Fixed-Time Transfer Load Shedding Outputs Selection Screen

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Tab settings either to an open
file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fixed Time Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not been matched.
• The conditions for an In-Phase transfer have not been matched.
• The motor bus voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit setting
(adjustable from 5 to 50 V) within the incomplete transfer lockout time limit
setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

4–66
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS (MTS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings

The Manual Transfer Settings selection from the Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-31) opens
the Manual Transfer Settings Dialog screen (Figure 4-56), which includes the following tabs:
• Setup
• Fast Transfer
• In-Phase Transfer
• Residual Voltage Transfer
• Hot Parallel Transfer

Manual Transfer Enable/Disable from the HMI

To enable or disable Manual Transfer from the Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

a. Input the required Access Code, then press ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has been entered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Granted!

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

c. Go to Step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then the following is displayed:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

MANUAL TRANSFER
auto_xfer MAN_XFER

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

MANUAL TRANSFER
disable enable

6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton as necessary to enable or disable Manual
Transfer (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will be displayed:

MANUAL TRANSFER
auto_xfer MAN_XFER

8. The MBTS is now in the selected Manual Transfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary
to return to the Main Menu.

4–67
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Manual Transfer Settings Setup Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/Setup
Figure 4-56, illustrates the MBTS Manual Transfer Settings found under the Setup Tab on
the Manual Transfer Settings dialog screen.

Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer

The Manual Transfer Mode (Figure 4-56) can be Disabled or Enabled. If Disable is selected
and then Save is selected, then the remaining settings in the Manual Transfer Settings
dialog screen are grayed out. There are settings in the Common Settings that affect the
operation of the Manual Transfer.

Figure 4-56 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen

Manual Transfer Settings/External Control Input Configuration

The External Control Input Configuration portion of the Manual Transfer Settings dialog
screen (Figure 4-56) includes the following External Control Input configuration selections:
• Manual Transfer Block
• Manual Transfer Initiate

4–68
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Block

The Manual Transfer Block selection opens the Manual Transfer Block dialog screen
(Figure 4-57) that allows the user to select an input that is used to block Manual Transfers.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

▲▲ CAUTION: When the Manual Transfer Mode is selected (using an external Automatic/
Manual selector switch on the control panel), the Automatic Transfer Block
SHOULD NOT BE ENABLED. If an unexpected event occurs, tripping
the present source while the selector switch is in the Manual position,
and before a Manual Transfer is Initiated, with the only means of transfer
blocked, the motor bus will begin to die. The decay is so rapid that the
operator will not be able to respond quickly enough to initiate a transfer.
Conversely, when the Automatic Transfer Mode is selected (using an
external Automatic/Manual selector switch on the control panel), the
Manual Transfer Block SHOULD BE ENABLED to prevent an inadvertent
Manual Transfer.

Figure 4-57 Manual Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen

Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Initiate

The Manual Transfer Initiate opens a dialog screen (Figure 4-58) that allows the user to
select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Manual Transfers.
The selected input will initiate an Manual Transfer from Source 1 to Source 2 or from Source
2 to Source 1 depending on the breaker positions at that time. If the Source 1 breaker is
closed and the Source 2 breaker is open then the transfer will be from Source 1 to Source
2. If the Source 2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open then the transfer will
be from Source 2 to Source 1. The Manual Transfer does not have separate initiate inputs
for transferring in a specific direction; this is different from the automatic transfer initiate.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide
input selection since it has already been assigned.

Figure 4-58 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Settings Dialog Screen

Manual Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual Transfer Settings Tab either to an open file or to the
target MBTS. Cancel returns the user to the previous open screen.

4–69
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Manual Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer
The Fast Transfer tab (Figure 4-59) displays the settings for the Manual Fast Transfer. The
top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable or enable the
Manual Fast Transfer. This selection allows the Manual Fast Transfer to be disabled (or
enabled) independent from the In-Phase, Residual Voltage and Hot Parallel transfers.
Since the Fast Transfer is the most desirable type of transfer, this feature is typically used to
disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic
includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers. All transfers
are enabled at the same time with the decay of the motor bus voltage determining which
type of transfer is possible. This feature allows the user to disable the individual types of
transfers if desired.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit

The Delta Phase Angle Limit can be set from 0.0 to 90.0 degrees. The Delta Phase Angle
is the angle between the voltages of the motor bus and the new source. This setting cannot
be disabled, the phase angle is always one of the parameters used to determine if a fast
transfer can be executed.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 60 volts. The Delta Voltage is the voltage
difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be disabled. If it is
disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a Fast Transfer.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit

The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.02 to 2.0 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the
frequency difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be
disabled. If disabled, then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a fast transfer.

Figure 4-59 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

4–70
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Manual Fast Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window can be set from 1 to 10 cycles. The Time Window defines the window of
opportunity for a Fast Transfer. The Time Window starts when the transfer is initiated and
ends at the selected time limit. If a Fast Transfer has not been completed by the end of this
Time Window, then the Fast Transfer is disabled and will no longer be attempted. An In-
Phase, Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still possible.

Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay

The time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer
method in Simultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close command are normally
issued at the same time for Fast Transfer method in Simultaneous transfer mode, this time
delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-
make mode of operation (open transition).

Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-60). Any Input can be selected to block a Manual Fast Transfer. When an input
is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Figure 4-60 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Manual Fast Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-59) allows the user to select
one or more outputs (Figure 4-61) to indicate which output is to be used for Fast Transfer
Load Shedding.
The Fast Transfer Load Shedding command is sent at the same time as the Trip command
for either Simultaneous or Sequential modes of transfer.

Figure 4-61 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen

4–71
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Manual Fast Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual Fast Transfer settings to an open file or to the target
MBTS. Cancel returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Manual Fast Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within limit
setting.
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• A transfer must be completed within the Fast Transfer time window of 1 to
10 cycles.

Manual Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer
The In-Phase Transfer tab (Figure 4-62) displays the settings for the In-Phase Transfer.
The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable or enable
the automatic In-Phase Transfer. This selection allows the manual In-Phase transfer to be
disabled (or enabled) independent from the Manual Fast, Residual Voltage and Hot Parallel
Transfers.
Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix
F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and
Sequential Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time and the decay of the motor
bus voltage determines which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows the user to
disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 120 volts. The Delta Voltage is the voltage
difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be disabled. If it is
disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute an In-Phase Transfer.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit

The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.10 to 15.00 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the
frequency difference between the motor bus and the new source.
This setting cannot be disabled. The frequency is always one of the parameters used to
determine if a In-Phase Transfer can be executed.

4–72
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-62 Manual Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window can be set from 10 to 600 cycles. The Time Window defines the window
of opportunity for an In-Phase Transfer. The time window starts when the transfer is initiated
and ends at the selected time limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not been completed by
the end of this time window then the In‑Phase Transfer is disabled and will no longer be
attempted. A Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still possible.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-63). Any Input can be selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When an input is
selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Figure 4-63 In-Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

4–73
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Manual In-Phase Transfer/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-62) allows the user to
select one or more outputs (Figure 4-64) to indicate which output is to be used for In-Phase
Transfer Load Shedding.

Figure 4-64 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen
The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding command is sent at the same time as the closing
command of In-Phase Transfer. The purpose of this load shedding output is to disconnect
some loads so there will be a better possibility of completing an In-Phase Transfer. There
may be a load that would cause the motor bus to decay very quickly if a Fast Transfer was
not successful and it would be better to disconnect that load so the rest of the motor bus
would have a better chance to complete an In-Phase transfer. Another purpose could be
to disconnect a very sensitive load, such as synchronous motors, if a Fast Transfer is not
possible.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual In-Phase Transfer Tab settings either to an open file
or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute an In-Phase Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not been matched.
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Delta Frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The Phase Angle between the motor bus and the new source is changing
and must enter the first phase coincidence (first zero degree crossing)
within the In‑Phase Transfer time window (adjustable from 10 to 600 cycles).
The In‑Phase Transfer feature includes two programmable advanced
breaker closing times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers (Figure 4‑32) to
coordinate the closing of the first phase coincidence. Programmable breaker
closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles.

4–74
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Manual Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer
The Residual Voltage Transfer tab (Figure 4-65) displays the settings for the Residual
Voltage Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the Manual Residual Voltage Transfer. This selection allows the Manual
Residual Voltage Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent from Manual Fast, In-
Phase and Hot Parallel Transfers.
Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix
F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and
Sequential Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time and the decay of the motor
bus voltage determines which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows the user to
disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Delay On Initiate

The Delay On Initiate can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This time delay defines the time period
the Residual Transfer is delayed after the initiate of the transfer.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit

The Residual Voltage limit can be set from 5 to 50 volts. When the motor bus voltage drops
below the Residual Voltage Limit, and if the Close Delay is set for 0 cycles, then the close
command is sent to the new source breaker. If the Close Delay is set to a value other than
zero, then the selected Load Shedding Output will be closed when the motor bus voltage
drops below the Residual Voltage Limit, and the close command will be sent after the Close
Delay setting is exceeded.
This setting cannot be disabled, it is always the parameter used as the condition to execute
a Residual Voltage Transfer. There is no Time Window for the Residual Voltage Transfer.
However, it must be completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Figure 4-65 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

4–75
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Close Delay

The Close Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. This time delay is for load shedding and
defines the time period from the moment the motor bus voltage decreases to less than the
Residual Voltage setting, until the close command is sent. This setting allows the feeder
breaker shedding the load, enough time to open before the motor bus is connected to the
new source. Typically if Load Shed on Voltage is disabled, this time delay is set for 2 cycles.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shed on Voltage

The Load Shed on Voltage can be set from 5 to 50 volts. When the motor bus voltage drops
below the Load Shed on Voltage setting, the load shedding output command is sent by
the selected output contact. This allows the load shedding voltage to be set independently
from the Residual Voltage Limit. This function can be enabled or disabled separately from
the Residual Voltage Limit. The Load Shed on Voltage setting must be 1 V higher than the
Residual Voltage Limit setting.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-66). Any Input can be selected to block a Residual Voltage Transfer. When an
input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Figure 4-66 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

The Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-65) allows the
user to select one or more outputs (Figure 4-67) to indicate which output is to be used for
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding.
For Residual Voltage Transfer, the Load Shedding Output is closed when the motor bus
voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Limit setting, or the Load Shed on Voltage setting,
if enabled. The close command for Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed
close delay.

Figure 4-67 Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs Selection Screen

4–76
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Tab settings either to an
open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Residual Voltage Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not been matched.
• The conditions for an In-Phase Transfer have not been matched.
• The motor bus voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Transfer Limit
setting (adjustable from 5 to 50 V) within the Incomplete Transfer Lockout
Time Limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

Manual Transfer Settings/Hot Parallel Transfer Tab

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/Hot Parallel Transfer
The Hot Parallel Transfer tab (Figure 4-68) displays the settings for the Hot Parallel Transfer.
The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will disable or enable
the Manual Hot Parallel Transfer. Whenever the Hot Parallel Transfer is enabled the Manual
Fast, In-phase and Residual Transfers are disabled. Only when the Hot Parallel Transfer is
disabled can the Manual Fast, In-phase and Residual Transfers be enabled.
The Hot Parallel Transfer is typically used to transfer the motor load back to the original
source after an Automatic Transfer has been completed and the conditions that caused it
to occur have been resolved. This transfer operates differently than all the other transfers,
in that it closes the breaker to the new source first and then opens the breaker to the old
source. This allows for a bumpless transfer since the motor bus is never disconnected
from a source. The Hot Parallel transfer is only performed when the bus and new source
conditions are stable.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit

The Delta Phase Angle Limit can be set from 0.0 to 90.0 degrees. The delta angle is the
angle between the voltages of the motor bus and the new source. This setting cannot be
disabled. The phase angle is always one of the parameters used to determine if a Hot
Parallel Transfer can be executed.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 60 volts. The delta voltage is the voltage
difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be disabled and if it
is disabled, then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a Hot Parallel transfer.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit

The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.02 to 0.5 hertz. The delta frequency is the
frequency difference between the motor bus and the new source. This setting can be
disabled and if it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a
Hot Parallel Transfer.

4–77
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-68 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Dialog Screen

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-69). Any Input can be selected to block a Hot Parallel Transfer.

Figure 4-69 Hot Parallel Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window can be set from 1 to 50 cycles. The Time Window defines the window of
opportunity for a Hot Parallel Transfer. The Time Window starts when the transfer is initiated
and ends at the selected time limit. If a Hot Parallel Transfer has not been completed by
the end of this Time Window, then the Hot Parallel Transfer is disabled and will no longer
be attempted and an Incomplete Transfer alarm will be set.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping Command Time Delay

The Tripping Command Time Delay can be set from 0 to 30 cycles. The Tripping Command
Time Delay is the time from when the new source breaker closes until the old source breaker
is tripped. This time defines how long the two sources are paralleled. This time setting should
be set as short as possible to limit the amount of time the motor bus would be exposed to
double fault currents.

4–78
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual Hot Parallel Transfer settings either to an open file or
to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Hot Parallel Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is within limit
setting.
• The delta voltage between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• The delta frequency between the motor bus and the new source is within
limit setting.
• A transfer must be completed within the Hot Parallel Transfer time window
of 1 to 50 cycles.

AT – AUTO TRIP AFTER EXTERNAL BREAKER CLOSE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Auto Trip

The Auto Trip selection from the Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-31) opens the Auto Trip
Dialog screen (Figure 4-71).
If an external operation closes the second breaker while leaving the first one closed, and
if the Auto Trip feature is enabled, the MBTS will trip the breaker that was originally closed
within an adjustable time delay (0 to 50 Cycles in increments of 0.5 Cycle) after the second
breaker is closed.
The Auto Trip operates in either direction to allow external parallel transfer but prohibit
inadvertent parallel operation. It must be noted that the external operation that closes the
second breaker must be supervised by means that are external to the motor bus transfer
system. Auto Trip is not a transfer, the only command sent is a trip command after the time
delay and no other parameters are used to supervise this operation.
For example, in an application where there are two MBTS units connected in a main-tie-main
configuration (see Figure 4-72) it is recommended to disable the Auto Trip feature. In this
configuration both units can operate a common tie breaker. If one unit transfers by tripping
its main breaker and closing the tie breaker, then the other unit would now see both of its
breakers closed. Depending on the breaker selected in the Auto Trip feature this unit would
trip either its main breaker and both motor buses would be disconnected or it would trip
its tie breaker that was just closed, disconnecting the motor bus of the unit that originally
transferred. Neither of these situations is desirable!

Auto Trip/Enable/Disable
In the top right corner of the screen is a command button that will Disable or Enable the
Auto Trip feature.

Auto Trip/Breaker Trip Option

The Breaker Trip Option allows the selection of which breaker to trip when both breakers
are closed. The selections include the "Just Closed Breaker" or "Originally Closed Breaker".
Typically the Originally Closed Breaker is tripped to allow an external Hot Parallel Transfer.

Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay

The Tripping Command Time Delay allows the user to delay (0 to 50 cycles) sending the
selected Breaker Trip Option.

4–79
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection

The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
(Figure 4-70). Any Input can be selected to block an Auto Trip. When an input is selected,
it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Figure 4-70 Auto Trip Blocking Input Selection Dialog Screen

Auto Trip Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Auto Trip settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS.
Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Figure 4-71 Auto Trip Settings Dialog Screen

4–80
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)

VS1 VS1

VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4272 M-4272 I S1

IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2

52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2

VT-B1 VT-B2

BUS-TIE
STATION BUS SYSTEM BUS 1 BUS 2
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2

M M M M

Figure 4-72 Main-Tie-Main Application Example

FUNCTION SETTINGS
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints
The Function Settings Group (Figure 4-31) includes following functions:
• 27B Bus Undervoltage
• 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure
• 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure
• S1BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)
• S2BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)
• 50S1 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection
• 50S2 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection
• 81 Bus Frequency
• 81R Bus ROCOF
• TCM Trip Circuit Monitor
• CCM Close Circuit Monitor
• 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss
• ISSL ISSlogic

4–81
M‑4272 Instruction Book

27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/27B
The 27B Bus Undervoltage selection from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-31) opens
the Bus Undervoltage Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 4-73). The dialog screen includes
the following tabs:
• 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)
• 27B #2 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)
• 27B #3 Bus Undervoltage
• 27B #4 Bus Undervoltage

27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)

Figure 4-73 displays the settings for the 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate
(S1 to S2) function.
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function. This selection allows the 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic
Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) to be disabled (or enabled) independent from the 27B #2 Bus
Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1), 27B #3 Bus Undervoltage or the 27B #4
Bus Undervoltage.
Pickup – The 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) function Pickup
(5 to 120 Volts) initiates a transfer from Source 1 to Source 2 based on an undervoltage
condition on the motor bus. However, it can be programmed to operate any available output.
Voltage Inhibit – When enabled, the Voltage Inhibit (5 to 120 Volts) is used to block the 27B
Function when the motor bus voltage is below this setting. Voltage Inhibit is needed when
the MBTS is initially energized or when the bus phase voltage is temporarily not applied to
the unit. The Voltage Inhibit Function may be disabled or enabled.
The 27B #1 Function settings used to initiate an Automatic Transfer must be coordinated with any
voltage dip that may occur when large motors are started. The 27B #1 Function should not initiate
a transfer when a large motor is being started. The voltage dip caused by a large motor starting
can be as much as 10 volts and last from several seconds up to 3 or 4 seconds.
Time Delay – A Time Delay (1 to 8160 cycles) can be applied to delay the Bus Undervoltage
Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) start.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic
Transfer Initiate Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-74) that allows any input
or the Fuse Loss (FLB) function to be selected to block the 27B #1 function. The 27B #1
function can also be used to activate a selected output when it times out.
Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the 27 Bus Undervoltage settings either to an
open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

27B #2 Bus Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)

The 27B #2 Bus Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1) is used to initiate a transfer from
Source 2 to Source 1 based on an undervoltage condition on the motor bus. In all other
respects it is the same as the 27B #1.

27B #3 and 27B #4 Bus Undervoltage

The 27B #3 and 27B #4 are general purpose Bus Undervoltage functions. They have the
same settings and I/O selections as 27B #1 and 27B #2 except they are not predefined to
initiate transfers. These functions could be used for load shedding, tripping or as an alarm.

4–82
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-73 Function Settings Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Setpoints
Screen

Figure 4-74 27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate Inputs/Outputs Selection Screen

4–83
M‑4272 Instruction Book

50BF #1 SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#1
The 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure selection from the Function Settings group
(Figure 4-31) opens the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure dialog screen (Figure 4-75).
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function.
Pickup Current – A breaker failure condition is detected by the continued presence of
current after a trip command has been sent to the Source 1 breaker. If the current is greater
than the Pickup Current setting for the time period of the Time Delay setting after the trip
command is sent, then the breaker failure alarm indicated.
If the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings Figure 4-31), then
the breaker that was just closed is tripped open to prevent the New Source from continuing
to be connected through the failed breaker to the Old Source that could have a fault.
If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings Figure 4-31), then
a close command will not be sent since the breaker status would indicate that the tripped
breaker did not open. Since the transfer could not be completed the Incomplete Transfer
Lockout timer would time out and generate a lockout condition.
Time Delay – The time period (1 to 30 cycles) after the Pickup Current setting is exceeded
at which point the Breaker Failure Alarm is actuated.

QQ NOTE: To have 50BF #1 Function working properly, the time delay should not be set
longer than the trip S1 breaker command’s pulse width/duration.

I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure
Outputs/Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-77). This screen allows any
input to be selected to block the 50BF #1 Function. The 50BF #1 Function can also be used
to activate a selected output when it times out.
I/O Initiate – The I/O Initiate button opens the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Initiate
Inputs/Initiate Outputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-78). This screen allows the
selection of outputs or inputs that can be used to initiate a breaker failure. Any of the outputs
can also be selected to initiate a breaker failure. Figure 4-76 illustrates the logic combinations
that can be implemented.
Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure settings
either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open
screen.

Figure 4-75 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen

4–84
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Trip S1 (S2) Breaker

Command

Output Initiate OR

Input Initiate

AND Delay Trip Signal

DFT Current > PU

Figure 4-76 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram

Figure 4-77 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure I/O Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-78 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Outputs/Inputs Initiate Selection Dialog Screen

4–85
M‑4272 Instruction Book

50BF #2 SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#2
The 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure selection from the Function Settings group
(Figure 4-31) opens the 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure dialog screen (Figure 4-79).
The 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Function includes the same features as 50BF #1
except that it monitors for a breaker failure of the Source 2 breaker and Output 1 for Trip
S1 is the default output setting.

S1 BF SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE (BREAKER STATUS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S1 BF
The S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) selection from the Function Settings
group (Figure 4-31) opens the S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) dialog
screen (Figure 4-80).
The Source 1 breaker status inputs are monitored for breaker failure. The Source 1 breaker
is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within the programmable
time after a trip command is issued.
When the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings (Figure 4-32),
and a breaker failure occurs on Source 1 that should have tripped, the breaker that was
just closed will be tripped. This prevents the New Source from continuing to be connected
through the failed breaker to the old source that may be faulted.
If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings (Figure 4-32), then
a close command will not be sent since the breaker status would indicate that the tripped
breaker did not open. Since the transfer could not be completed, the Incomplete Transfer
Lockout timer would time out and generate a lockout condition.
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function.
Time Delay – (0 to 30 cycles) The Source 1 breaker is considered failed when the breaker
status has not changed state within the programmable time after a trip command is issued.

QQ NOTE: To have S1BF Function working properly, the time delay should not be set
longer than the trip S2 breaker command’s pulse width/duration.

I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure Outputs
Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-81). This screen allows any input to be
selected to block the S1 BF Function. The S1 BF Function can also be used to activate a
selected output when it times out.
Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker
Status) settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.

S2 BF SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE (BREAKER STATUS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S2 BF
The S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) selection from the Function Settings
group (Figure 4-31) opens the S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) dialog screen
(Figure 4-82). The S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure Function includes the same features as
S1 BF except that it monitors for a breaker failure of the Source 2 breaker.

4–86
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-79 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen

Figure 4-80 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen

Figure 4-81 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) I/O Selection Dialog Screen

4–87
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-82 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen

60FLB BUS VT FUSE LOSS

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/60FL
The 60FLB Bus VT Fuse Loss selection from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-31) opens
the 60FLB Bus VT Fuse Loss dialog screen (Figure 4-84).
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function.

QQ NOTE: When the 60FLB function is disabled, it will only disable the Block All Transfers
or Block All Transfers Except Fixed Time Transfer in the Bus VT Fuse Loss
Condition. The status of the Fuse Loss (FLB) Input is still active in all other
functions, such as 27B1, 27B2, 27B3, 27B4, etc.

Delta Voltage Pickup – The 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss condition is detected by comparing
either the Three-Phase voltage of the motor bus to the Three-Phase voltage of the connected
source (VT’s in Three-Phase connection) or the Single Phase voltage of the motor bus
to the Single Phase voltages of the connected source (VT’s in single phase connection):
• Phase A to Phase A
• Phase B to Phase B
• Phase C to Phase C

Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss function
output.
Bus VT Fuse Loss Condition – When the difference in voltage between the bus and the
connected source (with connected source breaker in closed position) is present for the time
delay, the MBTS will respond based on the selection to either Block Transfer or perform an
automatic Fixed Time Transfer when a transfer is initiated. Since the bus voltage cannot
be observed the only possible transfer that could be performed is the Fixed Time Transfer.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss I/O Selection
Dialog Screen (Figure 4-83) that allows any input to be selected to block the 60FLB Function.
The 60FLB Function can also be used to activate a selected output when it times out.
The Fuse-loss (FL) function is activated immediately with NO time delay when the Bus
VT fuse loss condition is detected. The FL function is still operated internally according to
the Delta Voltage Pickup setting of the 60FLB function even though the 60FLB function is
DISABLED.

4–88
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-83 60FLB Bus VT Fuse-Loss Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-84 60FLB Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog Screen

81 BUS FREQUENCY

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81
Figure 4-86 displays the settings for the 81 #1 Bus Frequency function. The settings for the
81 #2 Bus Frequency are the same as the 81 #1.
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function. This selection allows the 81 #1 Bus Frequency to be disabled
(or enabled) independent from the 81 #2 Bus Frequency.
Pickup – The 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function detects a drop in frequency of the motor
bus. If the frequency is less than the Pickup setting (50.00 to 67.00 Hz) or (40.00 to 57.00
Hz for 50 Hz unit) for a time period that exceeds the Time Delay setting, then an 81 #1 or
81 #2 will be indicated and an output can be activated.
The 81 #1 function can be used for load shedding. The 81 Function is automatically disabled
when the bus phase voltage input is less than 5 to 15 V (Positive Sequence) based on the
frequency, or less than 5 V (Single Phase).
Time Delay – A Time Delay (5 to 65500 cycles) can be applied to delay the Bus Frequency
output.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the 81 #1 Bus Frequency I/O Selection
Dialog Screen (Figure 4-85) that allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FLB) function to be
selected to block the 81 #1(2) Function. The 81 #1(2) Function can also be used to activate
a selected output when it times out.

4–89
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function Dialog
Screen settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.

Figure 4-85 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-86 81 #1(2) Bus Frequency Function Dialog Screen

81R BUS ROCOF (Rate Of Change Of Frequency)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81R
Figure 4-88 displays the settings for the 81R #1 Bus ROCOF function. The settings for the
81R #2 Bus ROCOF are the same as the 81R #1.

QQ NOTE: Bus VT configuration must be set to Three-Phase to enable the 81R Bus
ROCOF Function.

Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function. This selection allows the 81R #1 Bus ROCOF to be disabled
(or enabled) independent from the 81R #2.
Pickup – The 81R Bus Rate of Change of Frequency (ROCOF) function is used to
detect the rate of change of the frequency of the motor bus as it decays. When the bus is
disconnected from the original source the frequency begins to decrease and the longer the
bus is disconnected the faster the frequency changes. This function is used to recognize
that the ROCOF has exceeded the Pickup setting.

4–90
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

QQ NOTE: Setting the Pickup to a minimum value of 0.2 Hz/sec is recommended when
using nominal frequencies.

This function is typically used for load shedding. If a load that is causing the frequency to
change quickly can be disconnected, then a transfer may still be possible. The 81R Function
is automatically disabled during unbalanced faults and other disturbances.
Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the 81R Bus ROCOF function output.
The time delay and magnitude settings of the 81R should be based on simulation studies.
Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit – The function uses the negative sequence voltage
to block the 81R.
Increasing Frequency – The Increasing Frequency can be selected as either Enable or
Disable. When the Increasing Frequency is selected to Disable, the 81R function detects
the rate of change of frequency of the motor bus voltage in the decreasing direction only,
and the 81R function is blocked to detect the increasing direction. When the Increasing
Frequency is selected to Enable, the 81R function detects the rate of change of frequency
of the motor bus voltage in both the increasing and decreasing directions.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the 81R Bus ROCOF I/O Selection Dialog
Screen (Figure 4-87) that allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FLB) function to be selected
to block the 81R #1(2) Function. The 81R #1(2) Function can also be used to activate a
selected output when it times out.

Figure 4-87 81R #1(2) ROCOF Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the 81R #1(2) Bus ROCOF Function Dialog
Screen settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.

Figure 4-88 81R #1(2) ROCOF Function Dialog Screen

4–91
M‑4272 Instruction Book

ISSL (ISSLOGIC)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL
Figure 4-89 displays the settings for the ISSL (ISSLogic) function. The settings for the ISSL
#2 through 6 are the same as the ISSL #1.
The MBTS provides six logic functions and associated ISSLogic. The logic functions can
be used to allow external devices to trip through the MBTS, providing additional target
information for the external device. More importantly, these functions can be used in
conjunction with ISSLogic to expand the capability of the MBTS by allowing the user to
define customized operating logic.

Enable/Disable – The top right corner of each ISSlogic tab includes a command button
that will disable or enable the function. This selection allows the ISSL #1 (ISSlogic) to be
disabled (or enabled) independent from the ISSL #2, #3, #4, #5 and #6.

ISSLogic Settings and Logic Functions

ISSlogic includes six Initiating Input sources:
• Initiating Outputs
• Initiating Function Time Out
• Initiating Function Pickup (including the ISSLogic Functions themselves)
• Initiating Inputs
• Initiating System Status
• Initiation using the Communication Point

The only limitation is that an ISSLogic Function may not be used to initiate itself.
• There are three Blocking Input sources:
• Blocking Inputs
• Block System Status
• Blocking using the Communication Point

The activation state of the input function selected in the Initiating Function can be either
Timeout (Trip) or Pickup. The desired Time Delay for security considerations can be obtained
in the ISSLogic Function Time Delay setting.
The ISSLogic Function can be programmed to perform any or all of the following tasks:
• Change the Active Setting Profile
• Close an Output Contact
• Be activated for use as an input to another ISSLogic Function
• Initiate a transfer
• Block a transfer

4–92
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-89 ISSLogic Function Dialog Screen

4–93
M‑4272 Instruction Book

ISSLogic Function Setup

To setup an ISSLogic Function perform the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL.
ISSLogic will display the ISSLogic Function dialog screen (Figure 4-89).
2. From the top right corner of the screen select the desired ISSL tab, then select
Enable.
3. If desired select the Initiating Outputs button. ISSLogic will display the Initiating
Outputs Selection screen (Figure 4-90).
a. Select the desired Initiating Outputs, then select OK.
b. Select the desired Initiating Output Logic Function (AND/OR).

Figure 4-90 Selection Screen for Initiating Outputs

4. If desired select the Initiating Function Timeout button. ISSLogic will display the
Initiating Function Timeout Selection screen (Figure 4-91).
5. Select the desired Initiating Function Timeout, then select OK.
6. If desired select the Initiating Function Pickup button. ISSLogic will display the
Initiating Function Pickup Selection screen (Figure 4-92).
7. Select the desired Initiating Function Pickup, then select OK.

Figure 4-91 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout

4–94
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-92 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup

8. If desired select the Initiating System Status button. ISSLogic will display the
Initiating System Status Selection screen (Figure 4-93).
9. Select the desired Initiating System Status selection(s), then select OK.
10. Select the desired Logic Function (AND/OR/NOR/NAND). The selected Logic
Function (AND/OR/NOR/NAND) will apply only to the Initiating Function Timeout
Selection(s), Initiating Function Pickup Selection(s) and Initiating System Status
Selection(s). The selected Logic Function will ignore the functions and System
Status that are not selected.

4–95
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-93 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status

11. If desired select the "Initiate via Communication Point" check box.
12. If desired select Initiating Input button. ISSLogic will display the Initiating Input
Selection screen (Figure 4-94).

Figure 4-94 Selection Screen for Initiating Inputs

13. Select the desired Initiating Input(s), then select OK.
14. Select the desired Initiating Inputs Logic Function (AND/OR).
15. If desired select Blocking Inputs button. ISSLogic will display the Blocking Inputs
Selection screen (Figure 4-95).

4–96
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

Figure 4-95 Selection Screen for Blocking Inputs

16. Select the desired Blocking Input(s), then select OK.
17. If desired select Block System Status button. ISSLogic will display the Block System
Status Selection screen (Figure 4-96).
18. Select the desired Block System Status(s), then select OK.
19. Select the desired Blocking Inputs/Block System Status Logic Function (AND/
OR). The selected Blocking Inputs/Blocking System Status Logic Function (AND/
OR) will apply only to the selected Blocking Input(s) and Blocking System Status
Selection(s); the selected Logic Function will ignore the Inputs and System Status
that are not selected.
20. If desired select the "Block via Communication point". Select Check Box.
21. Select the desired Time Delay.
QQ NOTE: The DO/RST Timer is described in detail in the "Dropout/Reset Timer Feature"
later in this section.

22. Select the desired DO/RST Delay.

23. Select either Dropout Timer or Reset Timer.
QQ NOTE: The ISSlogic Profile Switch feature is described in detail in the "Change Active
Profile (ISSLogic)" later in this section.

24. Determine if Profile Switching will be active and proceed as follows:

a. If Profile Switching will not be activated, then select "Not Activated".
b. If Profile Switching will be activated then select the desire profile.

25. Select the desired Outputs.

26. Determine if a transfer or transfer block will be initiated and proceed as follows:
a. If a transfer or transfer block will not be initiated, then select "No Transfer
Initiate".
b. If a transfer or transfer block will be Initiated then select the desire function.

27. Select Save, ISSlogic will return to the System Setpoints Dialog Screen
(Figure 4-31).
ISSL #1 is now setup, the remaining ISSL selections can be setup as desired.

Change Active Profile (ISSLogic)

To change the active profile simply select the desired profile. The "Not activated" selection
means the profile will not be changed. If the presently active profile is selected as the profile
to which to change there is effectively no change since it would change to the same profile.
When an ISSLogic Function is enabled and the logic becomes "true" the ISS# is always
activated so it could be used as an initiating input to any other ISSLogic.
Since there are six ISSLogic Functions per setting profile, depending on the number of
different MBTS settings defined, the scheme may provide up to 24 different logic schemes.

4–97
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-96 Selection Screen for Block System Status

4–98
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature

The DO/RST timer can be set as either Dropout or Reset mode. The operation of the Dropout
Delay Timer and the Reset Delay Timer are described below.

Dropout Delay Timer

The Dropout Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure 4-97. The Dropout Delay Timer feature
allows the user to affect an output time delay that starts when the ISSLogic PU Status drops
out (A) and can hold the Output (D) status true beyond the Output Seal In Delay value (C).
However, the Seal In Delay (E) may hold the Output (B) true if the time after ISSLogic PU
Status dropout (A) and Dropout Delay Timer value (D) are less than the Seal In Delay time (E).

Reset Delay Timer

The Reset Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure 4-98. The Reset Delay Timer feature
allows the user to delay the reset of the PU Time Delay Timer and hold the accumulated
timer value (A) for the duration of the Reset Time Delay time period (B). The Reset Delay
Timer starts when the ISSLogic PU Status drops out (C).
If the ISSLogic PU Status remains dropped out (D) after the reset delay has timed out, then
the ISSLogic PU timer value will be reset to zero (E).
If the ISSLogic PU Status reasserts (F) while the Reset Delay Timer is still timing, then the
PU Timer Delay begins timing from the accumulated value (G).

Dropout Delay Timer

25 35
Cycles
ISSLogic Functions (1 - 6)
PU Status

PU Time Delay
Setting (30) Seal in Delay

Seal in Delay E
PU Time Delay Timing Dropout Delay

B
Output
A C D

Figure 4-97 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram

Reset Delay Timer

25 12 25 8 5 10
Cycles

ISSLogic Functions (1 - 6) D
C F
PU Status
Reset Reset
Reset Delay
B Delay Delay
PU Time Delay
10 Cycles

Setting (30)
A G
Seal In
PU Time Delay Timing Timer

E
Output

Figure 4-98 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram

4–99
 R
ISSLogic Functions

4–100
Initiating Outputs This section of ISSLogic
used to activate the desired Output
This section of ISSLogic initiates
the Function Operation
Outputs
Block
Transfer

Selectable And/Or
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Initiating Function Initiate

Transfer
Programmable
function(s)
(Incl. ISSLogic Selectable And/Or
and System
Status) Programmed Programmed
Time Delay Profile
Selectable And/Or/Nor/Nand Settings
Groups 1-4

Figure 4-99
Selectable And/Or 0-65,500 cycles
(1091sec at
60Hz)
Programmed
Outputs 5-16

Initiating Inputs Log in

Sequence of
Events

Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input

ISSLogic # N
Selectable And/Or Activated

Initiate Via

ISSLogic Function Diagram

Communication
Point

Log Pickup in
Sequence of
Events
Blocking Inputs
This section of ISSLogic is used
to Block the Function Operation
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input

Selectable And/Or
Block Via
Communication
Point
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

CCM (CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/CCM
Figure 4-102 displays the settings for the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) function. The settings
for the CCM #2 Close Circuit Monitor are the same as the CCM #1.
The CCM inputs are provided for monitoring the continuity of the close circuits. The inputs
can be used for nominal close coil voltages of 24 Vdc to 250 Vdc. Close circuit monitoring is
performed in the active breaker status only. Both the DC supply and continuity for the circuit
is monitored. If a close coil is detected as being open for the time delay then transfers are
blocked.
The M-4272 Close Coil Monitor will block all transfers and illuminate the appropriate alarm
LED on the unit front panel when all of the following conditions exist:
• The M-4272 CCM is connected to the target close coil circuit.
• The CCM Function is enabled.
• An open condition has been detected in the close coil circuit for the duration
of the Time Delay.

The M-4272 CCM Function is comprised of two elements; the close coil circuit open detection
circuit element and the block all transfers element. The close coil circuit open detection circuit
will illuminate the alarm LED even when the M-4272 is not physically connected to the close
coil circuit. When the M-4272 is not connected to the close coil circuit, then the appropriate
CCM alarm LED on the unit front panel should be labeled as necessary to identify the alarm
as not valid. With the M-4272 connected to the close coil circuit the CCM Function must be
enabled in order for the M-4272 to block all transfers. If the M-4272 is not connected to the
close coil circuit, there is no effect on transfer operation.
The output of the Close Circuit Monitoring function can be programmed as an alarm to alert
maintenance personnel.
CCM Connection Considerations – External connections for the Close Circuit Monitoring
function are shown in Figure 4-100, Figure 4-101 and also Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
The default Close Circuit Monitor input voltage is 250 Vdc. See Section 5.4, Circuit Board
Switches and Jumpers, (Table 5-4 for CCM#1, Table 5-6 for CCM#2) for other available
close circuit input voltage selections.
Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. recommends that the M-4272 CCM circuit be connected directly
to the close coil, bypassing the anti-pump "Y" relay portion of the close circuit as illustrated
in Figure 4-100.
The type of anti-pump "Y" relay that is often found within the close coil circuit is generally a
high impedance type, such as an IDEC RR Series Power Relay. The relay coil resistance is
high (approximately 8.5 to 10K Ohms), and it’s rated pickup current is 11 to 13 mA, ± 15%
at 20° C. However, the relay’s dropout voltage is approximately 10 to 15% of rated 110 Vdc
voltage. Therefore, the anti-pump relay may be held up and would not drop out until the
leakage current is reduced to approximately 2 mA.

▲▲ CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272 Close Coil Monitor (CCM) in parallel with other
relay CCMs in the close coil circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is not
bypassed may not provide reliable breaker closing operations.

If the close coil circuit configuration does not support connecting the CCM directly to the
close coil (Figure 4-101), then Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. does not recommend connecting
the M-4272 CCM in parallel with other relay CCMs. If two or more CCMs are connected to
the close coil circuit, there is a high probability that the anti-pump "Y" coil will not drop out.
Therefore, only one CCM, either a M-4272 or other relay should be used in the close coil
circuit to provide reliable breaker closing operation.
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function. This selection allows the CCM #1 (Close Circuit Monitor) to
be disabled (or enabled) independent from the CCM #2.

4–101
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) function
output.
Dropout Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the reset of the CCM (Close
Circuit Monitor) function output.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) I/O Selection
Dialog Screen (Figure 4-103) that allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function to be
selected to block the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor). The CCM #1(2) Function can also be
used to activate a selected output when it times out.
Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog
Screen settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.

M-4272

Close Circuit
-
Monitoring Input Station
+ Battery
+
Output Other
Contact Contacts

Legend
Y LS Y

Y Y
Anti-pump relay prevents reclosing
on a sustained close command. LS

LCS

A spring charge limit switch shown

LS 52b
with breaker closing spring discharged.
52
Y Close
Coil
LCS Latch check switch, closed when latch
is reset.
-
Figure 4-100 Recommended Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration

4–102
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

M-4272
Station
+ +
Battery
Close Circuit

-
Monitoring Input

Output Other
Contact Contacts

Legend
Y LS 52b

Y Y
Anti-pump relay prevents reclosing
on a sustained close command. LS

LCS

A spring charge limit switch shown

Y
LS with breaker closing spring discharged.
52
Y Close
Coil
LCS Latch check switch, closed when latch
is reset.
-
Figure 4-101 Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration With Anti-pump Relay Not Bypassed

Figure 4-102 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen

4–103
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-103 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

TCM (TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/TCM
Figure 4-105 displays the settings for the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) function. The settings
for the TCM #2 Trip Circuit Monitor are the same as the TCM #1.
Enable/Disable – The top right corner of the display includes a command button that will
disable or enable the function. This selection allows the TCM #1 (Trip Circuit Monitor) to be
disabled (or enabled) independent from the TCM #2.
The TCM inputs are provided for monitoring the continuity of the trip circuits. The inputs can be
used for nominal trip coil voltages of 24 Vdc to 250 Vdc. Trip circuit monitoring is performed in
the active breaker status only. Both the DC supply and continuity for the circuit is monitored.
If a trip coil is detected as being open for the time delay then transfers are blocked.
External connections for the Trip Circuit Monitoring function are shown in Figure 4-104,
Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6. The default Trip Circuit Monitor input voltage is 250 Vdc. See
Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, (Table 5-3 for TCM#1, Table 5-5 for
TCM#2) for other available trip circuit input voltage selections.
When the Output Contact is open, and continuity exists in the Trip Circuit, a small current
flows that activates the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the Trip Circuit is open, and the output
contact is open, no current flows and the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input is deactivated. An
Output Contact that is welded closed would also cause the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input to
deactivate, indicating failure of the Output Contact.
When the Output Contact is closed, no current flows in the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the
M‑4272 has issued a trip command to close the Output Contact and Trip Circuit Monitoring
Input remains activated, this is an indication that the Output Contact failed to close.
The output of the Trip Circuit Monitoring function can be programmed as an alarm to alert
maintenance personnel.

4–104
 System Setup and Setpoints – 4

The M-4272 Trip Coil Monitor (TCM) will block all transfers and illuminate the appropriate
alarm LED on the unit front panel when all of the following conditions exist:
• The M-4272 TCM is connected to the target trip coil circuit.
• The TCM Function is enabled.
• An open condition has been detected in the trip coil circuit for the duration
of the Time Delay.

M-4272
Station
+ +
Battery
Trip Circuit

-
Monitoring Input

Output Other
Contact Contacts

52a
52
Trip
Coil

Figure 4-104 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input

-
The M-4272 TCM Function is comprised of two elements; the trip coil circuit open detection
circuit element and the block all transfers element. The trip coil circuit open detection circuit
will illuminate the alarm LED even when the M-4272 is not physically connected to the trip
coil circuit. When the M-4272 is not connected to the trip coil circuit, then the appropriate
TCM alarm LED on the unit front panel should be labeled as necessary to identify the alarm
as not valid.
With the M-4272 connected to the trip coil circuit the TCM Function must be enabled in order
for the M-4272 to block all transfers. If the M-4272 is not connected to the trip coil circuit,
there is no effect on transfer operation.
Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) function
output.
Dropout Time Delay – A Time Delay can be applied to delay the reset of the TCM (Trip
Circuit Monitor) function output.
I/O Selection – The I/O Selection button opens the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) I/O Selection
Dialog Screen (Figure 4-105) that allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function to be
selected to block the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor). The TCM #1(2) Function can also be used
to activate a selected output when it times out.
Save/Cancel – The Save selection saves the TCM (trip Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog
Screen settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.

4–105
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure 4-105 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen

Figure 4-106 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

4–106
 Installation – 5

5 Installation

5.1 General Information.......................................................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions..................................................... 5–2

5.3 External Connections....................................................................... 5–5

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.............................................. 5–16

5.5 ISScom Communications and Analysis Software Installation......... 5–21

5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications......................................... 5–22

5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout........................................................ 5–23

5.8 Initial Setup Procedure................................................................... 5–24

5.1 General Information

QQ NOTE: Prior to the installation of the equipment, it is essential to review the contents of
this manual to locate data which may be of importance during the installation
procedures. The following is a quick review of the contents of this chapter.

The person or group responsible for the installation of the MBTS will find herein all
mechanical information required for the physical installation, equipment ratings, and all
external connections in this chapter. For reference, the Three-Line Connection Diagrams
are repeated from Chapter 4, System Settings and Setpoints. Further, a commissioning
checkout procedure is outlined using the HMI option to check the external CT and VT
connections. Additional tests which may be desirable at the time of installation are described
in Chapter 6, Testing.

Service Conditions and Conformity to CE Standard

Stating conformance to CE Standard EN 61010‑1 2001, operation of this equipment within
the following service conditions does not present any known personnel hazards outside of
those stated herein:
• 5° to 40° Centigrade
• Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing
in a linear manner to 50% relative humidity at 40° C.

This equipment will function properly, and at stated accuracies beyond the limits of this CE
Standard, as per the equipment's specifications, stated in this Instruction Book.
It is suggested that the terminal connections illustrated here be transferred to station one‑line
wiring and three-line connection diagrams, station panel drawings and station DC wiring
schematics.
If during the commissioning of the M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System, additional
tests are desired, Chapter 6, Testing, may be consulted.

5–1
M-4272 Instruction Book

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions

Figure 5-1 contains the physical dimensions of the MBTS that may be required for mounting
the unit on a rack. Figure 5-2 provides cutout dimensions. Figure 5-3 provides vertical panel
mounting dimensions.

ƒ
ƒŒŽ ƒŒŒ
‘ƒ’ƒŒ ƒŒŒ“

‹ƒ‹
‘ ƒ “

ƒ ƒ€
€
‹ƒŒŒ
‘ƒ “

 „  „ 

 
‹ Œ      Œ   

 „  „
   ‹   


‡ ­ ­

„ 
­ €‰   

ƒ‹ ƒŒŒ
‰Š ˆ ­ ­ 
 „ €‰ 

‘ ƒ“ ‘ Œƒ “
‡ 


„ 
„ †


   
   

 ­  ‚
 ƒ  ƒ
 €      
„  ƒƒƒ      
ƒ    

‘ƒ“

ƒ ƒ
‘ƒ‹“ ‘ƒ “

Figure 5-1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions

5–2
 


 

Figure 5-2










     
  
    

Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)

   ­

5–3
Installation – 5
M-4272 Instruction Book

10.2
[25.91]

18 17

STATUS
16 15

14 13

INPUTS

12 11

10 9

OUTPUTS
8 7
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

CCM-2 TCM-2
OPEN OPEN

CCM-1 TCM-1
OPEN OPEN

17.50 19.00 18.31

[44.5] [48.26] [46.51]

EXIT ENTER
16

15

STATUS
14 R ES ET

PS 2 PS 1

13
BRKR BRKR
OUTPUTS OPEN OPEN
SOURCE SOURCE
12 1 2
BRK R B RK R
C LO S E D C LO S E D

SYS D IA G /
11 T IM E
OK
SY NC

10 M-4272
MOTOR BUS TRANSFER
COM 1 Integrated Synchronizing SystemsTM
9 B EC
EC KW IIT
TH
CO.
O . I NC .
EL
E L ECT R
RII C
Ma d e in U.S .A .

9.97
4.00 1.48
[25.32] 0.35
[10.16] [3.76]
[0.89]
6.96
[17.68]

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 5-3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions

5–4
 Installation – 5

5.3 External Connections

88  WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed

ground anytime external connections have been made to the unit.

88  WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals

45 through 50 with 51 common and terminals 5 through 16 with 1
through 4 common) because these contact inputs are internally
wetted. Application of external voltage on these inputs may result
in damage to the units.

88  WARNING: Do not open live CT circuits. Live CT circuits should be shorted

prior to disconnecting CT wiring to the M‑4272. Death or severe
electrical shock may result.

▲▲ CAUTION: Mis-operation or permanent damage may result to the unit if a voltage is

applied to Terminals 17 through 24 that does not match the configured
Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring input voltage.

To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listings, terminal block connections must be made with
No. 22‑12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire inserted in an AMP #324915 (or equivalent)
connector, and wire insulation used must be rated at 75° C minimum.

Power Supply
The M-4272 power supplies (not redundant) must be powered from the same source.
Recommended source burden rating to energize the relay is 75 VA.

SOURCE 2
I 
PS 2 PS 1 PS2 PS1
+ - + -
F1 F2

3 A MP,2 5 0 V ( 3 A B)
98 99 100 101 102 103
18 - 5 6 18 - 5 6
85 265 85 265
F3 F4

+ -
Figure 5-4 Power Supply Connection

Grounding Requirements
The M‑4272 is designed to be mounted in an adequately grounded metal panel, using
grounding techniques (metal-to-metal mounting) and hardware that assures a low impedance
ground.

Unit Isolation
Sensing inputs should be equipped with test switches and shorting devices where necessary
to isolate the unit from external potential or current sources.

Insulation Coordination
Sensing Inputs: 60 V to 140 V, Installation Category IV, Transient Voltages not to exceed
5,000 V.

5–5
M-4272 Instruction Book

Torque Requirements
• Terminals 1–34: 12.0 in-lbs
• Terminals 35–63: 8.0 in-lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

▲▲ CAUTION: Over torquing may result in terminal damage.

MBTS Outputs
All outputs are shown in the de-energized state for standard reference. MBTS standard
reference is defined as the non-asserted state, or power to the MBTS is removed. Output
contacts #1 through #4 and #9 through #16 are high speed operation contacts.
The power supply MBTS (P/S) is energized when the power supply is OK. The self-test
MBTS is energized when the MBTS has performed all self-tests successfully.

Replacement Fuses
F1–F4 replacement fuses must be fast-acting 3 Amp, 250 V (3AB) Beckwith Electric Part
Number 420‑00885.

5–6
 Installation – 5

1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS

must b e conn e c te d to inpu t s
(terminals 45 through 50 with 51
common and terminals 5 through 16
with 1 through 4 common) because
these contact inputs are internally
wetted with 24 Vdc. Application of
external voltage on these inputs may
result in damage to the units.
2. 8 WA R N I N G : T h e p r o t e c t i ve
grounding terminal must be
connected to an earthed ground any
time external connections have been
made to the unit.
3. 3 CAUTION: Before making connections
to the Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring input,
see M‑4272 Instruction Book Section 5.5,
Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers,
for the information regarding setting Trip/
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique

Close Circuit Monitoring input voltage.

Connecting a voltage other than the
voltage that the unit is configured to may
result in mis-operation or permanent
damage to the unit.
4. 3 CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272
Close Coil Monitor (CCM) in parallel
with other relay CCMs in the Close Coil
Circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is
not bypassed may not provide reliable
breaker closing operation.
QQ NOTE: Control/Status Inputs IN-17 and
IN‑18 may be used to select
setpoint profiles.

QQ NOTE: All relays are shown in the

de‑energized state, and without
power applied to the relay.

QQ NOTE: The self-test relay is energized

when the relay has performed
all self-tests successfully.

QQ NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S)

is energized when the power
supply is functioning properly.

Figure 5-5 External Connections (Horizontal Mount)

5–7
 M-4272 Instruction Book

U.S. PATENT 7,468,593

1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS
IR IG - B must be connected to inputs (terminals
75
45 through 50 with 51 common and

B E C K W IT H
1

76 COM 2
ETHERNET IN
2 terminals 5 through 16 with 1 through
2 COM 2 RT N
3 4 common) because these contact
UL

727- 5 4 4 - 23 26
77 RS232
C US
inputs are internally wetted with

E L E C T R IC
LISTED
IND.CONT.EQ. 4
78
83F4
VA
VAB S I N 18 5 24 Vdc. Application of external voltage
79
O
U I N 17 6
on these inputs may result in damage
80
R
to the units.

C O .
VB C 41
I N 16 7

2. 8 WA R N I N G : T h e p r o t e c t i v e
VBC E
1
81

IN C .
42
I N 15 8

82 - 43 IN-
I N 14 9
grounding terminal must be connected
VC RS 4 8 5 PUTS
VCA COM 3
to an earthed ground any time external
+
44

6 19 0
L A RG O , F L
83 I N 13 10

6
52SP/ I N 6
S2 45
I N 12 11
connections have been made to the

118 t h
R 0
unit.
84
A 52b/ I N 5
-

T S2 46

3. 3 CAUTION: Before making connections

1 I N 11 12
E 4

AV E
1

3 3 773
D 0 52a/ I N 4
S2 47
V VA I N 10 13
V
to the Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring input,

NO .
VAB 52SP/
O S S1 I N 3 48
L 5 IN 9 14
O
T
A
0
/
U
R
52b/ I N 2
S1 49
IN 8 15
see M‑4272 Instruction Book Section 5.5,
G 6
Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers,
85 C
E 0 E 52a/ I N 1
S1 50
H 2 IN 7 16
z 86
for the information regarding setting Trip/

WARNING! CONTACT WITH TERMINALS MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK

VB - 17
! CCM-
Close Circuit Monitoring input voltage.
(

N VBC IN P U T S
87 2
O
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique
18
Connecting a voltage other than the
+

M
FOR CONTACT RATINGS SEE INSTRUCTIONAL MANUAL

I
N 88 IN -
voltage that the unit is configured to may
RTN 51 19
A VC TCM-
L VCA 2
89 52 20
4 result in mis-operation or permanent
(

P/S

90
VA
53 CCM-
- 21
damage to the unit.
4. 3 CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272
1
VAB 22
54
+

91
BUS SELF
-
Close Coil Monitor (CCM) in parallel
55 23
TEST TCM-
92 1
VB
56 24
with other relay CCMs in the Close Coil
+

VBC
93
B 24
L
O
L
O
57 48
125
Circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is
3
94 C 250
VC
K
O
C
K
I
8 58
not bypassed may not provide reliable
VCA U
95 T
N
G 59
25 breaker closing operation.
S 16
60
QQ NOTE: Control/Status Inputs IN-17 and
1A 96 O
U 26
C IS1 R
C
R U 7 61
IN‑18 may be used to select
E
(

A RN 97 1
27
T RO 15
62
E
D
EM
N 98
S
O
28
setpoint profiles.
(

MODEL: M-4272

U
T IS2 R
63
C 29
6
50Hz

E
5A 99 2 14

QQ NOTE: All relays are shown in the

OUT- 64
30
PUTS
100
+

65
18- 5 6
85-265 PS 2 5
31
de‑energized state, and without
60Hz

101
- 13
66
OUT-
32 power applied to the relay.
PUTS
102 67
FIRMWARE: D-0135
+

4 33
18- 5 6
PS 1 CLOSE 12
85-265
S2 68
QQ NOTE: The self-test relay is energized
103
- 34

3
TRIP
69

11
35 when the relay has performed
F3 F1
S2 70
36 all self-tests successfully.
SERIAL NO.

71
2 37
PS 2 CLOSE 10

3 AMP,
S1 72
38 QQ NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S)
F4 250V,
(3 AB)
F2 1
TRIP
73
39 is energized when the power
9

PS 1
S1 74
40 supply is functioning properly.

Figure 5-6 Vertical Unit External Connections

5–8
 Installation – 5

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
M-4272
IS1 IS2
M-4272 VA VB VC M-4272 1

1 97 99
91 90 93 92 95 94

52S1 96 98 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

Figure 5-7 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–9
M-4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye

Alternate Connection Alternate Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single
Alternate Connection
Phase CT Phase CT
M-4272
IS1 IS2
M-4272 VA VB VC M-4272 1

1 97 99
91 90 93 92 95 94

52S1 96 98 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

Figure 5-8 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT

Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–10
 Installation – 5

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84

VBC VBC
81 87

80 86

VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection Phase CT
IS1 M-4272
IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
VAB VBC VCA
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.

Figure 5-9 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–11
M-4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Ground 2 Phase-Ground
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B One VT CT-S2 Single

Phase CT 2 Phase-Ground Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
M-4272
VA VB VC
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -
Ground.

Figure 5-10 Single-Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–12
 Installation – 5

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Phase 2 Phase-Phase
Connection Connection

M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84
VBC VBC
81 87

80 86
VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single VT-B One VT CT-S2 Single

2 Phase-Phase Phase CT
Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 1
M-4272
VAB VBC VCA
1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98
52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -
Phase C.

Figure 5-11 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–13
M-4272 Instruction Book

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Ground 2 Phase-Ground
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VA VA
79 85

78 84
VB VB
81 87

80 86
VC VC
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
IS1 VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection IS2
M-4272 M-4272 M-4272 1

1 97 VA VB VC 99

91 90 93 92 95 94
96 98

52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the
same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -
Ground.

Figure 5-12 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,

Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–14
 Installation – 5

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

A B C A B C

VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Phase 2 Phase-Phase
Connection Connection
M-4272 M-4272
VAB VAB
79 85

78 84
VBC VBC
81 87

80 86
VCA VCA
83 89

82 88

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection
IS1 IS2
M-4272 M-4272 M-4272 1

VAB VBC VCA

1 97 99

91 90 93 92 95 94

96 98

52S1 52S2

STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A

B B

C C

MOTOR MOTOR

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the same
phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.

Figure 5-13 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase Bus Side, Open
Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–15
M-4272 Instruction Book

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers

See Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15 for Circuit Board Jumper and Switch locations.
See Table 5-1 through Table 5-6 for Circuit Board Jumper and Switch configuration details.

Accessing Switches and Jumpers

88  WARNING: Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the
printed circuit board while power is applied. IN NO CASE may the
circuit-based jumpers or switches be moved with power applied.

88  WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed

ground any time external connections have been made to the unit.
See Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6, Note #3.

▲▲ CAUTION: This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by static
discharge. Care should be taken to avoid static discharge on work
surfaces and service personnel.

1. De-energize the M‑4272.

2. Remove the screws that retain the front cover.
3. Remove the "J" connectors from the corresponding plugs, P1, P2 and P3 from the
top board (B‑0957).
4. Remove the “J” connectors from the corresponding plugs, P4, 5, 6, 7, 9 and 11
from the bottom board (B-0970).
5. Loosen the two circuit board retention screws (captured) in each board.
6. Remove the circuit boards from the chassis.
7. Jumpers J5, J18, J46, J60, and J61 are now accessible on the bottom board
(B‑0970). See Figure 5-14, M‑4272 Bottom Circuit Board (B-0970) for locations.
8. Jumpers J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J13, J14, J15, J16, J17 and J18 are now accessible
on the top board (B-0957). See Figure 5-15, M-4272 Top Circuit Board for locations.
9. Dipswitch SW1 is now accessible. See Figure 5-14 for location.
10. Insert circuit board into chassis guides and seat firmly.
11. Tighten circuit boards retention screws.
12. Reconnect "J" connectors to corresponding plugs.
13. Reinstall cover plate.

QQ NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) is incorporated on pins 1 and 9 when
used for ±15 V.

Jumper Position Description

A to B Demodulated IRIG-B TTL signal on Pin 6 COM2
J5
B to C Modulated IRIG-B signal BNC (Default)
A to B COM3 200 ohm termination resistor inserted
J18
B to C COM3 no termination (Default)
A to B COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM1
J46
B to C COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM2 (Default)
A to B Connects DCD signal to Pin 1 of COM2 (Default)
J60
A to C Connects +15V to Pin 1 of COM2
B to C Connects -15V to Pin 9 of COM2
J61
A to B COM2 Pin 9 float (Default)

▲▲ CAUTION: A loss of calibration, setpoints, and configuration will occur when the
EEPROM is initialized to default.

Table 5-1 Jumpers

5–16
 Installation – 5

Dip Switch SW1

1 2 3 4
Open Switches should not be changed
X X X while unit is energized
(up)
Closed
X
(down)

3 up 4 up Run Mode
3 up 4 down Initialize EEPROM to default* See CAUTION below.
3 down 4 up Initialize Access Codes and Communication*
3 down 4 down Factory Use
2 up Flash Update Disable (Factory Default)
2 down Flash Update Enable

1 up Dual Power Supply Unit

1 down Single Power Supply Unit (Standard M‑4272 PS)
* After power up the OK LED remains extinguished and the Diagnostic LED will
illuminate when operation has been satisfactorily completed.

▲▲ CAUTION: A loss of calibration,setpoints and configuration will occur when the

EEPROM is initialized to default.

Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

Input Voltage Jumper J20 Position Jumper J21 Position Jumper J22 Position
24 Vdc A to B A to B A to B
48 Vdc B to C A to B A to B
125 Vdc B to C B to C A to B
250 Vdc* B to C B to C B to C
* Default as shipped from factory.
*Default from Factory

Table 5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

5–17
M-4272 Instruction Book

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

Input Voltage Jumper J4 Position Jumper J5 Position Jumper J6 Position
24 Vdc A to B A to B A to B
48 Vdc B to C A to B A to B
125 Vdc B to C B to C A to B
250 Vdc* B to C B to C B to C
* Default as shipped from factory.
*Default from Factory

Table 5-4 Close Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 2 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

Input Voltage Jumper J13 Position Jumper J14 Position Jumper J15 Position
24 Vdc A to B A to B A to B
48 Vdc B to C A to B A to B
125 Vdc B to C B to C A to B
250 Vdc* B to C B to C B to C
* Default as shipped from factory.
*Default from Factory

Table 5-5 Trip Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 2 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

Input Voltage Jumper J16 Position Jumper J17 Position Jumper J18 Position
24 Vdc A to B A to B A to B
48 Vdc B to C A to B A to B
125 Vdc B to C B to C A to B
250 Vdc* B to C B to C B to C
* Default as shipped from factory.
*Default from Factory

Table 5-6 Close Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

5–18
 Installation – 5

Dip Switch

J46
J18
J22 J21
J5 J20
J61
J60

Figure 5-14 M‑4272 Bottom Circuit Board (B-0970)

5–19
M-4272 Instruction Book

BECKWITH
CO. INC.

DS12
ELECTRIC
BE# 450-00236 R15
P-2053 REV

C132 RV28 R14

FB16
C130

D82

DS11
D83
C77

U48
C131

R115 D80 R112 D78 R109 D76 R106 D74 R103 D72 R100
R116 R114 R13
FB13 U16
C128 RV27 C126
D81

U47
R12

C127
R113 R111

DS10
C124 RV26 C122
FB31 D79 U39 U3

U46
R11

R110

C123
R108

FB30 C120 RV25 C118 R10

U45
D77 U15

C119
R107 R105

DS9
FB29 C78 R9
C116 RV24 C114
D75

U44
C115
R104 R102
R8
FB28
C112 RV23 C110
D73

U43
U38

DS16
C111
R101 R99 R40
FB27
C106

D70 R97
C108 RV22
D71

U42
C107 C79 R39
FB26 R98 R96

C76 U31

D46
C88 RV20
D47 R38

U40

DS15
FB25 R64
C87

R63
R62

C72 RV18 C66 R37

D41 R59
D42

U37
FB14 U36 U19
R60
C71

R58

R57 R36

DS14
C58
D34
C62 RV15
D37

U35
FB11
R55
U30
C61

R53
R52
R35
C49
D29 R48

C53 RV13 C81

FB10 D31 C80
U32

R50 R34
C52

R47

DS13
C44
D23 R43

FB9 C45 RV12

D26
U29

R33
R65
R41
FB8 R44 C38

P1
Q2
R132

E2 E1
C57
FB35 D89
R127 R128 R129

D91
D93

U13
C139
R46 R54
R126

FB34
D92
U33
R130

U34

+
R49
R131

JP16

RT6
C137 D90 R133
JP18 JP17

JP18 C138 FB33 D84

JP16 R66
R119 R120 R121

D86
D88

C136 U2
R124
R118

D87 D36 C75

R122

JP17
FB32

C73
R123

JP13

C134
RT5 +
D85 R125

JP15
C135 JP15 JP14

JP13
C99 FB20 D55 FB1
R75

D57
D59

R80 U1 C102
R74
R76

D58 C103
R78

C97 FB19

JP14
JP4
R77

R79

RT2
C98 D56 R117
JP6 JP5
C96

JP4
FB18 D50
R68

D52
D54

U12
R73
P2
R67
R69

D53
R71

C94

JP5
FB17
R70

JP1
R72

C95
D51 R95
JP3 JP2

JP6
RT1

C91
JP1 FB12
+
C84

RV21
C90
JP3 JP2 C89
FB15
D48

RV19

+
P3

C86
D49 D45

R61
+
C24
FB2
DS8
C85 R18
+
K8

D43

RV17
+

C70
D44 D40

C142

+ R56
C23
DS7

C69 R17
K7

D38

C64 RV16
D39 D35

R51
+
C20
DS6

C63
R7
K6

D32

C55 RV14
D33 D30

R45
+
C19
DS5

C54
R6
K5

D27

RV11
+

C47
D28 D24

+ R30
C18
DS4

C46
R5
K4

D20

C35 RV8
D22 D17

R23
+
C17
DS3

C34
R4
K3

D13

C22 RV4
D14 D10

R16
+
C2
DS2

C21
R3
K2

C8 RV1
D6

+
D7 D2

+ R1
C1
DS1

R2
K1

C7

Figure 5-15 M-4272 B-0957 Top Circuit Board

5–20
 Installation – 5

5.5 ISScom Communications and Analysis Software Installation

ISScom Installation and Setup

S-4200 ISScom is compatible with Windows 7 or later, and firmware version V02.01.07 or
later. ISScom only supports communication using the MODBUS protocol.
ISScom is available on CD-ROM, or may be downloaded from our website at www.
beckwithelectric.com
The ISScom Communications and Analysis Software is not copy-protected. For more
information on your specific rights and responsibilities, see the licensing agreement enclosed
with your software or contact Beckwith Electric.

Hardware Requirements
ISScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computer that provides at least the following:
• 8 MB of RAM
• Microsoft Windows 7 or later
• CD-ROM drive
• one serial (RS-232) communication port
• pointing device (mouse)

Installing ISScom
1. Insert software CD-ROM into your drive.
An Auto-Install program will establish a program folder (Becoware) and subdirectory
(ISScom). After installation, the ISScom program item icon (see Figure 5-16) is
located in Becoware. The default location for the application files is on drive C:, in
the new subdirectory "ISScom" (C:\Becoware\ISScom).

Figure 5-16 ISScom Program Icon

2. If the Auto-Install program does not launch when the CD-ROM is inserted into the
drive then proceed as follows:
a. Select Run from the Start Menu.
b. In the Run dialog screen, locate the installation file (setup.exe) contained on
the ISScom installation disk.
c. Select Run to start the installation process.

5–21
M-4272 Instruction Book

5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications

The MBTS and ISScom Communications and Analysis Software are shipped from the factory
with the same default communication parameters. Therefore, it may not be necessary to
set up communication parameters.
In order for ISScom to communicate with the MBTS using direct serial connection, a serial
"null modem" cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for the MBTS, and an
applicable connector for the computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a null modem
adapter are provided in Appendix B, Communications.
Activating initial communications using default communication parameters is accomplished
as follows:
1. Verify that a direct serial connection between the PC hosting ISScom and the target
MBTS COM1 (front) is in place.
2. Select the ISScom icon (Figure 5-16) from the Becoware folder or Desktop. The
ISScom Opening Screen (Figure 3-2) is displayed.
3. From the Connect menu dropdown, select Serial Port. ISScom will display the
Serial Port dialog screen (Figure 3-9).
4. Ensure that the correct Comm Port values are displayed.
5. Select Connect. This action attempts to establish communication.
6. If ISScom returns a "Successfully Connected and Level #(1, 2 or 3) access granted"
then communications have been established. Enter any valid ISScom command(s)
as desired. To close the communication channel when connected locally, select
Comm/Disconnect.
7. If ISScom returns an error message, then determine the MBTS COM1
communication parameters as follows:
a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMI press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal 

b. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the MBTS displays:

COMMUNICATION
 stat COMM setup 

c. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr 

d. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

COM1 BAUD RATE

 baud_4800 baud_9600

Record the Baud Rate that is displayed in all Caps: __________

e. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME

XX ms

Record the Dead Sync Time that is displayed: __________

f. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

5–22
 Installation – 5

COM1 PARITY
none odd even

Record the Parity that is displayed in all Caps: __________

g. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

COM1 STOP BITS

X

Record the Stop Bits value that is displayed: __________

h. Press EXIT as necessary to exit the HMI.

i. From the Connect menu dropdown, select Serial Port. ISScom will display
the Serial Port dialog screen (Figure 3-9).
j. Verify the ISScom communication parameters are the same as the MBTS
COM1 parameters.
k. Verify that the Comm Port that is connected to the MBTS is selected.
l. Select Connect. This action will attempt to establish communication.
m. If ISScom returns a "COM Opened and Level # (1, 2 or 3) access granted"
then communications have been established. Enter any valid ISScom
command(s) as desired.

To close the communication channel when connected locally, select Comm/

Disconnect.

5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout

During field commissioning, check the following parameters to ensure that the CT and VT
connections are correct for the application as follows.
1. Determine if ISScom Communication and Analysis Software is available to
communicate with the MBTS and proceed as follows:
2. If ISScom is available, then go to Step 4.
3. If ISScom is not available then:
a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMI press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

INIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal 

b. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the MBTS displays:

STATUS
 STAT comm setup 

c. Press ENTER. The MBTS will display:

VOLTAGE STATUS
VOLT curr freq phang 
From this menu the user can access status data that includes Voltage, Current,
Frequency, Phase Angle, Inputs, Outputs, Alarm Counter, Time of Last Power Up
and Error Codes.
d. Go to Step 6.

4. Start the ISScom, then establish communication with the MBTS.

5–23
M-4272 Instruction Book

5. From the ISScom menu select System/Setup/Setup System to open the Setup
System dialog screen.
6. Verify that the S1/S2 VT Configuration and the Bus VT Configuration are configured
for the MBTS application.
7. Select System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status to open the Secondary
Metering and Status screen. The Voltage, Positive Sequence and Status information
is also available from the MBTS Front Panel HMI.
8. The unit should display either S1 VA, S1 VB, S1 VC and S1 VPS (three phase line-
to-ground connections) or S1 VAB, S1 VBC, S1 VCA and S1 VPS (three phase line-
to-line connections). The same should be true for the S2 (Source 2) and the Bus.
9. Compare the voltages with actual measurements using a voltmeter. If there is a
discrepancy, check for loose connections at the rear terminal block of the unit.
10. The positive sequence voltage should be S1 VPS y S1 VA y S1 VB y S1 VC or
S1 VAB y S1 VBC y S1 VCA. The same should be true for S2 and the bus
11. If the positive sequence voltage is close to zero, then the phase sequence is
incorrect and the proper phases must be reversed to obtain correct phase sequence.
If the phase sequence is incorrect, frequency related functions will not operate
properly and the Frequency Status menu will display DISABLED.
12. Compare currents with the measured values using a meter. If there is a discrepancy,
check the CT connections at the rear terminal block of the unit.
13. Compare the indicated frequency value to the actual frequency of the bus.
14. Verify Inputs and outputs agree with inputs and outputs.

QQ NOTE: The CT and VT polarities can be easily verified by looking at the oscillographic
waveforms, using S‑4200 ISSplot Analysis Software.

5.8 Initial Setup Procedure

The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MTBS) is shipped from the factory with all functions
disabled.
The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggested setup procedure for initially entering
settings into the device.

Setup Procedure
QQ NOTE: Setup Record forms are available in Appendix A, Setup Record Forms, to
record settings for future reference.

1. Enter the Unit Setup data. This is general information required including altering
access codes, setting date and time, defining user logos, and other adjustments.
See Section 4.1, Unit Setup.
1. Configure the System Setup data. This is the general system and equipment
information required for operation, including such items as CT and VT ratios, VT
configuration, and Nominal values. See Section 4.2, System Setup.
1. Enter the System Setpoints data. This is the function specific settings for transfers
and initiating functions. See Section 4.4, System Setpoints.

5–24
 Testing – 6

6 Testing

6.1 Power On Self Test .......................................................................... 6–2

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ............................................................. 6–3

6.3 Metering Tests................................................................................ 6–17

6.4 Auto Calibration.............................................................................. 6–19

Testing Overview
For the purposes of site acceptance and verifying the MBTS hardware is operating properly
and is connected correctly, Beckwith Electric recommends the following tests:
• Power on Self Tests
• Diagnostic Tests
• Metering Tests

6–1
M-4272 Instruction Book

6.1 Power On Self Test

Equipment Required
• If the MBTS permanent power supply source is not available, then a
portable power supply (>50 W) matched to the installed MBTS power supply
(indicated by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1) will be required.
• Digital Multi Meter

SOURCE 2
I 
PS 2 PS 1 PS2 PS1
+ - + -
F1 F2

3 A MP,2 5 0 V ( 3 A B)
98 99 100 101 102 103
18 - 5 6 18 - 5 6
85 265 85 265
F3 F4

+ -
Figure 6-1 Power Supply Connection
To perform the Power On Self Test proceed as follows:
1. Verify the power supply contact is in the normal state. (Closed)
2. Determine if the permanent power supply source is connected and available.
88  WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS may cause equipment connected to
the MBTS to operate.

3. If the permanent power supply source is connected and available, then energize the
power supply (The Power On Self Test will automatically begin) and go to Step 5.
4. If the permanent power supply source is not connected or is unavailable, then
proceed as follows:
a. Ensure that the permanent power supply source breaker is open and
applicable safety tagging is complete.
b. Disconnect and tag/identify the permanent power supply source connections
(Figure 6-1) from the MBTS (100/102 HOT and 101/103 NEUTRAL).
c. Connect the portable power supply to terminals (100/102 HOT and 101/103
NEUTRAL).

88  WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS may cause equipment connected to

the MBTS to operate.

d. Energize the portable power supply. The Power On Self Test will automatically
begin.

QQ NOTE: A Power On Self Test failure is indicated by no display or SYSTEM HALT

ERROR CODE XX. If a failure occurs, then stop any further testing and
contact the factory.

5. The following sequence of actions will take place:

a. Power supply, PS1 and PS2, LED(s) will illuminate.
b. The power supply contact will energize (open) (Terminals 52 and 53)
c. The internal hardware test executes.
d. All LEDs will illuminate for approximately 1 second.
e. As each Power On Self Test routine is completed satisfactorily the HMI will
display an "X".

6–2
 Testing – 6

6. Upon successful completion of all Power On Self Tests:

a. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain illuminated.
b. All other LEDs will extinguish.
c. The diagnostic contact will energize.
d. The SYS OK LED will flash (or remain illuminated as programed in the
diagnostic menu).
e. The unit will display the Model Number, Firmware Version, Current CT Rating,
Nominal Frequency Rating and the Serial Number.
f. The BREAKER CLOSED and BREAKER OPEN LEDs will be illuminated for
Source 1 based on the position of the breaker position contacts (52a and/or
52b) connected to the Status Inputs 1, 2, 4 and 5.
7. Verify the power supply contact is energized (open).
8. Restore any connections that may have been disconnected in Step 4.

Torque Requirements
• Terminals 1– 74: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 8.0 in-lbs, maximum
• Terminals 75 – 103: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures

Overview
The diagnostic test procedures perform basic functional MBTS tests to verify the operation
of the front-panel controls, inputs, outputs, and communication ports.
The diagnostic menu includes the following tests:
• OUTPUT (Output Test Relay)
• INPUT (Input Test Status)
• LED (Status LED Test)
• TARGET (Target LED Test)
• BUTTON (Button Test)
• DISP (Display Test)
• COM1 (COM1 Loopback Test)
• COM2 (COM2 Loopback Test)
• COM3 (COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire)

Each test is described individually in this section.

The diagnostic menu also provides access to the following MBTS feature settings:
• CLOCK (Clock On/Off)
• LED (MBTS OK LED Flash/Solid)
• CAL (Auto Calibration)
• FACTORY (Factory Use Only)

Auto Calibration is described in detail in Section 6.4, Auto Calibration.

6–3
M-4272 Instruction Book

Equipment Required
• If the MBTS permanent power supply source is not available, then a
portable power supply (>50 W) matched to the installed MBTS power
supply (indicated by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1) will be required
to power the unit.
• 24 to 250 Vdc variable supply for Trip Coil and Close Coil Monitor input
testing.
• Digital Multi Meter (DMM)

Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode

88  WARNING: Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE disables all transfer, protection and
control functionality and, during the output test, any connected
equipment will operate

1. Press ENTER to access the main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT
 SETUP exit

3. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

SOFTWARE VERSION
VERS sn access number 

4. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

DIAGNOSTIC MODE
 time error eth DIAG

5. Press ENTER, the following warning will be displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!

ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

88  WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in

service. Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment
is in service disables all Transfer, protective, and control functions
of the relay.

6. Press ENTER, the MBTS will reset and DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
displayed followed by:

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)

OUTPUT input led module 
This marks the beginning of the diagnostic menu. The left arrow and right arrow pushbuttons
are used to navigate within the diagnostic menu. Exiting the diagnostic menu is accomplished
by pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then pressing
EXIT a second time.

Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–16 and 17)

QQ NOTE: This test does not include testing of Power Supply Relay.

88  WARNING: Performing this test will cause output contacts to change state.
Proper steps should be taken to avoid unintended operation of
connected equipment.

6–4
 Testing – 6

1. Ensure the affected equipment is in a configuration/state that can support MBTS

output testing.
2. Confirm the positions of the outputs in the normal or OFF position. This can be
accomplished by connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) in continuity test mode
across the appropriate contacts and confirming open or closed. The de-energized
or OFF position for outputs 1 through 17 are listed in Table 6-1.
3. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 4.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 4.
4. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to OUTPUT (Upper Case).

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)

OUTPUT input led module 
If OUTPUT is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select OUTPUT.

5. Press ENTER, the MBTS will display the following:

RELAY NUMBER
1
6. Select the Output Relay (from Table 6-1) to be tested, utilizing the Up/Down arrow
pushbuttons.

7. Press ENTER. The following will be displayed for the selected relay:

RELAY NUMBER 1
OFF on

Relay Output Normally Normally Closed

Number Open Contact Contact*
1 73-74 --
2 71-72 --
3 69-70 --
4 67-68 --
5 65-66 --
6 63-64 --
7 60-61 61-62
8 57-58 58-59
9 39-40 --
10 37-38 --
11 35-36 --
12 33-34 --
13 31-32 --
14 29-30 --
15 27-28 --
16 25-26 --
Self-Test (17) 54-55 55-56
* “Normal” position of the contact corresponds to the OFF
(de-energized) state of the relay.

Table 6-1 Output Contacts

6–5
M-4272 Instruction Book

8. Select ON (Upper Case) utilizing the Right arrow pushbutton, then press ENTER.
The MBTS will respond as follows:
• Output relay energizes (On position)
• Appropriate RED OUTPUT LED illuminates.

If testing all output relays, then press EXIT to return to the output relay selection menu, then
repeat Steps 6, 7 and 8 for each output relay.
9. The DMM can now be used to verify that the output relay contact is in the operated
or ON position. The readings should be the opposite of the initial reading determined
in Step 2.
10. When output relay testing is complete, then restore all output relays to their de-
energized or OFF positions listed in Table 6-1 and press EXIT to return to the
Diagnostic Menu.
11. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1 – 18

The INPUT TEST menu enables the user to determine the status of the individual control/
status inputs. Individual inputs can be selected by number using the up and down arrow
pushbuttons. The status of the input will then be displayed.
1. Ensure the protected equipment is in a configuration/state that can support MBTS
input testing.
2. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 3.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 3.

3. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to INPUT (Upper Case).

INPUT TEST (RELAY)

output INPUT led module 
If INPUT is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select INPUT.

4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

INPUT NUMBER
1
5. Select the MBTS Input (from Table 6-2) to be tested utilizing the Up/Down arrow
pushbuttons.

6. Press ENTER. The following is displayed for the selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 1
CIRCUIT OPEN
7. If no external control/status inputs are connected to the MBTS, then place a jumper
between the IN RTN terminal (Terminal #51 for Inputs 1–6, and either Terminal #1,
2, 3 or 4 for Inputs 7–18). See Table 6-2 for terminals for inputs.
Alternatively, if this specific input is being used in this application and the external
wiring is complete, the actual external control/status input contact can be manually
closed. This will test the input contact operation and the external wiring to the input
contacts.
The corresponding Input LED will illuminate and the following will be immediately
displayed:

6–6
 Testing – 6

INPUT NUMBER 1
CIRCUIT CLOSED
8. Remove the jumper between the IN RTN terminal (Terminal #51 for Inputs 1–6,
and either Terminal #1, 2, 3 or 4 for Inputs 7–18).
The input LED will extinguish and the following will be immediately displayed:

INPUT NUMBER 1
CIRCUIT OPEN
9. If testing all inputs, press EXIT to return to the input selection menu, then repeat
Steps 5, 6, 7 and 8 for each input except inputs 19–22.

Input Number Common Terminal Terminal

1 (52a/S1) 51 50
2 (52b/S1) 51 49
3 (52sp/S1) 51 48
4 (52a/S2) 51 47
5 (52b/S2) 51 46
6 (52sp/S2) 51 45
7 1, 2, 3, 4 16
8 1, 2, 3, 4 15
9 1, 2, 3, 4 14
10 1, 2, 3, 4 13
11 1, 2, 3, 4 12
12 1, 2, 3, 4 11
13 1, 2, 3, 4 10
14 1, 2, 3, 4 9
15 1, 2, 3, 4 8
16 1, 2, 3, 4 7
17 1, 2, 3, 4 6
18 1, 2, 3, 4 5

Table 6-2 Input Contacts

Input Test (Trip Coil, Close Coil) Inputs 19–22

The INPUT TEST menu enables the user to determine the status of the individual Trip and/or
Close Coil inputs. Individual inputs can be selected by number using the up and down arrow
pushbuttons. The status of the input will then be displayed.
1. Ensure any equipment connected to the MBTS is in a configuration/state that can
support Trip Coil and/or Close Coil input testing.
2. If there are no connections made to the terminals listed in Table 6-3, then go to
Step 4.

6–7
M-4272 Instruction Book

Trip/Close Coil Inputs

Input Common
Terminal
Number Terminal
19 (TCM #1) 23 24
20 (CCM #1) 22 21
21 (TCM #2) 20 19
22 (CCM #2) 18 17
Table 6-3 Trip and Close Coil Input Contacts
3. If the permanent Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltage inputs are connected to the
MBTS, then proceed as follows:
a. Ensure that the permanent Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltage input supply
breaker is open and applicable safety tagging is complete.
b. Disconnect and tag/identify the permanent Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltage
input connections (Figure 6-2).

4. Determine the Trip Coil/Close Coil Monitor Input voltage as identified on the rear
of the unit (Figure 6-2).
See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, (Table 5-3 for TCM#1,
Table 5-5 for TCM#2, Table 5-4 for CCM #1 and Table 5-6 for CCM#2) for the
available trip/close circuit input voltage selections and jumper configurations if the
input voltage rating is unknown or has changed.
5. Connect the portable power supply to the Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltage input
terminals to be tested (Figure 6-2).
6. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 7.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 7.
7. Select the MBTS Trip Coil or Close Coil Input (from Table 6-3) to be tested utilizing
the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons.

Figure 6-2 MBTS Trip Coil—Close Coil Input Voltage Rating

8. Apply the rated Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltage (as determined in Step 4) to
the terminals indicated in Table 6-3.

9. Press ENTER. The TCM/CCM status LED will be extinguished and the following
will be displayed for the selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 19 TCM #1

CIRCUIT CLOSED

10. Remove the voltage source from the Trip Coil/Close Coil input terminals. The
TCM/CCM status LED will be illuminated and the following will be displayed for
the selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 19 TCM #1

CIRCUIT OPEN

6–8
 Testing – 6

11. If testing all TCM/CCM inputs, then press EXIT to return to the input selection
menu, then repeat Steps 8, 9 and 10 for each of the remaining TCM/CCM inputs.
12. When TCM/CCM input testing is complete then insure all voltage sources have been
disconnected from the MBTS and press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic menu.
13. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the Diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.
14. Restore any connections that may have been disconnected in Step 3.
Torque Requirements
• Terminals 1–74: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 8.0 in-lbs, maximum
• Terminals 75–103: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

Front Panel Status LED Test

The Front Panel STATUS LED TEST menu enables the user to check the front-panel
Status LED individually.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to LED (Upper Case).

STATUS LED TEST

output input LED module 
If LED is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select LED.

3. Press ENTER. LED #1 (RELAY OK) illuminates and the following is displayed:

STATUS LED TEST

LED NUMBER 1 = ON
4. If testing all Status LEDs, press the right arrow pushbutton to toggle through the
remaining LEDs illustrated in Figure 6-3. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs are tested in the
System Power On Tests.


    
    

     
     
 

Figure 6-3 Status LED Panel
5. When Status LED testing is complete press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu.
6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

6–9
M-4272 Instruction Book

Module LED Test

The MODULE LED TEST menu allows the user to check each M‑3972 Module LED
individually.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to MODULE (Upper Case).

MODULE LED TEST

output input led MODULE 
If MODULE is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select MODULE.

3. Press ENTER. MODULE LED #1 lights and the following is displayed:

MODULE LED TEST

LED NUMBER 1 = ON
4. If testing all MODULE LEDs, press the right arrow pushbutton to toggle through
the remaining MODULE LEDs illustrated in Figure 6-4.
5. When Module LED testing is complete press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu.
6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

STATUS
27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK
TRANS READY DELTA VOLTAGE OK
FAST TRANS OP DELTA FREQUENCY OK
IN-PHASE TRANS OP FAST/PARAL TRANS READY
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANS OP S1/S2 BRKR-RACKED OUT BLOCK
FIXED-TIME TRANS OP NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK
PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
50/50BF-1/SRC 1 BRKR FAIL TRIP/CLOSE CKT OPEN BLOCK
50/50BF-2/SRC 2 BRKR FAIL INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR

OUTPUTS
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

Figure 6-4 M‑3972 Status Module

6–10
 Testing – 6

Button Test
The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the user to check the M-3931 HMI Module
buttons and the STATUS RESET pushbutton on the front panel. As each pushbutton is
pressed, its name is displayed.
1. If the relay is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relay diagnostic mode by
performing the steps described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of
this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to BUTTON (Upper Case).

BUTTON TEST
output input led module 
If BUTTON is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select BUTTON.

3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

BUTTON TEST
0

QQ NOTE: Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will exit from this test, and therefore should
be the last pushbutton tested. If it is pushed before this test sequence is
completed, the test may be restarted by pressing ENTER. Notice that the word
EXIT is displayed temporarily before the test sequence is exited.

4. Press each pushbutton for test (Figure 6-5). As each pushbutton is pressed, the
display will briefly show the name for each key (“RIGHT ARROW”, “UP ARROW”,
etc).

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

M-4272





EXIT ENTER

Figure 6-5 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface Module

5. When pushbutton testing is complete press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu.
6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

6–11
M-4272 Instruction Book

Display Test
The DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables the user to check the display. This test cycles
through varying test patterns until EXIT is pressed.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to DISPLAY TEST (Upper Case).

DISPLAY TEST
output input led module 
If DISP is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select DISP.
3. Press ENTER, the unit will display a sequence of test characters until EXIT is
pushed.
4. After the test has cycled through completely, press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic
menu.
5. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

COM1/COM2 Loopback Test

The COM1 LOOPBACK TEST menu allows the user to test the front-panel RS‑232 port.
COM2 LOOPBACK TEST menu tests the rear panel RS‑232 port.
A loopback plug is required for this test. The required loopback plug consists of a DB9P
connector (male) with pin 2 (RX) connected to pin 3 (TX) and pin 7 (RTS) connected to pin
8 (CTS). No other connections are necessary.





 
 

 

 


Figure 6-6 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

6–12
 Testing – 6

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to COM1 LOOPBACK TEST (Upper
Case).

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

output input led module 
If COM1 is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select COM1.

3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

CONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG
4. Connect the loop‑back plug to COM1, the front-panel RS‑232 connector.
5. Press ENTER, the relay will initiate the loopback test.
If the COM Port passes the loopback test the following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

-DONE-
If the COM Port fails the loopback test the following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

RX–TX FAIL
6. Press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic menu.
7. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

8. Ensure that the Diagnostic menu is selected to COM2 LOOPBACK TEST (Upper
Case).

COM2 LOOPBACK TEST

output input led module 
If COM2 is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select COM2.
9. Press ENTER, then repeat Steps 3 through 6 for COM2.

COM3 Test (2‑Wire)

The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to test the RS‑485 rear terminal connections
for proper operation.

QQ NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS‑485 converter and terminal emulator
software installed.

1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.

If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE (Upper
Case).

COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE

output input led module 
If COM3 is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select COM3.

6–13
M-4272 Instruction Book

3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE

IDLING...9600, N, 8, 1
4. From the rear of the unit, connect a PC to the MBTS at terminals 43 (-) and 44 (+)
using an RS‑485 converter set for 2‑wire operation. See Figure 6-7 for diagram.
5. Set the following PC communications parameters:
Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Duplex Half
6. Open the terminal emulator program on the PC, then open the COM port for the
RS‑485 converter.

Figure 6-7 RS‑485 2‑Wire Testing

7. Press a key on the PC keyboard, then verify the following:
a. The character pressed is displayed temporarily on the relay display.
b. The character pressed is displayed on the PC monitor.

8. When communication has been verified, press EXIT, the following is displayed:

COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE

-DONE-
9. Press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic menu.
10. Close the COM port on the PC, and exit the terminal program.
11. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

6–14
 Testing – 6

Clock ON/OFF
This feature provides the user with the ability to either start or stop the clock.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to CLOCK TEST (Upper Case).

CLOCK TEST
output input led module 
If CLOCK is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select CLOCK.
QQ NOTE: "80" will be displayed in the seconds place when the clock is stopped.

3. Press ENTER, the following is displayed:

a. If the clock is already running the following will be displayed and will continue
to update.

CLOCK TEST
01-Jan-2003 01:01:01

b. If the clock was NOT running the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST
01-Jan-2003 01:01:80
4. To start or stop the clock press ENTER, the following is displayed:
a. If the clock is already running the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST
CLOCK STOP

CLOCK TEST
01-Jan-2003 01:01:80

b. If the clock was NOT running the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST
CLOCK START

CLOCK TEST
01-Jan-2003 01:01:01

QQ NOTE: To preserve battery life the clock should be OFF if the unit is to be left
de‑energized for a long period of time.

5. The clock can be toggled ON or OFF by pressing any arrow pushbutton or ENTER.

6. To exit the Clock ON/OFF mode press EXIT, the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST
-DONE-
7. To exit the CLOCK ON/OFF Diagnostic Menu press EXIT.
8. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

6–15
M-4272 Instruction Book

SYS OK LED Flash/Illuminated

This feature provides the user with the ability to set the SYS OK LED to either Flash or be
Illuminated when the MBTS is working properly.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to FLASH SYS OK LED (Upper Case).

FLASH SYS OK LED

output input led module 
If LED (to the left of cal) is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow
pushbuttons to select LED.

3. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

OFF on
4. Select (upper case) either ON (to flash) or OFF (to Illuminate) by pressing the right/
left arrow pushbutton once.

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

FLASH SYS OK LED

-DONE-

6. To exit the FLASH SYS OK LED Diagnostic Menu press EXIT.

7. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing
EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press EXIT
a second time.

6–16
 Testing – 6

6.3 Metering Tests

Equipment Required
• If the MBTS permanent power supply source is not available, then a
portable power supply (>50 W) matched to the installed MBTS power supply
(indicated by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1) will be required.
• One synchronized voltage source with variable amplitude (0-120 % PT
secondary voltage).
• If current inputs to the MBTS are to be used, two single-phase independent
current sources (0 to 5 A) to simulate CT inputs are required.
• A PC with an RS‑232 port, ISScom Software installed.
• A null modem cable.

Metering Test Setup

1. Connect a null modem cable between the PC RS-232 port and the MBTS COM1
port.
2. Connect the temporary voltage source as follows:
a. If permanent voltage input connections are present, then disconnect and tag/
identify the permanent voltage input connections (Figure 6-8).
b. Connect the temporary voltage source to the Source 1, Source 2 and Bus
voltage inputs in parallel as indicated in Figure 6-8.

3. Connect the temporary current source as follows:

88  WARNING: Do not remove current transformer loads without shorting the current
inputs to the MBTS. Death or severe electrical shock can occur.

a. If permanent current input connections are present, temporarily place a

shorting device across each CT secondary, then disconnect and tag/identify
the permanent current input connections (Figure 6-9).
b. Connect the temporary current source in series to Source 1 and Source 2
current inputs as indicated in Figure 6-9.
4. Determine if the permanent MBTS power supply source is connected and available.
88  WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS may cause equipment connected to
the MBTS to operate.

5. If the permanent power supply source is connected and available, then energize
the power supply (The Power On Self Test will automatically begin).
6. If the permanent power supply source is not connected or is unavailable, then
proceed as follows:
a. Ensure that the permanent power supply source breaker is open and
applicable safety tagging is complete.
b. Disconnect and tag/identify the permanent power supply source connections
(Figure 6-1) from the MBTS (100/102 HOT and 101/103 NEUTRAL).
c. Connect the portable power supply to terminals (100/102 HOT and 101/103
NEUTRAL).

88  WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS may cause equipment connected to

the MBTS to operate.

d. Energize the portable power supply. The Power On Self Test will automatically
begin.

6–17
M-4272 Instruction Book

Voltage/Current Verification
1. Apply nominal voltage and current
2. Using ISScom, open the monitoring screen and verify the following:
• Verify that the displayed voltages are ± 0.5 V of the applied voltage
• Verify that the displayed currents are ± 0.1 A of the applied current

3. Remove the applied voltage and currents.

4. Remove all test equipment from voltage and current inputs.
5. Reconnect the permanent voltage and current input wiring.

Torque Requirements
• Terminals 1 – 74: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 8.0 in-lbs, maximum
• Terminals 75 – 103: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

6–18
 Testing – 6

6.4 Auto Calibration

QQ NOTE: The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System has been fully calibrated at the factory.
There is no need to recalibrate the unit prior to initial installation.

1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.

If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic mode
by performing the steps described in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode section
of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is selected to CAL (upper case).

AUTO CALIBRATION
output input led module 
If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select CAL.
3. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed depending on the frequency rating
of the unit:

60 HZ CALIBRATION
60_HZ

50 HZ CALIBRATION
50_HZ
4. Ensure that the 60 (50) HZ Calibration Menu is selected to 60_HZ, Upper Case
(50_Hz).
If 60_HZ (50_Hz) is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow
pushbuttons to select 60_HZ (50_Hz).

5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:

CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTS

PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE
6. Connect VA = VB = VC = 120.0 (±0.01) V at 0° phase (see Figure 6-8).
7. Connect IS1 = IS2= 5.00* Amps at 0° (see Figure 6-9).
* For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A

The calibration can be verified by exiting from the Diagnostic menu and reading status:
VA = VB = VC = 120 V
IS1 = IS2 = 5 A*
* For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A

QQ NOTE: The phase angle difference between voltage and current input source should
be 0°, ±0.05°, and an accurate low-distortion source should be used. (THD
less than 1%).

8. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed while the relay is being calibrated:

CALIBRATING
WAIT

When the calibration is complete, the following will be displayed:

CALIBRATING
DONE
9. Remove the calibration source inputs.

6–19
M-4272 Instruction Book




 















 















 












Figure 6-8 Metering Voltage Input Configuration



 




 


Figure 6-9 Metering Current Input Configuration

6–20
 Appendix – A

A Configuration Record Forms

Communication Settings Record Form.......................................... A–2

Setup System Settings Record Form...................................... A–3 to 5
System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form................. A–6 to 14
Function 27B Setpoints........................................................... A–15,16
Function 50BF Setpoints......................................................... A–17,18
Function 50S1 Setpoints.............................................................. A–19
Function 50S2 Setpoints.............................................................. A–20
Function 60FLB Setpoints............................................................ A–21
Function 81 Setpoints.................................................................. A–21
Function 81R Setpoints........................................................... A–22,23
Function TCM Setpoints............................................................... A–24
Function CCM Setpoints.............................................................. A–25
Function ISSLogic Setpoints............................................... A–26 to 29
Sequence of Events Setup..................................................... A–30,31
Oscillograph Setup....................................................................... A–32
Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS Configuration Table....................... A–33,34
Table A-2 Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map............... A–35 to 37

This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms for recording the configuration and settings of the
M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS). The forms can be supplied to field service personnel
for configuring the MBTS, and kept on file for future reference.
A copy of the MBTS Input/Output Map (Table A‑1 and Table A-2) is provided to define and record
the blocking inputs and output configuration. For each function, check the Enabled or Disabled
checkbox. If the function is Enabled, then check the output contacts to be operated by the function,
and the inputs designated to block the function operation.
The Communication Settings Record Form (page A–2) reproduces the System Communication Setup
menus. This form records definition of the parameters necessary for communication with the MBTS.
The Setup System Settings Record Form (page A–3) reproduces the Setup System menus. For
each function or setpoint, refer to the configuration you have defined using the MBTS Configuration
Table, and check whether it should be enabled or disabled, the output contacts it will activate, and
the inputs that will block its operation.
The System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (page A–6) allows recording of the specific
values entered for each transfer. The form follows the Transfer Settings section of the System
Setpoints dialog screen.
The System Setpoints Function Settings Record Forms, beginning on page A–15, allow recording of
the specific values entered for each function. The forms follow the Function Settings section of the
System Setpoints dialog screen. If a function is disabled, the input/output screens for that function
will not be displayed.

A–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

M‑4272 Communication Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

COM 1

Dead Sync Time 2 to 300 (ms) 50

1200/ 2400
Baud Rate 9600
4800/ 9600
Parity None/ Even/ Odd None

Stop Bit 1 or 2 1

System's Comm. Address – 1

COM 2

Dead Sync Time 2 to 300 (ms) 50

1200/ 2400
Baud Rate 9600
4800/ 9600
Parity None/ Even/ Odd None

Stop Bit 1 or 2 1

System's Comm. Address – 1

COM 3 / RS485

Dead Sync Time 2 to 300 (ms) 50

Parity None/ Even/ Odd None

Stop Bit 1 or 2 1

System's Comm. Address – 1

ETHERNET SETTINGS

Ethernet Enable/Disable Disable

DHCP Protocolo Enable/Disable Disable

IP Address (DHCP Disabled) N/A 192.168.1.43

Net Mask (DHCP Disabled) N/A 255.255.255.0

Gateway (DHCP Disabled) N/A 192.168.1.1

Remote/Local Control

Remote/Local Control Mode Local/Remoto Remoto

Communication Settings Record Form

A–2
 Appendix – A

M‑4272 Setup System Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

SYSTEM TYPE – FACTORY SETTINGS

Firmware Version – –

Nominal Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz –

CT Secondary Rating 1A/5A –

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Nominal Voltage 50.0 to 140.0 (V) 120.0

Nominal Current 0.50 to 6.00 (A) 5.00

Phase Rotation ABC / ACB ABC

S1 / S2 VT Configuration (Select ONE)

PHASE TO GROUND SETTING PHASE TO PHASE SETTING

Phase to Ground (Three Phase) Phase to Phase (Three Phase)

Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) Phase to Phase (Single Phase AB)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) Phase to Phase (Single Phase BC)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) Phase to Phase (Single Phase CA)

Bus VT Configuration (Select ONE based on selection above)

PHASE TO GROUND SETTING PHASE TO PHASE SETTING

Phase to Ground (Three Phase) Phase to Phase (Three Phase)

Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) Phase to Phase (Single Phase AB)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) Phase to Phase (Single Phase BC)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) Phase to Phase (Single Phase CA)

S1/S2 CT Configuration
S1 and S2 CT Connected to
Yes or No No
Rear Terminals

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

Setup System Settings Record Form (1 of 3)

A–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

M‑4272 Setup System Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

VT and CT Ratios

S1 VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1.0

S2 VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1.0
Bus VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1.0
S1 CT Ratio 1 to 65500 :1 1
S2 CT Ratio 1 to 65500 :1 1

Latched Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Pulsed Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Input Active States

Input 3 Open Close Input 12 Open Close

Input 6 Open Close Input 13 Open Close

Input 7 Open Close Input 14 Open Close

Input 8 Open Close Input 15 Open Close

Input 9 Open Close Input 16 Open Close

Input 10 Open Close Input 17 Open Close

Input 11 Open Close Input 18 Open Close

Duplicate Outputs Selection

Output 9 Duplicates Output 1 (Trip S1)

Output 10 Duplicates Output 2 (Close S1)
Output 11 Duplicates Output 3 (Trip S2)
Output 12 Duplicates Output 4 (Close S2)

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

Setup System Settings Record Form (2 of 3)

A–4
 Appendix – A

M‑4272 Setup System Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Output Seal-in Time

OUT 5 2 to 8160 Cycles 30

OUT 6 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 7 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 8 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 9 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 10 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 11 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 12 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 13 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 14 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 15 2 to 8160 Cycles 30
OUT 16 2 to 8160 Cycles 30

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

Setup System Settings Record Form (3 of 3)

A–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

PROFILE SETTINGS
Manual/
Switching Method Manual
Input Contact
Setpoint Profile 1 to 4 1 Profile

TRANSFER SETTINGS – COMMON SETTINGS

Common Function Settings

Simultaneous/
Transfer Mode Simultaneous
Sequential
Upper Voltage Limit New Source 5 to 180 (V) 132

Lower Voltage Limit New Source 5 to 180 (V) 102

Breaker Closing Time

S1 Set Breaker Closing Time 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 3.5

S2 Set Breaker Closing Time 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 3.5

Adaptation Disable/Enable Enable/Disable Disable

S1 Breaker Closing Time Deviation 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 1.0

S2 Breaker Closing Time Deviation 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 1.0

S1 Breaker 52a and 52b Position Disagreement

Pickup Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 5

Dropout Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1

S2 Breaker 52a and 52b Position Disagreement

Pickup Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 5

Dropout Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1

Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time 50 to 3000 Cycles 600

Local Manual Initiate Time Delay 0 to 8160 Cycles 0

Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay 0 to 8160 Cycles 0

Blocking After Transfer Time 0 to 8160 Cycles 600

Trip Command Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 18

Close Command Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 18

Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open Condition

Block Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (1 of 9)

A–6
 Appendix – A

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Common Settings – Inputs

S1 52a (Input 1) /
S1 52b (Input 2) /
Breaker Status Inputs: S1 52a (Input 1)
S1 52a & 52b
(Inputs 1 & 2)

S2 52a (Input 4) /
S2 52b (Input 5) /
S2 52a (Input 4)
S2 52a & 52b
(Inputs 4 & 5)

External Control Inputs Configuration:

Transfer Block #1
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Transfer Block #2
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Transfer Block #3
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

External Status Reset

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (2 of 9)

A–7
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Common Settings – Outputs

Automatic Fast Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Transfer Completed Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Incomplete Transfer Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (3 of 9)

A–8
 Appendix – A

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

TRANSFER SETTINGS – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS

Automatic Transfer Settings – Setup

Automatic Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

No Transfer/
Auto Close After External Breaker Trip Initiate Automatic No Transfer
Transfer

External Control Input Configuration:

Automatic Transfer Block (select only one)
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) (select only one)

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) (select only one)

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

External Initiate (S1 to S2) (previously 27-S1) (select only one)

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

External Initiate (S2 to S1) (previously 27-S2) (select only one)

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (4 of 9)

A–9
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Automatic Transfer Settings – Fast Transfer

Fast Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Phase Angle Limit 0.0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 20.0

Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 (V) 12

Delta Frequency Limit Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 (Hz) 2.00

Time Window 1.0 to 10.0 Cycles 10.0

Closing Command Time Delay 0.0 to 10.0 Cycles 0.0

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Automatic Transfer Settings – In-Phase Transfer

In-Phase Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 (V) 24

Delta Frequency Limit 0.10 to 15.00 (Hz) 15.00

Time Window 10 to 600 Cycles 120

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (5 of 9)

A–10
 Appendix – A

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Automatic Transfer Settings – Residual Voltage Transfer

Residual Voltage Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Delay On Initiate 0 to 10 Cycles 2

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 50 (V) 36

Close Delay 0 to 100 Cycles 2

Load Shed on Voltage Enable/Disable Disable

Settings apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes

Load Shed on Voltage 5 to 50 (V) 38

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Automatic Transfer Settings – Fixed-Time Transfer

Fixed-Time Transfer Enable/Disable Disable

Time Delay 30 to 1000 Cycles 150

Close Delay 0 to 100 Cycles 4

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Fixed-Time Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (6 of 9)

A–11
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

TRANSFER SETTINGS – MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS

Manual Transfer Settings – Setup

Manual Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

External Control Inputs Configuration:

Manual Transfer Block
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Manual Transfer Initiate

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Manual Transfer Settings – Fast Transfer

Fast Transfer Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Phase Angle Limit 0.0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 20.0

Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 (V) 12

Delta Frequency Limit Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 (Hz) 2.00

Time Window 1.0 to 10.0 Cycles 10.0

Closing Command Time Delay 0.0 to 10.0 Cycles 0.0

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (7 of 9)

A–12
 Appendix – A

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Manual Transfer Settings – In-Phase Transfer

In-Phase Transfer Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 (V) 24

Delta Frequency Limit 0.10 to 15.00 (Hz) 15.00

Time Window 10 to 600 Cycles 120

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Manual Transfer Settings – Residual Voltage Transfer

Residual Voltage Transfer Enable/Disable Disable

Delay On Initiate 0 to 10 Cycles 2

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 50 (V) 36

Close Delay 0 to 100 Cycles 2

Load Shed on Voltage Enable/Disable Disable

Settings apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes

Load Shed on Voltage 5 to 50 (V) 38

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Selected Outputs apply to both Automatic and Manual Transfer Modes.
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (8 of 9)

A–13
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M‑4272 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING

Manual Transfer Settings – Hot Parallel Transfer

Hot Parallel Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Phase Angle Limit 0.0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 10.0

Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 (V) 5

Delta Frequency Limit Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 0.50 (Hz) 0.10

Time Window 1.0 to 50.0 Cycles 10.0

Tripping Command Time Delay 0.0 to 30.0 Cycles 0.0

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TRANSFER SETTINGS – AUTO TRIP AFTER EXTERNAL BREAKER CLOSE SETTINGS

Auto Trip

Auto Trip Enable/Disable Disable

Breaker Trip Option: Trip Originally Closed Breaker Trip Originally

or Trip Breaker Just Closed Closed Breaker

Tripping Command Time Delay 0.0 to 50.0 Cycles 3.0

Blocking Inputs Selection

Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (9 of 9)

A–14
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

27B – BUS UNDERVOLTAGE (#1 TO #4 SETPOINTS)

27B #1 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)

Function 27B #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 5 to 120 (V) 96
Voltage Inhibit Enable/Disable Disable
Voltage Inhibit 5 to 120 (V) 5
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 60
Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 2 (S1 52b) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB

27B #2 Bus Undervoltage Automatic Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)

Function 27B #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 5 to 120 (V) 96

Voltage Inhibit Enable/Disable Disable

Voltage Inhibit 5 to 120 (V) 5

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 60

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 5 (S2 52b) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (1 of 11)

A–15
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

27B #3 BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

Function 27B #3 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 5 to 120 (V) 84

Voltage Inhibit Enable/Disable Disable

Voltage Inhibit 5 to 120 (V) 5

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 30

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
1 2 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52a) (S1 52b) (S2 52a) (S2 52b)

27B #4 BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

Function 27B #4 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 5 to 120 (V) 84
Voltage Inhibit Enable/Disable Disable
Voltage Inhibit 5 to 120 (V) 5
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 30
Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
1 2 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52a) (S1 52b) (S2 52a) (S2 52b)

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (2 of 11)

A–16
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

50BF #1 – SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE

50BF #1

Function 50BF #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 0.10 to 10.00 (A) 1.25

Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 10

Outputs
Outputs 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Outputs Initiate
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Inputs Initiate
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

S1 BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)

S1 BF Enable/Disable Enable
Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 7
Outputs
Outputs 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (3 of 11)

A–17
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

50BF #2 – SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE

50BF #2

Function 50BF #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 (A) 1.25

Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 10

Outputs
Outputs 1 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Outputs Initiate
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Inputs Initiate
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

S2BF – Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)

S1 BF Enable/Disable Enable
Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 7
Outputs
Outputs 1 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (4 of 11)

A–18
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

50S1 – SOURCE 1 INST. PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

50S1 #1

Function 50S1 #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 1.0 to 100.0 (A) 4.0

Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 (Cycles) 10

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

50S1 #2

Function 50S1 #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 1.0 to 100.0 (A) 4.0

Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 (Cycles) 10

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (5 of 11)

A–19
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

50S2 – SOURCE 2 INST. PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

50S2 #1

Function 50S2 #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 1.0 to 100.0 (A) 4.0

Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 (Cycles) 10

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

50S2 #2

Function 50S2 #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 1.0 to 100.0 (A) 4.0

Dropout Time Delay 1 to 8160 (Cycles) 10

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (6 of 11)

A–20
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

60FLB – BUS VT FUSE-LOSS

60FLB

Function 60FLB Enable/Disable Disable

Delta Voltage Pickup 5 to 25 (V) 20
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 30
Blocking Timeout Time Delay 1 to 300 Cycles 3
Block All Transfers
Except Fixed Time Block All
Bus VT Fuse-Loss Condition
Transfer/ Transfers
Block All Transfers
Outputs Initiate
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

81 – BUS FREQUENCY (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

81 #1

81 #1 – Bus Frequency Enable/Disable Disable

Can be used for Load Shedding

Pickup 50.00 to 67.00 (Hz) 57.50

Time Delay 5 to 65500 Cycles 12
Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52b) (S2 52b)

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (7 of 11)

A–21
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

81 #2

81 #2 – Bus Frequency Enable/Disable Disable

Can be used for Load Shedding

Pickup 50.00 to 67.00 (Hz) 57.00

Time Delay 5 to 65500 Cycles 30
Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52b) (S2 52b)

81R – BUS RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY (ROCOF) (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

81R #1

Function 81R #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Can be used for Load Shedding

Pickup 0.10 to 20.00 (Hz/Sec) 0.10

Time Delay 3 to 8160 Cycles 120

Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99 (%) 20

Increasing Frequency Enable/Disable Disable

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52b) (S2 52b)

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (8 of 11)

A–22
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

81R #2

Function 81R #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Can be used for Load Shedding

Pickup 0.10 to 20.00 (Hz/Sec) 1.00

Time Delay 3 to 8160 Cycles 120
Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99 (%) 20

Increasing Frequency Enable/Disable Disable

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52b) (S2 52b)

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (9 of 11)

A–23
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

TCM – TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

TCM #1 (Source 1 Breaker)

TCM #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 30

Dropout Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 5

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TCM #2 (Source 2 Breaker)

TCM #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 30

Dropout Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 5

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (10 of 11)

A–24
 Appendix – A

Profile

M-4272 System Setpoints – Function Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

CCM – CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR (#1 TO #2 SETPOINTS)

CCM #1 (Source 1 Breaker)

Function CCM #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 30

Dropout Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 5

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CCM #2 (Source 2 Breaker)

Function CCM #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 30

Dropout Time Delay 5 to 8160 Cycles 5

Outputs
Outputs 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blocking Inputs
Inputs 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Default values listed are for 60 Hz, 5 A CT.

System Setpoints Function Settings Record Form (11 of 11)

A–25
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

ISSL – ISSLogic (#1 to #6)

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

ISSLogic #1 to #6

ISSLogic # 1 to 6 –

ISSLogic Enable/Disable Disable

Initiating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Outputs

Initiating Function Timeout

27B #1 60FLB TCM #2 ISSL #5
27B #2 81 #1 CCM #1 ISSL #6
27B #3 81 #2 CCM #2 50S1 #1
27B #4 81R #1 ISSL #2 50S1 #2
50BF #1 81R #2 ISSL #3 50S2 #1
50BF #2 TCM #1 ISSL #4 50S2 #2

Initiating Function Pickup

27B #1 60FLB TCM #2 ISSL #5
27B #2 81 #1 CCM #1 ISSL #6
27B #3 81 #2 CCM #2 50S1 #1
27B #4 81R #1 ISSL #2 50S1 #2
50BF #1 81R #2 ISSL #3 50S2 #1
50BF #2 TCM #1 ISSL #4 50S2 #2

Function ISSLogic Setpoints (1 of 4)

A–26
 Appendix – A

Profile

ISSL – ISSLogic (#1 to #6)

Initiating System Status
Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Automatic In­Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Automatic In­Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Ready Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer
Transfer Ready Auto Close Initiated
Automatic Transfer Enabled Manual Transfer Enabled
Automatic Transfer Initiated Manual Transfer Initiated
Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FLB Condition) Hot Parallel Transfer In Process
27B#1 Bus UV Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Hot Parallel Transfer Operated
27B#2 Bus UV Automatic Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1) Auto Trip Enabled
Open Transition Transfer In Process Auto Trip Operated
Transfer Completed S1/S2 Breaker Racked-Out Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Operated New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
In-Phase Transfer Operated New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Operated Bus VT Fuse-Loss Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Operated Trip/Close Circuit Open Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Load Shedding Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked
In­-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Incomplete Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding Blocking After Transfer Alarm
Load Shedding (81#1, 81R#1) S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range
S1 Breaker Failure S2 Breaker Failure
S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Positon Disagreement S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement
S1 Breaker Opened S2 Breaker Opened
S1 Breaker Closed S2 Breaker Closed
Trip S1 Breaker Command Trip S2 Breaker Command
Close S1 Breaker Command Close S2 Breaker Command
Source 1 (New Source) Source 2 (New Source)
Remote Mode

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

Initiate via Communication Point Enable/Disable Disable

Function ISSLogic Setpoints (2 of 4)

A–27
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

ISSL – ISSLogic (#1 to #6)

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

Initiating Inputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52a) (S1 52b) (S1 52SP) (S2 52a) (S2 52b) (S2 52SP)

Blocking Inputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB
(S1 52a) (S1 52b) (S1 52SP) (S2 52a) (S2 52b) (S2 52SP)

Block System Status

Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Automatic In­Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Automatic In­Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Automatic Fast Transfer Ready Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer
Transfer Ready Auto Close Initiated
Automatic Transfer Enabled Manual Transfer Enabled
Automatic Transfer Initiated Manual Transfer Initiated
Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FLB Condition) Hot Parallel Transfer In Process
27B#1 Bus UV Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Hot Parallel Transfer Operated
27B#2 Bus UV Automatic Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1) Auto Trip Enabled
Open Transition Transfer In Process Auto Trip Operated
Transfer Completed S1/S2 Breaker Racked-Out Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Operated New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
In-Phase Transfer Operated New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Operated Bus VT Fuse-Loss Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Operated Trip/Close Circuit Open Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Load Shedding Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked
In-­Phase Transfer Load Shedding Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding Incomplete Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding Blocking After Transfer Alarm
Load Shedding (81#1, 81R#1) S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range
S1 Breaker Failure S2 Breaker Failure
S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Positon Disagreement S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement
S1 Breaker Opened S2 Breaker Opened
S1 Breaker Closed S2 Breaker Closed
Trip S1 Breaker Command Trip S2 Breaker Command
Close S1 Breaker Command Close S2 Breaker Command
Source 1 (New Source) Source 2 (New Source)
Remote Mode

Function ISSLogic Setpoints (3 of 4)

A–28
 Appendix – A

Profile

ISSL – ISSLogic (#1 to #6)

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

Block via Communication

Enable/Disable Disable
Point

Delay 0 to 65500 Cycles 0

Profile Switch
Not Activated #1 #2 #3 #4

DO / RST 0 to 65500 Cycles 0

Dropout/
DO/RST Timer Reset Timer
Reset Timer

Outputs
5 6 7 LCK/BLK 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Outputs (Out 8)

No Transfer Initiate
Initiate S1 to S2 Transfer
Initiate S2 to S1 Transfer
Transfer Block

Function ISSLogic Setpoints (4 of 4)

A–29
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Sequence of Events Setup

Function Setup

Function Pickup
27B #1 50BF #1 81 #2 TCM #2 ISSL #2 ISSL #6
27B #2 50BF #2 81R #1 CCM #1 ISSL #3 50S1 #1
27B #3 60FLB 81R #2 CCM #2 ISSL #4 50S1 #2
27B #4 81 #1 TCM #1 ISSL #1 ISSL #5 50S2 #1
50S2 #2

Function Timeout
27B #1 50BF #1 81 #2 TCM #2 ISSL #2 ISSL #6
27B #2 50BF #2 81R #1 CCM #1 ISSL #3 50S1 #1
27B #3 60FLB 81R #2 CCM #2 ISSL #4 50S1 #2
27B #4 81 #1 TCM #1 ISSL #1 ISSL #5 50S2 #1
50S2 #2

Function Dropout
27B #1 50BF #1 81 #2 TCM #2 ISSL #2 ISSL #6
27B #2 50BF #2 81R #1 CCM #1 ISSL #3 50S1 #1
27B #3 60FLB 81R #2 CCM #2 ISSL #4 50S1 #2
27B #4 81 #1 TCM #1 ISSL #1 ISSL #5 50S2 #1
50S2 #2

Input Pickup Status

Input 1 (S1 52a) Input 11

Input 2 (S1 52b) Input 12
Input 3 (S1 52SP) Input 13
Input 4 (S2 52a) Input 14
Input 5 (S2 52b) Input 15
Input 6 (S2 52SP) Input 16
Input 7 [86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)] Input 17
Input 8 (Manual Transfer Initiate) Input 18
Input 9 FLB
Input 10

Sequence of Events Setup (1 of 2)

A–30
 Appendix – A

Sequence of Events Setup

Input Dropout Status

Input 1 (S1 52a) Input 11

Input 2 (S1 52b) Input 12

Input 3 (S1 52SP) Input 13

Input 4 (S2 52a) Input 14

Input 5 (S2 52b) Input 15

Input 6 (S2 52SP) Input 16

Input 7 [86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)] Input 17

Input 8 (Manual Transfer Initiate) Input 18

Input 9 FLB

Input 10

Output Status

Output Pickup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Status

Output Dropout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Status

Sequence of Events Setup (2 of 2)

A–31
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Profile

Oscillograph Setup
SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING

Number of Records 1 to 16 6

Post Trigger Delay (%) 88

Oscillograph Samples per Cycle 16 or 32 Samples 16

Trigger Inputs

Trigger Inputs

Input 1 (S1 52a) Input 11

Input 2 (S1 52b) Input 12

Input 3 (S1 52SP) Input 13

Input 4 (S2 52a) Input 14

Input 5 (S2 52b) Input 15

Input 6 (S2 52SP) Input 16
Input 7 [86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)] Input 17
Input 8 (Manual Transfer Initiate) Input 18
Input 9 FLB
Input 10

Trigger Outputs

Trigger 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Outputs

Oscillograph Setup

A–32
 Appendix – A

OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Transfer Settings – Common Settings – Inputs

Breaker Status Inputs

S1 52a (Input 1) S1 52b (Input 2) S1 52a & 52b (Input 1 & 2)

S2 52a (Input 4) S2 52b (Input 5) S2 52a & 52b (Input 4 & 5)

External Control Inputs Configuration

Transfer Block #1 – – – – – –
Transfer Block #2 – – – – – –
Transfer Block #3 – – – – – –
External Status Reset – – – – – –

Transfer Settings – Common Settings – Outputs

Automatic Fast Transfer Ready – – – – – N/A
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready – – – – – N/A
Transfer Ready – – – – – N/A
Transfer Completed – – – – – N/A
Incomplete Transfer – – – – – N/A

Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS – Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map

(1 of 2)

A–33
Appendix – A

Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS – Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map (1 of 2) 1

A–34
Appendix – A

OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Transfer Settings – Automatic Transfer Settings

M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic Transfer 
Auto Close After External Breaker Trip No Transfer Initiate Automatic Transfer

External Control Input Configuration

Automatic Transfer Block N/A – – – – – –
86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) N/A – – – – – –
86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) N/A – – – – – –
External Initiate (S1 to S2) (Previously 27-S1 Initiate) OUTPUTS N/A – – – – – –
External Initiate (S2 to S1) (Previously 27-S2 Initiate) OUTPUTS N/A – – – – – –
Fast Transfer  Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –
In-Phase Transfer  Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –
Residual Voltage
 Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –
Transfer
Fixed-Time Transfer  Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –

Transfer Settings – Manual Transfer Settings

Manual Transfer 
External Control Input Configuration
Manual Transfer Block N/A – – – – – –
Manual Transfer Initiate N/A – – – – – –
Fast Transfer  Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –
In-Phase Transfer  Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –

Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS – Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map

Residual Voltage
 Load Shedding Outputs – – – – – –
Transfer
Hot Parallel Transfer  N/A – – – – – –
Transfer Settings – Auto Trip After External Breaker Close

(2 of 2)
Auto Trip  N/A – – – – – –

Table A-1 M-4272 MBTS – Transfer Settings – Input/Output Map (2 of 2) 2

 Appendix – A

Profile # OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB

Table A-2
27B – Bus Undervoltage
27B #1
Automatic
 – – – – – – – – – – 
Transfer Initiate
(S1 to S2)
27B #2
Automatic
 – – – – – – – – – – 
Transfer Initiate
(S2 to S1)
27B #3  – – – – – – – 
27B #4  – – – – – – – 
50BF #1 – Source 1 Breaker Failure
50BF #1  – –  – – – – – – – – –
50BF #1 I/O Initiate – – – – – – –

50BF #2 – Source 2 Breaker Failure

50BF #2   – – – – – – – – – – –
50BF #2 I/O Initiate – – – – – – – –

S1 BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)

S1 BF  – –  – – – – – – – – –

S2 BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)

S2 BF   – – – – – – – – – – –

M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map

50S1 – SOURCE 1 INST. PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION
50S1 #1  – – – – – – – – – – – –
50S1 #2  – – – – – – – – – – – –

(1 of 3)
Table A-2 M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map (1 of 3) 3

A–35
Appendix – A
A–36
Appendix – A

OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB

50S2 – SOURCE 2 INST. PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION

M‑4272 Instruction Book

Table A-2
50S2 #1  – – – – – – – – – – – –
50S2 #2  – – – – – – – – – – – –

60FLB – Bus VT Fuse-Loss

60FLB  – – – – – – – – – – – –

81 – Bus Frequency
81 #1  – – – – – – – – – 
81 #2  – – – – – – – – – 
81R – Bus Rate of Change of Frequency
81R #1  – – – – – – – – – 
81R #2  – – – – – – – – – 
TCM – Trip Circuit Monitor
TCM #1  – – – – – – – – – – – –
TCM #2  – – – – – – – – – – – –

CCM – Close Circuit Monitor

CCM #1  – – – – – – – – – – – –
CCM #2  – – – – – – – – – – – –

ISSLogic
INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS

M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map

ISSL #1 
BLOCKING INPUTS

(2 of 3)
Table A-2 M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map (2 of 3) 4
 Appendix – A

Profile # OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FLB

INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS

Table A-2
ISSL #2 
BLOCKING INPUTS

INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #3 
BLOCKING INPUTS

INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #4 
BLOCKING INPUTS

INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #5 
BLOCKING INPUTS

M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map

INITIATING OUTPUTS INITIATING INPUTS
ISSL #6 
BLOCKING INPUTS

(3 of 3)
Table A-2 M-4272 MBTS – Function Settings – Input/Output Map (3 of 3) 5

A–37
Appendix – A
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

A–38
 Communications: Appendix – B

B Communications

The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) incorporates three serial ports and an
optional RJ45 Ethernet port for intelligent, digital communication with external devices.
Equipment such as RTU's, data concentrators, modems, or computers can be interfaced
for direct, on-line, real time data acquisition and control. Generally, all data available to the
operator through the front panel of the relay with the M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface
(HMI) module is accessible remotely through the MODBUS data exchange protocol. The
protocol document and the database‑specific protocol document are available from the
factory or from our website at www.beckwithelectric.com.
The S‑4200 ISScom Communications Software has been supplied for communication to any
Windows compatible computer running under Microsoft Windows 7 or higher and firmware
versions V02.01.07 or later.
The communication protocol implements serial, byte oriented, asynchronous communication
and can be used to fulfill the following communications functions:
• Real time monitoring of line status.
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints.
• Downloading of recorded oscillograph and transfer event log data.
• Reconfiguration of MBTS functions.

QQ NOTE: The following restrictions apply for MODBUS protocol use:

1. Parity is supported on COM1, COM2 and COM3; valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1;
8,E,1; 8,N,1; 8,O,2 or 8,E,2.
2. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only).
3. Standard baud rates from 1200 to 9600 are supported.
4. Only the following MODBUS commands are supported:
a. read holding register (function 03)
b. read input register (function 04)
c. force single coil (function 05)
d. preset single register (function 06)

For detailed information on ISScom communications, refer to Section 4.1, Unit Setup.

Serial Ports
The MBTS includes both front and rear panel RS‑232 ports and a rear RS‑485 port. The front
and rear panel RS‑232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connector configured as DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) per the EIA-232D standard. Signals are defined in Table B-1, Communication
Port Signals .
The 2-wire RS‑485 port is assigned to the rear panel terminal block pins 43 (–) and 44 (+).
Each communication port may be configured to operate at any of the standard baud rates
(1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS‑485 port shares the same baud rate with COM 2
(for COM1 see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).
A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1, Null Modem Cable: M-0423, if direct
connection to a PC (personal computer) is desired.

B–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Optional Ethernet Port

The M‑4272, when equipped with the optional Ethernet port can be accessed from a local
network. When the ethernet port is enabled, the COM2 serial port (RS‑232) is unavailable for
communication. However, the Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the COM2 Port
when Ethernet is enabled. When COM2 Port is enabled the Ethernet Port is not available.
Although the ethernet connection speed is faster than the RS‑232 port (can be up to 10
Mbps), the ethernet module connects internally through the COM2 serial connection and
is therefore limited to connection speeds up to 9600 bps.
Either port COM2 (Ethernet) or COM3 may be used to remotely set and interrogate the relay
using a local area network, modem or other direct serial connection.

Signal COM1 COM2

RX Receive Data Pin 2 Pin 2
TX Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3
RTS Request to Send Pin 7 Pin 7
CTS Clear to Send Pin 8
DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4
DCD Data Carrier Detect Pin 1*
GND Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5
+15V Pin 1*
-15V Pin 9*
TTL IRIG-B (+) Pin 6*
*Optional: See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, ±15V (±15%)
@100 mA maximum.

Table B-1 Communication Port Signals

QQ NOTE: Also see Table 5-1, Table 5-2 and Figure 5-14.


 
 
  
   
   

  
     

  

   
   

  
Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423

B–2
 Communications: Appendix – B

PC Master

Echo Cancel On

25 pin or
9‑25 pin Straight‑Through Cable

DYMEC Fiber Optic

Link / Repeater
DCE
DTE

REP
OFF

T R

FOC FOC

FOC FOC

R T R T R T

DCE DCE DCE

DTE DTE DTE

REP REP REP

OFF OFF OFF

Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3

Address 1 Address 2 Address 3

RS-232 RS-232 RS-232

9‑25 pin "Straight‑Through" Cables

Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network

B–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

RS‑485 2‑Wire Network

Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3
Address 6 Address 8 Address 1

‑ + ‑ +
PC Master

B(‑) 200 Ω*
A(+)

Twisted
RS‑232 to RS‑485 2‑wire
converter or RS‑485 PC Card

▲▲ CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all
units should be mounted in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber
optics with the appropriate converters should be used for isolation.

QQ NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave
on the network should have the termination resistor installed. This may be
completed externally or using a jumper internal to the unit. See Section 5.4,
Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.

Figure B-3 RS-485 Network


 



Figure B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal

B–4
 Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

C Self-Test Error Codes

1
2 Battery backed RAM test fail
3 EEPROM write power-up fail
4 EEPROM read back power-up fail
5 Dual port RAM test fail
6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail
7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of power
8 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of battery backed RAM
9 DMA checksum/physical block fail
10 Oscillograph Memory Test fail
11 DSP external program RAM fail
12 DSP A/D convert fail
13 DSP ground channel fail
14 DSP reference channel fail
15 DSP PGA gain fail
16 DSP DSP<-> HOST interrupt 1 fail
17 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 set fail
18 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 reset fail
19 DSP program load fail
20 DSP not running run mode code
21 DSP not running primary boot code
22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail
23 EEPROM write verify error
26 WARNING calibration checksum mismatch warning
27* WARNING setpoint checksum mismatch warning
28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning
29 Supply/mux PGA running test fail

*If a system Setpoint has been changed and power is removed from the MBTS within 5 minutes, an Error
Code 27 will be displayed when power is applied to the MBTS. This condition is normal and the Error Code
27 should be reset.

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (1 of 2)

C–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

30 External DSP RAM test fail

31 Unrecognized INT1 code
32 Values update watchdog fail

34 Restart Error
35 Interrupt Error
36 Trap Error
37 Calibration running check fail
38 Ethernet Board not running (Warning)

40 Interrupt noise INT2

44 Oscillograph buffer overflow

45 Oscillograph buffer underflow
46 Failure of DSP to calculate calibration phasors

50 Stack Overflow
51 Setpoint Write Overflow

Table C‑1 Self-Test Error Codes (2 of 2)

Error Code Description

An incorrect communication password supplied to the system
Comm Channel Locked
will result in this message.
This message indicates that the system is being operated
HMI Active
locally and serial communication is suspended.
This error results if there are problems with the serial optical
Echo Timeout fiber communication link or if the echo cancel function is
used incorrectly.
Illegal Data Value This error results if incorrect or out of range data is entered.
This error results if incorrect function is performed on
Illegal Function
modbus protocol.
This error results if an incompatible version of ISScom
Illegal Data Address software is used. This is a communication protocol error.
Contact a Beckwith Electric Co. factory representative.
This error results if there are problems with the
Invalid CRC communication link or if the echo cancel function is used
incorrectly.
This error results when there is a mismatch in PC Com Port
Failed to open Comm Port
settings.
This error results when communication with the system is
Failed to write to Comm Port
lost while attempting to write data to the system.
This error results when communication with the system is
Read Timeout
lost while attempting to read data from the system.

Table C‑2 ISScom Error Messages

C–2
 Appendix – D

D Transfer Event Log Samples

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print‑ready screens provided by the ISScom Transfer Event
Log Print Summary and Print Detail features.

D–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Transfer Event Log Recorder

System: M4272
Date: 12/19/2005, 15:45:49

No. Date &Time Event Information

1 12/06/2005, 09:18:39.399 S2 Breaker Opened

Sl Breaker Closed
Trip S1 Breaker Command
27B #1: Pickup/Timeout
Input Pickup: 1 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 1

2 12/06/2005, 09:18:39.412 Sl Breaker Opened

S2Breaker Opened
Trip S1 Breaker Command
Close S2 Breaker Command
27B #1: Pickup/Timeout
Input Pickup: 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 14

3 12/06/2005, 09:18:39.437 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Trip S1 Breaker Command
Close S2 Breaker Command
27B #1: Pickup/Timeout
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 14
Transfer : 1

4 12/06/2005, 10:51:10.862 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Close S2Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 4

5 12/06/2005, 10:51:10.887 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Close S2 Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
OutputPickup: 4
Transfer : 2

6 12/06/2005, 11:14:01.870 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Trip S2Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 3

7 12/06/2005, 11:14:01.904 S1 Breaker Opened

Page 1

Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)

D–2
 Appendix – D

No• Date & Time Event Information

S2 Breaker Opened
Trip S2 Breaker Command
Close S1Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 2 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 2 3

8 12/06/2005, 11:14:01.924 S2 Breaker Opened

S1Breaker Closed
Trip S2 Breaker Command
Close Sl Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 13 5 6
Output Pickup: 2 3
Transfer : 3

9 12/06/2005, 11:24:26.104 S2 Breaker Opened

S1Breaker Closed
TripS1Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 135 6
Output Pickup: 1

10 12/06/2005, 11:24:26.137 S1Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Trip Sl Breaker Command
Close S2Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 2 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 14

11 12/06/2005, 11:24:26.162 S1Breaker Opened

S2Breaker Closed
Trip S1Breaker Command
Close S2 Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 14
Transfer :4

Page 2

Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 2 of 2)

D–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Transfer Event Log Recorder

System: M4272
Date: 10/28/2005, 07:54:56

No. Date & Time Event Information

1 10/27/2005, 11:41:25.523 27B #1: Pickup/Trip

Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 4
System Status: Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK,
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK,
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Auto Delayed In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Auto Transfer Enabled,
Auto Transfer Initiated,
27B #1 Bus UV Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2),
Transfer Completed,
Fixed Time Transfer Operated,
S1 Breaker Opened,
Trip S1 Breaker Command,
External Manual Transfer Selected,
Blocking After Transfer Alarm ,
S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Limit,
S2 Breaker Closed,
New Source 2,
Close S2 Breaker Command,

System Start Signal: Internal 27-1

Vps(S1): 0.000 (A)
Vps(S2):
Vps(Bus):
I(S1): VA:
I(S2): 119.9 (A)
120.1
105.3
0.000 (V) VB: VC:
Bus V/Hz: 43.8 % Bus Frequency: 60.00 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: -14.8 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 1.0 (°)
Delta Frequency: 0.00 (Hz)

2 05/10/2020, 05:13:09.035 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #3: Pickup
81R #1: Pickup
81R #2: Pickup
ISSL #2: Pickup/Trip
Input Pickup: 1 7 9 11 12
Output Pickup:
System Status: Transfer Completed,
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding,
Fixed-Time Transfer Load Shedding,
Load Shedding (27B#3,81#1 and 81R#1),
S1 Breaker Closed,
External Manual Transfer Selected,
New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked,
Incomplete Transfer Blocked,
Blocking After Transfer Alarm ,

System Start Signal: ISSLogic #2

Page 1

Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 1 of 3)

D–4
 Appendix – D

No. Date & Time Event Information

Vps(S1): 0.114 (A)

Vps(S2):
Vps(Bus):
I(S1): VA:
I(S2): 52.6 (V)
120.0
120.1
0.000 (V)
(A) VB: VC:
Bus V/Hz: 4.6 % Bus Frequency: 653.88 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: 105.3 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 0.0 (°)
Delta Frequency: 0.10 (Hz)

3 02/05/2005, 27:05:13.009 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #1: Trip
50BF #1: Pickup
ISSL #3: Pickup
ISSL #4: Pickup
Input Pickup: 10
Output Pickup: 1 2
System Status: 27B #1 Bus UV Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2),
27B #2 Bus UV Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1),
S1 Breaker Failure,
S1 Breaker Closed,
New Source 1,
Manual Fast/Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK,
Manual Fast Transfer/Parallel Delta Frequency OK,
Manual Delayed In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK ,
Manual Delayed In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Auto Trip Operated,
S1/S2 Breaker Racked-Out Block,
S2 Breaker Failure,
S2 Breaker Closed,

System Start Signal: No Signal

Vps(S1): 6.000 (A)
Vps(S2):
Vps(Bus):
I(S1): VA:
I(S2): 60.1 (V)
120.2
0.009 (V)
(A) VB: VC:
Bus V/Hz: 4.6 % Bus Frequency: 653.88 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: 105.3 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 0.0 (°)
Delta Frequency: 0.10 (Hz)

4 05/04/200a, 10:27:05.013 27B #1: Trip

27B #2: Trip
81 #2: Pickup
81R #1: Trip
81R #2: Pickup/Trip
Auto Trip: Pickup
Trip Ckt. Monitor #2: Trip
ISSL #1: Pickup
ISSL #2: Trip
Input Pickup: 3
Output Pickup: 2 3 4 10
System Status: Open Transition Transfer In Process,
Fast Transfer Operated,
Residual Voltage Transfer Operated,
Trip S1 Breaker Command,
Close S1 Breaker Command,
Manual Fast Transfer Ready,

Page 2

Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 2 of 3)

D–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

No. Date & Time Event Information

Hot Parallel Transfer In Process,

S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement,
Trip S2 Breaker Command,

System Start Signal: No Signal

Vps(S1): 65.388 (A)
Vps(S2):
Vps(Bus):
I(S1): VA:
I(S2): 60.0 (V)
119.9
120.1
6.000 (V)
(A) VB: VC:
Bus V/Hz: 0.0 % Bus Frequency: 10.53 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: 105.3 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 0.6 (°)
Delta Frequency: 0.00 (Hz)

5 10/05/2000, 05:10:27.005 Fuse Loss: Trip

81R #2: Pickup
Auto Trip: Pickup
Trip Ckt. Monitor #1: Pickup
Close Ckt. Monitor #2: Pickup
50BF #1: Pickup/Trip
50BF #2: Pickup
ISSL #1: Pickup/Trip
ISSL #2: Pickup
ISSL #4: Trip
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 9
Output Pickup: 1 7 8 9 10
System Status: Transfer Ready,
External Manual Transfer Selected,
New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked,
Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked,
Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked,

System Start Signal: ISSLogic #2

Vps(S1): 65.388 (A)
Vps(S2):
Vps(Bus):
I(S1): VA:
I(S2): 0.0 (V)
52.6
120.0
65.388
(V)
(V)
(A) VB: VC:
Bus V/Hz: 1.0 % Bus Frequency: 10.52 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: 120.1 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 600.0 (°)
Delta Frequency: 0.00 (Hz)

Page 3

Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 3 of 3)

D–6
 Appendix – E

E Sequence of Events Sample Printout

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print‑ready screens provided by the ISScom Sequence
of Events Recorder Print Summary and Print Detail features.

E–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Sequence of Event Recorder

System: M4272
Date: 05/23/2006, 15:02:02

No. Date & Time Event Information

1 04/12/2006, 13:01:23.991 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

2 04/12/2006, 13:10:25.245 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

3 04/12/2006, 13:19:35.349 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

4 04/12/2006, 13:25:22.103 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

5 04/12/2006, 13:25:41.658 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

6 04/12/2006, 13:46:17.491 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

7 04/12/2006, 13:57:33.949 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8
Input Drop: 5

8 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.403 27B #1: Pickup

Input Pickup: 1 3 5 6

9 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.470 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout

Input Pickup: 1 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 1

10 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.474 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout

Input Pickup: 1 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 1

11 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.520 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #1: Drop
Input Pickup: 3 5 6 BFL
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop: 1

12 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.524 Fuse Loss: Drop

Input Pickup: 2 3 5 6
Page 1

Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)

E–2
 Appendix – E

No. Date & Time Event Information

Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:

13 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.528 27B #1: Pickup

Input Pickup: 2 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 1

14 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.541 27B #1: Pickup

Input Pickup: 2 3 5 6
Output Pickup: 1 4

15 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.591 27B #1: Pickup

Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 1 4
Input Drop: 5

16 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.595 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout

Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6
Output Pickup: 1 4

17 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.603 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #1: Drop
Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6 BFL
Output Pickup: 1 4

Page 2

Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout (page 2 of 2)

E–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 1 of 4)

E–4
 Appendix – E

Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 2 of 4)

E–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 3 of 4)

E–6
 Appendix – E

Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 4 of 4)

E–7
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

E–8
 Appendix – F

F Transfer Logic Time Sequence

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the Transfer Logic Time Sequence for the Sequential
Transfer Mode and the Simultaneous Transfer Mode.

F–1
 M‑4272 Instruction Book

Figure F-1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode

F–2
 Appendix – F

Figure F-2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode

F–3
 M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

F–4
 Appendix G

G Layup and Storage

Appendix G includes the recommended storage parameters, periodic surveillance activities

and layup configuration for the M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System.

Storage Requirements (Environment)

The recommended storage environment parameters for the M‑4272 are:
• The ambient temperature where the M‑4272 is stored is within a range of
5° C to 40° C
• The maximum relative humidity is less than or equal to 80% for temperatures
up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 50% for relative humidity at 40° C.
• The storage area environment is free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable
materials, dew, percolating water, rain and solar radiation.

Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance During Storage)

The M‑4272 power supply contains electrolytic capacitors. It is recommended that power be
applied to the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant power supply when installed) every
three to five years for a period of not less than one hour to help prevent the electrolytic
capacitors from drying out.

Layup Configuration
The M‑4272 includes a removable lithium battery backed TIMEKEEPER module (Beckwith
Electric component U25, Figure 5-14). The TIMEKEEPER module is the M‑4272 real-time
clock and also provides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memory when power is not applied
to the unit.
Layup of the M‑4272 requires verifying that the system clock is stopped. The steps necessary
to verify system clock status are as follows:

▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the diagnostic mode in relays that are installed in an active
protection scheme.

For units with the optional HMI panel:

1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses are installed.
2. Determine the unit power supply rating by observing the check box below the PS
terminals on the rear of the unit.
3. Apply power to the unit consistent with the rating determined in Step 2 (see
Section 5.3, External Connections). The unit will enter the selftest mode.
4. When the selftests are complete, then press ENTER to begin main menu.
5. Press the right arrow pushbutton until SETUP UNIT is displayed.
6. Press ENTER to access the SETUP UNIT menu.
7. Press the right arrow pushbutton until DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.

G–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

8. Press ENTER. A reset warning will be displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!

ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

88  WARNING: All relay functions and protection will be inoperative while the relay
is in diagnostic mode.

9. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset and DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
displayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST (RELAY). This is the beginning of the
diagnostic menu.
10. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed:

CLOCK TEST
 CLOCK led cal factory
11. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

CLOCK TEST
03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000
12. If the clock is running, press ENTER to stop the clock. The following is displayed:

CLOCK TEST
-CLOCK STOP-

QQ NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped, the seconds will be displayed as 80.

13. Press ENTER and verify the relay clock is stopped. A display similar to the following
is shown with the seconds stopped:

CLOCK TEST
03-JAN-09:01:80.000
14. When the clock has been verified to be stopped, then press EXIT until the following
message appears:

PRESS EXIT TO
EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE
15. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTIC MODE. The relay will reset and normal
running mode will resume.
QQ NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT will return the user to DIAGNOSTIC
MODE.

16. Remove power from the unit. The unit can now be placed in storage.

G–2
 Appendix G

For units without the optional HMI panel:

1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses are installed.
2. Determine the unit power supply rating by observing the check box below the PS
terminals on the rear of the unit.
3. Apply power to the unit consistent with the rating determined in Step 2 (see
Section 5.3 , External Connections). The unit will enter the selftest mode.
4. Install ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software (see
Section 5.5, ISScom Communications and Analysis Software Installation) on
a PC that includes the following:
• Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System or above
• Equipped with a serial port
5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1 of the relay to the PC serial port.
6. Open communications with the relay utilizing Section 5.6, Activating Initial Local
Communications.
7. Select System/Setup/Set Date/Time from the menu bar. ISScom will display the
"Set Date/Time" dialog screen Figure 3-17.
8. Verify that "Stop Clock" is displayed, then proceed as follows:
a. If "Stop Clock" is displayed, then select Save and go to Step 9.
b. If "Start Clock" is displayed, then select Stop Clock and then select Save.

9. Close communications with the unit by selecting Comm/Disconnect from the

menu bar.
10. Disconnect the null modem cable and then remove power from the unit. The unit
can now be placed in storage.

Storage of the M‑4272 greater than five years may require replacement of the lithium
battery prior to placing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith Electric Customer Service for
replacement procedure.

Maintenance Requirements
The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System does not require any maintenance over the length
of its service life. However, the unit includes diagnostic features that provide the means to
functionally test each element of the Motor Bus Transfer System. The M‑4272 also includes
the capability to test inputs, outputs and metering quantities of the interfacing system
application. Chapter 6, Testing contains the individual tests and procedures that are available
to be integrated into the user’s periodic Surveillance/Testing program.

G–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

G–4
 Appendix – H

H Index

27B #1 Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking

Bus Undervoltage Inputs Selection, 4‑59
Automatic Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2), 4‑82 Command Time Delay, 4‑59
Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1), 4‑82 Frequency Limit, 4‑59
and 27B #4 Bus Undervoltage, 4‑82 Phase Angle Limit, 4‑58
Bus Undervoltage, 4‑58, 4‑81:4‑82 Voltage Limit, 4‑58
50BF #1 Source Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑60
1 Breaker Failure, 4‑81, 4‑84:4‑85 Tab Save/Cancel, 4‑60
2 Breaker Failure, 4‑81, 4‑86:4‑87 Window, 4‑59

60FLB Bus VT Fuse Loss, 4‑88:4‑89 Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking

81 Bus Frequency, 4‑81, 4‑89 Inputs Selection, 4‑66
81R Bus ROCOF (Rate Of Change Of Frequency), Shedding Time Delay, 4‑66
4‑90 Save/Cancel, 4‑66
Delay, 4‑65
A
Automatic Fixed‑Time Transfer/Fast Transfer Load
Accessing Switches and Jumpers, 5‑16 Shedding Outputs, 4‑66
Activating Initial Local Communications, 3‑2, 5‑1, Automatic In‑Phase Transfer/Blocking
5‑22, G‑3 Inputs Selection, 4‑62
Additional Standard Features, SP‑3 Frequency Limit, 4‑61
Alphanumeric Display, SP‑19, 1‑3, 2‑1 Voltage Limit, 4‑61
Application, SP‑1, SP‑4, SP‑28:SP‑29, 1‑1, 1‑3, Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑62
1‑7, 1‑9, 4‑1, 4‑15, 4‑79, 4‑81, 5‑5, 5‑7:5‑8, 5‑21, Save/Cancel, 4‑62
5‑23:5‑24, 6‑6, G‑3
Window, 4‑61
Arrow Pushbuttons, 2‑2, 4‑3, 4‑5, 4‑7:4‑10,
4‑12:4‑13, 4‑17, 6‑4:6‑13, 6‑15:6‑16, 6‑19 Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking
AT – Auto Trip After External Breaker Close, 4‑79 Inputs Selection, 4‑64
Atmospheric Environment, SP‑22 Delay, 4‑64
Auto On Initiate, 4‑63
Calibration, 1‑4, 2‑5, 6‑1, 6‑3, 6‑19 Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑64
Close, SP‑3, SP‑5:SP‑6, 4‑52, 4‑54:4‑55 Shed on Voltage, 4‑64
Trip/Blocking Voltage Limit, 4‑63
Inputs Selection, 4‑80 Save/Cancel, 4‑64
Trip Option, 4‑79 Automatic Transfer/86P‑S1 Initiate (S1 to S2), 4‑57
Save/Cancel, 4‑80 Transfer Block, 4‑56
Command Time Delay, 4‑79

H–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Automatic Transfer Settings (ATS), 4‑53 Function Settings Tab, 4‑42

Fast Transfer Tab, 4‑58:4‑59 Control Inputs Configuration, 4‑49
Time Transfer Tab, 4‑65 Status Reset, 4‑49
Transfer Tab, 4‑60:4‑61 Transfer Lockout Time, 4‑46
Voltage Transfer Tab, 4‑63 Manual Initiate Time Delay, 4‑46
Automatic Transfer External Control Input Outputs Tab, 4‑49
Configuration, 4‑56 Manual Initiate Time Delay, 4‑46
Automatic Transfer Close After External Breaker Breaker
Trip, 4‑54 52a & 52b Position Disagreement, 4‑46
Automatic Transfer Transfer Mode, 4‑53 Closing Time Deviation, 4‑45
Block #1 (#2, #3), 4‑49
B Completed Outputs, 4‑52
Breaker Mode, 4‑43
Closing Time and Breaker Failure Monitoring, Ready Outputs, 4‑51
SP‑17 Command and Close Command Pulse Length,
Status LEDs, 2‑2 4‑47
Bus VT Fuse‑Loss Detection (60FL), SP‑3, SP‑5 Voltage Limit New Source, 4‑44
Button Test, 2‑5, 6‑3, 6‑11 Communication
Ports, SP‑18, SP‑34, 1‑4, 6‑3
C Setup, 3‑39, 4‑14:4‑15, A‑1

Calculations, SP‑16 Compliance, SP‑22

CCM (Close Circuit Monitor), 4‑81, 4‑101:4‑104 Connecting the
Change Active Profile (ISSLogic), 4‑97 Local Modem to the MBTS, 4‑24
Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, SP‑28:SP‑29, PC Modem, 4‑22:4‑23
4‑11, 4‑16, 4‑101, 4‑104, 5‑1, 5‑7:5‑8, 5‑16, 6‑8, Control/Status Inputs, SP‑16, SP‑18:SP‑19,
B‑1, B‑4 SP‑28:SP‑29, 1‑3, 4‑41, 5‑7:5‑8, 6‑6
Clear
Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel), 2‑15 D
Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel), 2‑16
Device
Clock ON/OFF, 6‑3, 6‑15
Address, 4‑14:4‑16
COM Port
ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel), 2‑14
Security, 2‑6
DHCP Protocol, 1‑4, 4‑18:4‑21
COM1/COM2 Loopback Test, 6‑12
Diagnostic
COM3 Test (2‑Wire), 6‑13
Test Procedures, 6‑1, 6‑3
Common Function Settings
Sync LED, 2‑2
Inputs Tab, 4‑48
Digital Motor Bus Transfer System M‑4272, SP‑1
Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Outputs, 4‑51
Direct Connection, 1‑5, 4‑14, B‑1
Common Settings (CS), 4‑42
Disabling COM Ports, 2‑6
Fast Transfer Ready Outputs, 4‑50
Display Test, 2‑5, 6‑3, 6‑12
After Transfer Time, 4‑47
DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature, 4‑99
Closing Time, 4‑44
Dropout Delay Timer, 4‑99
Status Inputs, 4‑48

H–2
 Appendix – H

E H
Electrical Environment, SP‑21 Hardware Requirements, 5‑21
ENTER Pushbutton, 2‑2, 2‑6, 2‑10, 2‑12, 2‑14:2‑16, Help Menu, 3‑41, 3‑47
2‑21, 4‑3:4‑4, 4‑7:4‑9, 4‑11, 4‑16, 4‑19:4‑20, HMI Module, SP‑3, SP‑19, 1‑3, 1‑6, 6‑11, B‑1
4‑53, 4‑67
Hot Parallel,
Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode, 6‑4:6‑6, 6‑8:6‑10,
Fast, In‑Phase, Residual Voltage and Fixed Time
6‑12:6‑13, 6‑15:6‑16, 6‑19
Transfer Methods, 1‑11
Equipment Required, 1‑2, 6‑2, 6‑4, 6‑17
Transfer, SP‑2, SP‑4, SP‑9, 1‑11:1‑12, 2‑7:2‑9,
Ethernet 3‑17, 3‑20, 4‑51, 4‑67, 4‑77:4‑79
Communication Settings, 4‑18
Protocols, 4‑18 I
EXIT Pushbutton, 2‑2, 2‑21, 6‑11, 4‑6
In‑Phase Transfer, SP‑2, SP‑4:SP‑5, SP‑7:SP‑8,
External Connections, SP‑23, SP‑28:SP‑29, 1‑1, 1‑13, 2‑7:2‑8, 4‑43:4‑44, 4‑53:4‑54, 4‑60:4‑62,
4‑101, 4‑104, 5‑1, 5‑5, 5‑7:5‑8, 5‑16, G‑1, G‑3 4‑64, 4‑66:4‑67, 4‑72:4‑74, 4‑77
Initial Setup Procedure, 5‑1, 5‑24
F Initializing the PC Modem, 4‑23
Fast Initiate
Sequential Transfer, 1‑12 and Reset Buttons, 3‑5
Simultaneous Transfer, 1‑12 Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel), 2‑10
Transfer, SP‑2, SP‑4:SP‑5, SP‑7:SP‑8, 1‑11, Input Test (Control/Status)
1‑13, 2‑7:2‑8, 2‑11, 3‑17, 4‑43, 4‑50:4‑51, Inputs 1–18, 6‑6
4‑53:4‑54, 4‑58:4‑60, 4‑62, 4‑64, 4‑66:4‑67,
Coil, Close Coil) Inputs 19–22, 6‑7
4‑70:4‑72, 4‑74, 4‑76:4‑77
Installing
Fixed Time Transfer, SP‑2, SP‑4:SP‑5, SP‑7,
SP‑14, 1‑11, 1‑13, 2‑7:2‑8, 4‑41, 4‑43, 4‑50:4‑51, ISScom, 5‑21
4‑53:4‑54, 4‑59, 4‑61, 4‑65:4‑66, 4‑71, 4‑73, 4‑88 the Modems, 4‑22
Front Panel Instruction Book Contents, 1‑1
Controls and Indicators, 1‑1, 2‑1 Insulation Coordination, 5‑5
Status LED Test, 6‑9 IRIG‑B, SP‑3, SP‑18:SP‑19, SP‑21, 1‑4, 3‑14, 4‑14,
Function Settings, SP‑10:SP‑11, 1‑1, 4‑41:4‑45, 4‑18, B‑2
4‑47:4‑51, 4‑53, 4‑59, 4‑81:4‑84, 4‑86, 4‑88, A‑1, ISScom Communications and Analysis Software
A‑15:A‑25, A‑35:A‑37 Installation, 5‑1, 5‑21, G‑3
Functional Description, 2‑1, 3‑1:3‑2
G Installation and Setup, 5‑21

General ISSL (ISSLogic), 4‑81, 4‑92, 4‑94

Information, 5‑1, 5‑24 ISSLogic
Unit Setup, 4‑1 Function Setup, 4‑94
Grounding Requirements, 5‑5 Settings and Logic Functions, 4‑92
ISSplot
Auto All, 3‑47
Change
Colors, 3‑45
Scale, 3‑46

H–3
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Default, 3‑46 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking

File Menu, 3‑44 Inputs Selection, 4‑78
Select Frequency Limit, 4‑77
New Source for Delta Angle, 3‑44 Phase Angle Limit, 4‑77
Waveforms, 3‑45 Voltage Limit, 4‑77
Settings Menu, 3‑44 Window, 4‑78
View Menu, 3‑44 Command Time Delay, 4‑78
Window Menu/Help Menu, 3‑47 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Blocking
Inputs Selection, 4‑73
L Frequency Limit, 4‑72
Layup Configuration, 1‑2, G‑1 Voltage Limit, 4‑72
Lockout/Blocking, SP‑3:SP‑4, SP‑6, SP‑28:SP‑29, Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑74
2‑7:2‑9, 3‑17, 4‑46, 4‑50:4‑52, 4‑60, 4‑62, 4‑64, Window, 4‑73
4‑66, 4‑72, 4‑74, 4‑77, 4‑79
Manual Operation, 1‑1, 2‑1, 2‑7, 3‑40
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking
M
Inputs Selection, 4‑76
M‑3931 Delay, 4‑76
Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module, 1‑3, 1‑6 On Initiate, 4‑75
Serial Communication Cables, 1‑5 Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑76
Motor Bus Transfer System, 1‑1:1‑3, 4‑41, 5‑24, Shed on Voltage, 4‑76
6‑19, A‑1, B‑1, G‑1, G‑3 Voltage Limit, 4‑75
M‑3919A Graphic Display Unit/Touch Screen Save/Cancel, 4‑77
Human Machine Interface, SP‑33
Manual Transfer
M‑3972 Status Module, SP‑3, SP‑19, 1‑1, 1‑4:1‑5,
Transfer
2‑1, 2‑3
Block, 4‑69
M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System, SP‑21,
SP‑23, SP‑37 Initiate, 4‑69
M‑5072 Retrofit Kit Save/Cancel, 4‑69
Features, SP‑37 Settings
For M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System, (MTS), 4‑67
SP‑37 Control Input Configuration, 4‑68
Maintenance Requirements, G‑3 Transfer Tab, 4‑70
Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Parallel Transfer Tab, 4‑77:4‑78
Inputs Selection, 4‑71 Transfer Tab, 4‑72:4‑73
Command Time Delay, 4‑71 Voltage Transfer Tab, 4‑75
Frequency Limit, 4‑70 Setup Tab, 4‑68
Phase Angle Limit, 4‑70 MBTS
Voltage Limit, 4‑70 Outputs, 5‑6
Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4‑71 Setup System, 4‑28
Save/Cancel, 4‑72 Mechanical
Window, 4‑71 Environment, SP‑22
Dimensions, 5‑1:5‑2, 5‑4

H–4
 Appendix – H

Metering Replacement Fuses, 5‑6

Test Setup, 6‑17 Reset
Tests, 6‑1, 6‑17 Delay Timer, 4‑99
Module LED Test, 2‑5, 6‑10 System Error Codes and Output Counters
(ISScom), 2‑15
Monitor Status/Metering, 2‑21
Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups), SP‑15 Residual Voltage Transfer, SP‑2, SP‑4:SP‑5,
SP‑7:SP‑8, 1‑13, 2‑7:2‑8, 4‑43, 4‑53:4‑54,
4‑63:4‑64, 4‑66:4‑67, 4‑75:4‑77
O
Opening Screen Connect Menu, 3‑7 S
Optional
S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status),
Ethernet Port, 4‑14, B‑2 4‑86:4‑87
Features, SP‑3, SP‑36 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status),
Oscillograph Setup, 3‑31:3‑32, 4‑1, 4‑25, A‑1, A‑32 4‑86, 4‑88
Oscillographic Recorder, SP‑15:SP‑16, 2‑22, 3‑31, Screen Blanking, 2‑1
4‑25, Sensing Inputs, SP‑16, 5‑5
Output Sequence of Events
and Input Status LEDs, 2‑3 Recorder Setup, 3‑26, 4‑27
Contacts, SP‑3, SP‑12, SP‑17, SP‑19, SP‑22, Recording, SP‑16
2‑21, 3‑10, 4‑41, 5‑6, 6‑4:6‑5, A‑1
Sequential Transfer Mode, SP‑4, SP‑26, 2‑7, 4‑43,
Relay Test, 6‑4 4‑84, 4‑86, F‑1:F‑2
Overview of Manual Transfer Methods and Transfer Serial
Modes, 2‑7 Port (RS‑485), 4‑14
Ports (RS‑232), 4‑14
P
Service Conditions and Conformity to CE Standard,
Patent & Warranty, SP‑23 5‑1
Physical, SP‑23, SP‑36:SP‑37, SP‑39, 1‑1, 1‑4, Set Date And Time (ISScom), 4‑11
4‑48, 5‑1:5‑2, 5‑4, B‑4, C‑1 Setup
Power Oscillograph Recorder, 3‑31, 4‑25
Input Options, SP‑16 Procedure, 5‑1, 5‑24
On Self Test, 6‑1:6‑2, 6‑17 Sequence of Events Recorder, 4‑27
Supply #1 & #2 LED, 2‑3 Tab, 4‑53:4‑54, 4‑56, 4‑58, 4‑68
Power up Self‑Test and Continuous On‑Line Testing, Shortcut Command Buttons, 3‑4
SP‑17
Simultaneous Transfer Mode, SP‑3, SP‑5, SP‑17,
Pre‑Commissioning Checkout, 5‑1, 5‑23 SP‑27, 2‑7:2‑8, 4‑43, 4‑59, 4‑71, 4‑84, 4‑86, F‑1,
F‑3
R Standard Features, SP‑2:SP‑3
Status
Recommended Storage Parameters, SP‑23, 1‑2,
G‑1 Module, SP‑3, SP‑18:SP‑19, 1‑1, 1‑4:1‑5, 2‑1,
2‑3, 2‑6, 2‑10:2‑11, 4‑32, 6‑10
References, 1‑14
Monitoring and Metering, 2‑1, 2‑18
Remote/Local
RESET Pushbutton, SP‑18:SP‑19, 2‑3, 2‑6,
Button, 3‑5
2‑10:2‑11, 6‑11
Control (MBTS Front Panel), 2‑12

H–5
M‑4272 Instruction Book

Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance Trip

During Storage), G‑1 (TCM) and Close (CCM) Circuit Monitor Status
Switching The Active Setpoint Profile (ISScom), LEDs, 2‑3
2‑17 Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open Condition, SP‑11, 4‑47
SYS OK LED Flash/Illuminated, 6‑16
System U
Clock, 3‑14, 4‑11, G‑1
Unit
Diagrams, 4‑1, 4‑28:4‑29, 4‑34
Isolation, 5‑5
Error Codes and Output Counters, 2‑15
Setup, 3‑25, 3‑32, 3‑36:3‑37, 3‑39, 4‑1, 5‑24,
Menu, 3‑6, 3‑8, 3‑12, 4‑28, 4‑41
6‑4, B‑1
Diagram and Sync Scope, 2‑20
Metering and Status, 2‑18, 3‑16, 5‑24 V
Line Diagram, 3‑17, 3‑19
Scope, 3‑17:3‑18 Voltage/Current
Profile, 3‑34 Verification, 6‑18
Method, 2‑17, 3‑34, 4‑32 Withstand, SP‑21
Data From System, 3‑35
Setpoints, 1‑12, 3‑9:3‑11, 4‑1, 4‑41:4‑42, 4‑97,
W
5‑24, A‑1, A‑6:A‑25
Warranty, SP‑23, SP‑36, SP‑39
T
Target/Status Indicators and Controls, SP‑18
TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor), 4‑81, 4‑104:4‑106
Testing Overview, 6‑1
Tests and Standards, SP‑17, SP‑21
Tools/Calibrate
Unit, 3‑40
Menu, 3‑36
Setup, 3‑37, 4‑6
Access Codes/User Access, 3‑37
Error Codes / Counters, 2‑15, 3‑40
Firmware Update, 3‑40
Outputs Test, 3‑38
Torque Requirements, 5‑6, 6‑3, 6‑9, 6‑18
Transfer
Event Log, SP‑15:SP‑16, 1‑2, 2‑1, 2‑18, 2‑21,
3‑8, 3‑15, 3‑20:3‑25, 4‑1, B‑1, D‑1:D‑6
Methods, SP‑4, SP‑25, 1‑11, 2‑7:2‑8, 4‑43
Modes, SP‑4, 1‑3, 2‑7
Settings, SP‑7:SP‑11, 2‑8, 2‑19, 3‑16, 4‑1,
4‑41:4‑42, 4‑51, 4‑53:4‑54, 4‑56, 4‑58:4‑61, 4‑63,
4‑65, 4‑67:4‑70, 4‑72:4‑73, 4‑75, 4‑77:4‑79, A‑1,
A‑6:A‑14, A‑33:A‑34

H–6
 Declaration of Conformity Appendix – I

I Declaration of Conformity

I–1
M‑4272 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

I–2
 Legal Information
Patent Indemnification
The Seller shall not be liable for any property
The units described in this manual are covered by damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage
U.S. Patents, with other patents pending. arising out of, connected with, or resulting from
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller, this contract, or from the performance or breach
its directors, officers, agents, and employees from thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished
any and all costs and expense, damage or loss, under this contract.
resulting from any alleged infringementof United In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,
States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,
trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law, including but not limited to, loss of profits or
arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any
designs, specifications, or instructions. associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of
purchased power, cost of substitute equipment,
facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or

Warranty damages of customers or employees of the Buyer

for such damages, regardless of whether said claim
or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort
Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the including negligence, or otherwise.
subject matter of this contract will be manufactured
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable
in a good workmanlike manner and all materials
for any personal injury whatsoever.
used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for
the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a It is agreed that when the equipment furnished
period of ten years from date of shipment of the hereunder are to be used or performed in connec-
equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or
by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in activity, Seller shall have no liability for any
accordance with Seller’s specifications of the nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,
product, Seller shall at his expense correct the or nuclear contamination to any property located at
same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees
equipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’s to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against
responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace- any and all liability associated therewith whatso-
ment value of the equipment furnished under this ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.
contract. Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear
reactor and includes the site on which any of the
Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied
foregoing is located, all operations conducted on
other than those set out above. Seller specifically
such site, and all premises used for such opera-
excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility
tions.
and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the description
contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for
consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of
Notice:
whatever nature. Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith
Any equipment returned for repair must be sent Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of
with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment identification.
must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore- The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein
mentioned warranties are void if the value of the are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric
unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return. Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;
therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-
tion of the apparatus described therein without
written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained herein
shall be construed as an express warranty of
affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and
any and all such express warranties are specifically
excluded nor shall such illustration or description
imply a warranty that the product is merchantable
or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no
warranties which extend beyond those contained in
the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.

All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval
of the Company.
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
 BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121
marketing@beckwithelectric.com
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2015

© 2005 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800‑4272‑IB‑10 01/19

Printed in USA